Revit Structure 2009

Imperial Tutorials

April 2008

©

2008 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ActiveShapes, Actrix, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Your World, Design Your World (design/logo), DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, EditDV, Education by Design, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, FBX, Filmbox, FMDesktop, Freewheel, GDX Driver, Gmax, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HOOPS, HumanIK, i-drop, iMOUT, Incinerator, IntroDV, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), LocationLogic, Lustre, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, MotionBuilder, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, Recognize, Render Queue, Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, SteeringWheels, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Bridge, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Hydro, Visual Landscape, Visual Roads, Visual Survey, Visual Syllabus, Visual Toolbox, Visual Tugboat, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Wiretap, and WiretapCentral The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner, Discreet, Fire, Flame, Flint, Frost, Inferno, Multi-Master Editing, River, Smoke, Sparks, Stone, and Wire All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved.

Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Chapter 1

Understanding the Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Navigating the Revit Structure User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Performing Common Tasks in Revit Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Chapter 2

Express Workshops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Structural Modelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a New Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding New Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing/Linking a DWG File . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Column Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Structural Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Structural Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Structural Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Structural Beam Systems . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Structural Slab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copying Elements to Multiple Levels . . . . . . . . Adding Foundations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Structural Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing/Linking a DWG File . . . . . . . . . . . Using a Detail Drawing as a Section View . . . . . . Placing a Detail in a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adjusting Line Weights of Imported Details . . . . Creating a New Details Sheet from a Detail Library . Preparing Views for Detailing in a Section . . . . . Adding a Cantilever to a Slab . . . . . . . . . . . . Coping Beam Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Detail Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Final Annotation and Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 . 19 . 20 . 21 . 24 . 27 . 32 . 35 . 47 . 49 . 55 . 59 . 62 . 63 . 65 . 66 . 70 . 73 . 75 . 79 . 82 . 84 . 98

v

Chapter 3

Modifying Project and System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying General System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Fill Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Object Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Line Patterns and Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Units of Measurement, Temporary Dimensions, and Detail Level Options . Modifying Project Browser Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Structural Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Choosing the Base Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Modifying Families and Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Views and View Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Structural Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Import/Export Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up Shared and Project Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Named Print Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 . 107 . 109 . 112 . 113 . 115 . 115 . 118 . 120 . 122 . 125 . 127 . 128 . 130 . 130 . 131 . 137 . 139 . 142 . 143 . 144 . 146

Chapter 4

Starting a New Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Importing/Linking Drawing Files . . . . . . . . . . Importing/Linking a 2D AutoCAD File . . . . Importing /Linking an AutoCAD Architecture Linking a Revit Architecture File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 . 149 . 151 . 154

Chapter 5

Creating a Structural Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Creating a Structural Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Grid Lines to the Imported Drawing . Adding Structural Columns . . . . . . . . . . Adding Horizontal Framing . . . . . . . . . . Adding Beam Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Composite Deck . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Bracing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shear Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Isolated Foundations . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Structural Model . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Steel Framing of Level 2 . . . Adding Cantilevered Beams . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Concrete Slab with Metal Deck . . . Adding Shafts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Duplicating Framing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Shape-Modified Slab . . . . . . . . . Adding a Shape-Modified Curved Slab . . . . . Adding Miter Joins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Curved Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding an Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding an Opening in a Beam . . . . . . . . . Adding an Opening to a Beam Family . . . . . Adding Foundation Walls . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Piers or Pilasters . . . . . . . . . . . . Framing Ground and Parking Garage Levels . . Placing a Wall Foundation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 . 162 . 167 . 171 . 173 . 180 . 182 . 184 . 186 . 188 . 188 . 194 . 196 . 199 . 201 . 205 . 216 . 224 . 229 . 236 . 239 . 241 . 246 . 249 . 250 . 257

vi | Contents

Chapter 6

Precast

Concrete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 . 261 . 263 . 264 . 265 . 265

Creating a Precast Beam System . . . . . . . . . Adding a Beam System to the Structure . . Changing the Beam System Properties . . . Changing the Beam System Clear Spacing . Modifying the Precast Beam Family . . . . . . . Adding a Chamfer to the Beam . . . . . .

Chapter 7

Creating

Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 . 275 . 280 . 280 . 284 . 284 . 287 . 292 . 292

Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project . . . . . Creating a Drawing Sheet . . . . . . . . Adding a Sheet to the Project . . . . . . Creating New Views to Add to Sheets . . Creating a Detail Library . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Drafting View Detail Library . Importing Details from the Library . . . Using Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Symbol Legend . . . . . . . .

Chapter 8

Scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Scheduling Beam Quantities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Structural Framing Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Shared Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Type Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customizing the Type Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Instance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Graphical Column Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create the Graphical Column Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change the Schedule Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Multiple Sheets for the Graphical Column Schedule . Exporting Project Information with ODBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 . 297 . 299 . 302 . 307 . 313 . 316 . 316 . 320 . 324 . 326 . 326

Chapter 9

Steel Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Setting Up Section Views on Sheets . . . . . . . . . Cutting Sections and Adding Views to Sheets . Detailing Steel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Welded Bracing Detail . . . . . . . Creating a Bolted Angle Detail . . . . . . . . . Creating a Facade Support Detail . . . . . . . Creating a Drafting View Detail . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Deck Span Transition Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 . 329 . 333 . 333 . 339 . 341 . 344 . 345

Chapter 10

Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Concrete Modelling Examples . . . . . . . . . . Reinforcement in a Beam . . . . . . . . . . Reinforcement in a Column . . . . . . . . Area Reinforcement in a Structural Wall . . Area Reinforcement in a Slab . . . . . . . . Path Reinforcement in a Slab . . . . . . . Sketch Reinforcement in a Footing . . . . Sketch Reinforcement in a Structural Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 . 351 . 359 . 364 . 373 . 378 . 382 . 393

Chapter 11

Annotating and Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403 Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403

Contents | vii

Controlling Witness Line Location . . . . . . Modifying Dimension Properties . . . . . . . Working with Alignments and Constraints . . Creating Automatic Linear Wall Dimensions . Working with Spot Dimensions . . . . . . . . Annotating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Custom Beam Tag . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 411 . 414 . 415 . 420 . 421 . 428 . 428 . 435

Chapter 12

Worksets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Using Worksharing in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets . . . . Assigning Worksets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Making the Entire Workset Editable . . . . . . . . . . . Using Worksets with Multiple Users . . . . . . . . . . . Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439 . 439 . 445 . 448 . 453 . 457

Chapter 13

Project Coordination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Coordination Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Opening the Modified Revit Architecture Interference Check . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Revision Tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Up a Revision Table . . . . . . . Sketching Revision Clouds . . . . . . . . Add Remaining Revisions . . . . . . . . Tagging Revision Clouds . . . . . . . . . Working with Revisions . . . . . . . . . . . . file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461 . 461 . 468 . 474 . 474 . 475 . 476 . 480 . 481

Chapter 14

Structural Analytical Modelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
Applying the Analytical Model to the Design Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analytical Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Load Cases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Loads to the Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Load Combination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transfer Project Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Documenting the Analytical Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Examples of Analytical Adjustment and Reset in the Model . . . . . . . . . . . . Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model . . . . . . . . . . . . Boundary Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the Analytical Model to be Calculated in Third Party Analysis Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485 . 486 . 494 . 496 . 505 . 507 . 509 . 512 . 514 . 531 . 534

Chapter 15

Exporting Revit Structure Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
Exporting CAD Formats . . . . . . . . . . Exporting the 3D Model to AutoCAD Exporting a 2D view to AutoCAD . . Exporting Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Architecture 2007 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535 . 535 . 539 . 540

Chapter 16

About Families and the Family Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
Using Families and the Family Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545 Introduction to Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545

Chapter 17

Creating Components in the Family Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
Creating Custom Families . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Custom Metal Deck Family . . . Customizing a Castellated Beam . . . . . . Creating a Custom Reinforcement Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551 . 551 . 563 . 565

viii | Contents

Creating In-Place Families . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Step Footing In-Place Family . . Creating a Titleblock Family . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet . Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock . Adding the Titleblock to a New Project . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. 573 . 574 . 581 . 581 . 584 . 592

Chapter 18

Truss Building . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595
Working with Trusses . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Trusses to a Project . . . . . . Customizing Truss Parameters . . . . Modifying the Shape of a Truss . . . Creating a Custom Truss Family . . . Building a Truss with Drafting Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595 . 595 . 604 . 608 . 611 . 616

Chapter 19

Creating Multiple Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625
Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project . Creating the Structural Design Options . . Creating the Roof System Design Options . Managing Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625 . 626 . 636 . 643

Chapter 20

Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647
Linking Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Linking Building Models from Different Project Files . Repositioning Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility . . . . . Managing Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models . . . . . . . Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates . . . . . . . . Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates . . . . . Working with a Linked Building Model . . . . . . . . Managing Shared Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Components of Linked Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 648 . 648 . 657 . 660 . 662 . 665 . 665 . 667 . 670 . 672 . 673

Chapter 21

Project Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677
Using Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677 Phasing Your Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 679 Creating Phase-Specific Structural Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 688

Chapter 22

Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 693
Rendering an Exterior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model . Adding Trees to the Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Exterior Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding RPC People . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Interior Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Interior Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Recording Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position . . Recording the Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 693 . 694 . 701 . 705 . 709 . 713 . 714 . 717 . 721 . 726 . 727 . 730 . 732

Chapter 23

Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 733
Creating Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 733

Contents | ix

Creating an Extruded Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint . Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aligning Roof Eaves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Mansard Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Low Slope Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Fascia, Gutters, and Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Roof Fascia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Gutters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 733 . 738 . 741 . 743 . 746 . 748 . 750 . 751 . 754 . 762 . 762 . 764 . 765

Chapter 24

Grouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 769
Creating, Modifying, and Nesting Groups . Creating and Placing a Group . . . . Modifying a Group . . . . . . . . . . Nesting Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Detail Groups . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail Group . . . . . . . Using Attached Detail Groups . . . . Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . . . . Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 769 . 769 . 777 . 781 . 784 . 784 . 787 . 790 . 790

x | Contents

Understanding the Concepts

1

In this tutorial, you learn the fundamental concepts of Revit® Structure 2009. You learn how Revit Structure works, the terms used when working with the product, and how to navigate the user interface. This introduction helps you get started with the Revit Structure tutorials and presents the fundamental concepts of the product, including:
■ ■ ■ ■

how Revit Structure works. the terms used when working with the product. how to navigate the user interface. how to perform some common tasks in the product.

1

Using the Tutorials
In this lesson, you learn how to use the Revit Structure tutorials, including where to find the training files and how to create a new Revit Structure project from a template file. The Contents tab of the Revit Structure Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit Structure. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit Structure.

Accessing Training Files
Training files are Revit Structure projects, templates, and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. In this exercise, you learn where the training files are located, as well as how to open and save them.

Where are the training files located?
Training files, by default, are located in C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RST 2009\Training. Training files are grouped into 3 folders within the training folder:

Common: generic files often used to teach a concept. These files are not dependent on imperial or metric units. Common file names have a c_ prefix. Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. Imperial file names have an i_ prefix. Metric: files for users working with metric units. Metric file names have an m_ prefix.

■ ■

NOTE Depending on your installation, your training folder may be in a different location. Contact your CAD manager for more information. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials, such as templates and families, is located and accessed in the training files location. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system, all content used in the tutorials is included in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files.

What is a training file?
A training file is a Revit Structure project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. Many tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. In other tutorials, you create a project from a template, rather than opening an existing training file. Open a training file 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog, scroll down, and click the Training Files icon. 3 In the right pane, double-click Common, Imperial, or Metric, depending on the type of training file.

2 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts

4 Click the training file name, and click Open. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name, click File menu ➤ Save As. In many cases, the work you do in a project during a tutorial exercise becomes the starting point for the next exercise. In many tutorials, you create a project or modify an existing project, save the changes, and use the saved version of the file to begin the next exercise or lesson. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog:

For Save in, select the folder in which to save the new file. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. Note where you save the file so you can open it for additional exercises as required. For File name, enter the new file name. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. For example, if you open c_settings.rvt and make changes, you should save this file with a new name such as c_settings_modified.rvt. For Files of type, verify that Project Files (*.rvt) is selected, and then click Save.

Create a project from a template 7 To create a project from a template, rather than using an existing training file, click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project.

8 In the New Project dialog, under Create new, select Project. 9 Under Template file, verify the second option is selected, and click Browse.

Accessing Training Files | 3

10 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\Templates. 11 In the Choose Template dialog, review the Revit Structure templates. Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding structure type. For most tutorial projects, you will use the default template, and customize the project as necessary. 12 Select Structural Analysis-Default.rte, and click Open. 13 Click OK.

Understanding the Basics
In this lesson, you learn what Revit Structure is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit Structure is built. You learn the terminology, the hierarchy of elements, how to navigate the user interface, and how to perform some common tasks in the product.

What is Revit Structure 2009?
The Revit Structure platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design, drawings, and schedules required for a building project. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design, scope, quantities, and phases when you need it. In the Revit Structure model, every drawing sheet, 2D and 3D view, and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. As you work in drawing and schedule views, Revit Structure collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. The Revit Structure parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views, drawing sheets, schedules, sections, and plans.

What is meant by parametric?
The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the model that enable the coordination and change management that Revit Structure provides. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. In mathematics and mechanical CAD, the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters; hence, the operation of the software is parametric. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit Structure: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project, and Revit Structure coordinates that change through the entire project. The following are examples of these element relationships:

Pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. If the length of the elevation is changed, the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. In this case, the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. The edge of a roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved, the roof remains connected. In this case, the parameter is one of association or connection.

How does Revit Structure keep things updated?
A fundamental characteristic of a building information modeling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. When you change something, Revit Structure immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. Revit Structure uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. The second is its approach to propagating structural changes. The

4 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts

result of these concepts is software that works like you do, without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design.

Element behavior in a parametric modeler
In projects, Revit Structure uses 3 types of elements:

Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the structure. They display in relevant views of the model. For example, structural walls, slabs, ramps, and roofs are model elements. Datum elements help to define project context. For example, column grids, levels, and reference planes are datum elements. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. They help to describe or document the model. For example, dimensions, tags, and 2D detail components are view-specific elements.

There are 2 types of model elements:

Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. For example, structural walls and roofs are hosts. Model components are all the other types of elements in the structural model. For example, beams, structural columns, and 3D rebar are model components.

There are 2 types of view-specific elements:

Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. For example, dimensions, tags, and symbols are annotation elements. Details are 2D items that provide details about the structural model in a particular view. Examples include detail lines, filled regions, and 2D detail components.

This implementation provides flexibility for designers. Revit Structure elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly; programming is not required. If you can draw, you can define new parametric elements in Revit Structure. In Revit Structure, the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the structure. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. Often, you do nothing to establish these relationships; they are implied by what you do and how you draw. In other cases, you can explicitly control them, by locking a dimension or aligning 2 walls, for example.

Understanding the Basics | 5

Understanding Revit Structure 2009 terms
Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit Structure are common, industry-standard terms familiar to most engineers. However, some terms are unique to Revit Structure. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. Project: In Revit Structure, the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. The project file contains all information for the structural design, from geometry to construction data. This information includes components used to design the model, views of the project, and drawings of the design. By using a single project file, Revit Structure makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views, elevation views, section views, schedules, and so forth). Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements, such as roofs, slabs, and beams. Most often, you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a structure. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the structure; for example, first floor, top of wall, or bottom of foundation. To place levels, you must be in a section or elevation view.
South Elevation View of Structure

Element: When creating a project, you add Revit Structure parametric building elements to the design. Revit Structure classifies elements by categories, families, and types. Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a structural design. For example, categories of model elements include columns and beams. Categories of annotation elements include tags and text notes. Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties), identical use, and similar graphical representation. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties, but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. For example, a truss could be considered one family, although the web supports that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. Families are either component families or system families:

Component families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. System families include slabs, dimensions, roofs, and levels. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files.
■ ■

Revit Structure predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. For example, the behavior of a structural wall is predefined in the system. However, you can create different types of walls with different compositions. System families can be transferred between projects.

6 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts

In the following illustration. The Revit Structure window is arranged to make navigation easy. Navigating the Revit Structure User Interface One of the advantages of Revit Structure is its ease of use. In the steps that follow. such as a 30” X 42” title block.Type: Each family can have several types. Start a new project 1 On the Standard toolbar. specifically its clear user interface. you navigate and become familiar with the user interface. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. you will soon feel comfortable learning this interface. The Title Bar 2 Place your cursor at the top of the user interface and notice the Title Bar contains the name of the project and the view that is currently open. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the structure (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). the user interface is labeled. A type can be a specific size of a family. Navigating the Revit Structure User Interface | 7 . making it easy to understand what each button represents. click . This creates a new project based on the default template. A type can also be a style. Revit Structure uses standard Microsoft® Windows® conventions. If you have used any other product that follows these conventions. Even the toolbar buttons are labeled.

and View. The Toolbar 4 On the Window menu. the Level 2 structural plan view is the default open view.By default. Another timesaving tool for selecting commands is to place the cursor in the drawing area and right-click. You can use the toolbar grips to resize and move each toolbar. The Menu Bar 3 Click View menu ➤ Zoom. you simply type the required keystrokes to run the command. These shortcut keys are listed next to the command on the menu. Edit. new projects are numbered consecutively until saved with a new name. In addition. The context menu changes depending on the function you are performing and what is currently selected. There are 6 toolbars across the top of the window just beneath the Menu Bar. TIP The project template determines which view is opened and the view names as well. click Toolbar. While working in the drawing area. 8 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts . The Menu Bar across the top of the window includes standard menu names such as File. You then click the command name to run the command. The buttons on the toolbar represent some of the more common commands. Many of the commands also have shortcut keys to speed up the design process. TIP For example. the shortcut key for Zoom To Fit is ZF. You can choose commands by placing the cursor over the menu name and clicking. You can control the visibility of the toolbars and turn the toolbar text labels on or off within the Window ➤ Toolbar menu.

The Type Selector is a context-sensitive drop-down list. Notice the bar beneath the toolbars contains design options used to draw the structural wall. The Options Bar is context-sensitive and varies depending on the tool or selected component. First. notice the list of columns that are available. 9 In the Type Selector. 6 On the Design Bar. You use the Type Selector in 2 ways. The Design Bar 10 On the Window menu. On the left side of the Options Bar. the Type Selector displays a list of beams available within the project. Select the drop-down list to view the list of beams. click Structural Column. If you select the Beam tool. The Type Selector 7 The drop-down list on the left side of the Options Bar is called the Type Selector. The Show Design Bars dialog box is displayed. you can select any component and then change the type using the Type Selector. click Beam. Navigating the Revit Structure User Interface | 9 . click Structural Wall. click Design Bars. Within the drawing area. The list of components in the Type Selector is identical to the components listed in the Families branch of the Project Browser under the respective category. You can also use the Type Selector to change a component type after it has been added to the structural model. Notice the design options available on the Options Bar are now applicable to beams. notice a beam type is specified. For example. if you intend to add a beam. you can select a component type before you add it to the structural model. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.The Options Bar 5 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. the beam type active in the Type Selector is the beam type that is added when you insert it into the structural model.

Each tab contains frequently used commands that are also available from the Menu Bar. There are 9 tabs in the Design Bar. You can control which tabs display by selecting them in the Show Design Bars dialog box. and the respective commands are displayed on the Design Bar. containing buttons grouped by function. TIP You can turn the visibility of each tab on and off by right-clicking on the Design Bar and selecting the tab from the context menu.The Design Bar is located on the left side of the interface. ■ ■ ■ ■ Basics tab — commands for creating most basic structural model components View tab — commands for creating different views in the project Architectural tab — commands for adding architectural components to your project Drafting tab — commands for both adding annotation symbols and creating the sheet details for the project construction documents Rendering tab — commands for creating rendered 3D images Site tab — commands for adding site components and producing site plans Massing tab — commands for executing conceptual massing commands Modelling tab — all the commands to create structural model elements Construction tab — commands for creating construction industry information ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ To access the commands within a tab. 10 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts . 11 Click OK. immediately below the Type Selector. click the tab.

Navigating the Revit Structure User Interface | 11 . In the Project Browser.The Project Browser 12 To the right of the Design Bar is the Project Browser. select Views (all).

families. The browser is conveniently organized by view type (structural plans.sign next to the name. so you can position it wherever you want by dragging the Project Browser title bar to a new location. and group name. You can right-click in the browser to add. You can also drag and drop from the browser into the drawing area. To open a view. walls). click Browser Organization. 13 In the Type Selector. The browser is also dockable. and groups. and rename views. sheets. making it easy to add a family or group to the project or add a view to a sheet.You can use the Project Browser to quickly manage the views. 12 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts . You can expand or compress the browser list by clicking the + or . scroll through the sorting available for the Project Browser. reports. double-click the name. schedules. delete. columns. family category (beams. and groups of your current project. 14 On the Settings menu. 3D). elevations. families.

" TIP The cursor tooltip that displays is identical to the note on the Status Bar. 15 In the Browser Organization dialog box.You can create and modify Project Browser organization schemes for both views and sheets. notice the Status Bar provides information regarding what you should do next. 18 On the Design Bar. you can instantly change the sorting within the Project Browser by selecting the scheme in the Type Selector. Do not click. After you create a browser organization scheme. click Cancel. The cursor is displayed as a pencil. it tells you to "Click to enter wall start point. click Structural Wall. Navigating the Revit Structure User Interface | 13 . The Status Bar 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. In this case. 17 Place the cursor near the center of the drawing area. click Modify. In the bottom left corner of the window.

14 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts . Context-sensitive help is also available to provide instant help on any menu command. You can select a topic on the Contents tab. Revit Structure Help 21 Click Help menu ➤ Revit Structure 2009 Help. click . press F1 to get help on that dialog. The Status Bar also provides information. 20 Press TAB. Tooltips: To see tooltips. In the Status Bar. or save commonly used pages on the Favorites tab. notice that the name of the preselected component is Views: Elevation: Building Elevation. rest the cursor over the Toolbar button until the tooltip displays. Be sure to have the Standard toolbar displayed. and click to get the topic associated with the window.You can turn the Status Bar visibility on or off from the Window menu. TIP When attempting to select a specific component in a crowded or detailed view. You can also press SHIFT+F1. press SHIFT+F1. Help is available online at all times during a Revit Structure session. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Structure In this exercise. Make sure you place the cursor over the arrow portion of the symbol so that it is highlighted. in conjunction with tooltips. use the Tab key to alternate between nearby components. ■ ■ ■ 22 Close the Revit Structure Help window. it will be easier to work in Revit Structure and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. find a keyword on the Index tab. the main symbol and the elevation directional arrows. Toolbar: From the Toolbar. You can use this tri-pane. You can access Help in the following ways: ■ Dialogs: Dialog include Help buttons. search for all instances of a word or phrase on the Search tab. and then click on a specific menu command or command button for Help. HTML help window to search for information and quickly display it to read or print. Windows: From any window. and the topic specific to the dialog opens. regarding selected components within a view. Click the Help button. After you are familiar with these tasks. If there is no Help button displayed. it highlights and the status bar displays the component name. When you place the cursor over a component. you learn to perform some of the common Revit Structure tasks that are included in the tutorials. TIP You can control the level of tooltip assistance from the Settings ➤ Options menu. 19 Place the cursor over the elevation symbol at the bottom of the drawing area. and notice that the preselected component switches to the main elevation symbol. The elevation symbol consists of two parts. There are several tools that help you find information.

2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. In the tutorials. The 3D isometric view displays: 4 Click View menu ➤ Zoom to display the zoom menu.rvt. 3 In the Project Browser. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. the view zooms out from the structural model. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. In the following steps. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire structure or plan view in the view. click 3DViews ➤ 3D. In the drawing area. click Training Files. For example. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands. 5 Click Zoom Out (2x). Performing Common Tasks in Revit Structure | 15 . and open Common\c_STR_Project_Phasing. The zoom menu lists the zoom options and their shortcut keys.Use zoom commands to adjust the view There are several ways to access zoom options. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the structural model in the window.

8 Click in the drawing area. click the drop-down menu next to the Zoom command to display the zoom options. use a zoom menu command or the toolbar option to zoom out. The view of the structural model is sized to fit the available window.6 On the View toolbar. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. When you release the mouse button. 9 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. the view zooms in on the selected area. 7 Click Zoom To Fit. NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the Zoom In Region command. If you do not have a wheel mouse. Revit Structure uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. 10 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. 16 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts . Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. To modify or add snap increments. NOTE As you zoom in and out. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire structure again. this is referred to as a crossing selection. click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. and type the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region.

16 To exit the wheel. click The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. . 12 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Structure | 17 . press ESC. 15 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. and click the SteeringWheels tab. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. 18 On the Undo menu. As you move the mouse. and click Help. and then using the Zoom tool again. on the View toolbar. moving the wheel to the desired location. To define settings for SteeringWheels. The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands.11 To display SteeringWheels. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). All changes you make to a project are tracked. For more information about SteeringWheels. Move. Undo commands 17 On the Standard toolbar. In this example. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. click Settings menu ➤ Options. click the pull-down menu on the Full Navigation wheel. select the second item in the list. 13 Click and hold the mouse button. you decide that you prefer the table in its original position. 14 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out.

on the Standard toolbar. 22 Close the file without saving your changes. click Lines. Notice that the Lines command is still active and you could continue to draw lines. NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. The table and plant are returned to their original locations. click the Undo command.Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. End a command 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 20 Click in the drawing area to start the line. On the Design Bar. 21 To end the command. use one of the following methods: ■ ■ ■ Choose another command. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. such as the Lines command. click Modify. Press ESC twice. and click again to end it. Some commands. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. 18 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts . or press CTRL+Z.

you create a 5-story steel structure. You will also learn some of the practices that can help you efficiently design and develop a structural project. Structural Modelling In this lesson. you copy the elements to multiple levels on the model. and a concrete slab to the model. beams. you will have a basic understanding of both the Revit Structure design and documentation tools. Each tutorial demonstrates tools that you can use to complete tasks that are common to an overall workflow. beam systems.Express Workshops 2 The Express Workshop tutorials focus on specific areas of Revit Structure 2009 functionality. 19 . Finally. columns. Creating a New Project In this first exercise. highlighting powerful features that are integral to the most common structural workflows. you will create and name a new steel project. You then add structural walls. You start by linking a 2-dimensional architectural file into Revit Structure and using the drawing as a background template for grid and column locations. using the modelling tools provided in Revit Structure. When you finish these tutorials.

20 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . select Structural Analysis-Default . open the Imperial Templates folder. click the Level 2 reference line. 3 Create additional levels as follows: ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.rvt.1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. and press ENTER. and save the new project as i_RST_EW_Modelling.rte. 7 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt. and double-click North. click Level. Adding New Levels on page 20. click OK. This is the project training file that is used for all remaining exercises in this tutorial. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. i_RST_EW_Modelling. and click Open. click (Pick Lines). Add levels 1 In the Project Browser. 2 In the New Project dialog. you create additional levels for your structure. 2 Click the value (10' 0") for the Level 2 elevation. 3 In the Choose Template dialog. 6 Navigate to a folder of your preference. On the Options Bar. ■ ■ In the drawing area. Save the new project 5 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and for Offset. enter 12' 0". when a dashed line displays. expand Elevations (Building Elevations). 4 In the New Project dialog. click Browse. Adding New Levels In this exercise. enter 12' 0". click to create Level 3.

Importing/Linking a DWG File In this exercise. each with the offset value set to 12' 0". 7 Proceed to the next exercise. and Level 5). 6 Click File menu ➤ Save.4 Repeat the previous step to create 2 new levels (Level 4. Importing/Linking a DWG File | 21 . Importing/Linking a DWG File on page 21. 5 Press ESC. you import and link a 2-dimensional (2D) architectural drawing (DWG format) to use as a background for creating your structure.

Import/Link an architectural file 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. Notice that Level 2 is bold. click Training Files.Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. Reposition elevation symbols 4 On the View toolbar. Click Open. 2 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. ■ ■ ■ ■ You can ignore the Revit Warning. and click in the drawing area to display the architectural file. select Black and White. This is the active view that displays in the drawing area. 3 In the Import/Link dialog. For Colors. select Auto . click symbol as shown. i_RST_EW_Modelling. and draw a zoom box around the West elevation 22 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . and select Imperial\i_RST_EW_Arch_floor_plan. For Positioning.dwg. (Zoom In). select Views (all) ➤ Structural Plans ➤ Level 2. do the following: ■ In the left pane of the Import/Link dialog.Center to Center. Select Current view only.

. click Query. and click to place the symbol. select a single column. Hide elements in the imported drawing 7 On the View toolbar. and in the Import Instance Query dialog. 6 Use the same method to relocate the remaining elevation symbols. and draw a zoom box around the upper-left corner of the 8 Select the imported drawing.5 Click the elevation symbol. Importing/Linking a DWG File | 23 . and on the Options Bar. 9 In the drawing area. click drawing. click Hide in View. drag it beyond the dimensions.

Place horizontal grids 1 Enter ZF (Zoom to Fit). Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. Notice that the grid line is highlighted. 3 On the Options Bar. click . 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Grid. Adding Column Grids on page 24. 24 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . you use the imported drawing as a background for creating both vertical and horizontal grids. (Undo). Notice that it is labeled 2. and a value of 1 appears within the grid bubble. click 11 Click File menu ➤ Save. i_RST_EW_Modelling. 12 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt. Adding Column Grids In this exercise. 10 On the Toolbar.Notice that all columns disappear. 4 Select the first horizontal grid line. 5 Select the next horizontal grid line above grid line 1.

10 On the Options Bar. 11 Select the first vertical grid line. the bubble might display at the opposite end of the grid. labels display in numerical sequence. 12 Click the value within the grid bubble. As you select subsequent grid lines. Adding Column Grids | 25 . and a value of 7 appears within the grid bubble. click . Click the check box near the bubble (as shown) to turn the bubble display on or off. NOTE When you select a grid line.6 Select the remaining horizontal grid lines using the zoom controls as needed. click Modify. click Grid. enter A. The last horizontal grid line is labeled 6. 9 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Notice that the grid line is highlighted. Place vertical grids 8 Enter ZF. and press ENTER. 7 On the Design Bar. Make sure that all the grid bubbles are displayed on the right side of the drawing.

17 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. The halftone of the imported drawing is used as a background for placing additional structural elements. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Click the Imported Categories tab. 26 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . select i_EW_RST_Arch_floor_plan.dwg file. Change drawing visibility 16 Enter ZF. Click Apply. 19 Enter ZF. 15 On the Design Bar. Notice that the sequencing has changed from numeric to alphabetical. Under Halftone. and then OK. 14 Select the remaining vertical grid lines.13 Select the next grid line to the right of grid A. click Modify. The last grid line is labeled G. 18 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog.

this view is referred to as the plan view.rvt. i_RST_EW_Modelling. For the remainder of this tutorial. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. Setup views 1 In the Project Browser.20 Click File menu ➤ Save. Adding Structural Walls | 27 . 21 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding Structural Walls In this exercise. Adding Structural Walls on page 27. you add structural walls around the elevator shafts located in the center of the structure. select Views (all) ➤ Structural Plans ➤ Level 2.

28 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . Place structural walls around the top elevator shaft 5 Click inside the plan view. 11 Click the north exterior face of the elevator shaft to place the second structural wall. and draw a zoom box around the elevator shafts located in he 7 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. The plan view and the 3D view are now displayed in separate windows in the drawing area. 3 Click Window menu ➤ Tile.8" Masonry. and for Loc Line. For the remainder of this tutorial. 4 Close any additional windows that may have been opened accidentally. select Basic Wall : Generic . and enter ZF. click (3D). click the sketch line that represents the exterior face of the top elevator shaft. 8 In the Type Selector. select Finish Face: Exterior. this view is referred to as the 3D view. and place the first structural wall as shown. 10 Using the drawing as a guide. click Structural Wall. 9 On the Options Bar.2 On the View toolbar. 6 On the View toolbar. click . . click center of the drawing.

12 Using the same method. View the structural walls in 3D 14 Click inside the 3D view and enter ZF. and click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading w/Edges. place the remaining structural walls around the top elevator shaft. click Detail Level ➤ Fine. 15 On the View Control Bar. click Modify. Adding Structural Walls | 29 . 13 On the Design Bar.

18 Draw a selection box around all 3 elevator shafts. Mirror the west elevator shafts 17 Click inside the plan view.Complete the elevator shafts on the west side of the structure 16 Using the same method and wall type used to place the first elevator shaft walls. place structural walls for the middle and bottom elevator shafts on the west side of the structure. and using the architectural drawing as a guide. 30 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops .

click 20 Click grid D.19 On the Toolbar. (Mirror). The elevator shafts from the west side of the structure are now mirrored on the east side. Adding Structural Walls | 31 .

Adding Structural Columns In this exercise. These columns extend from Level 1 to Level 2. 23 Proceed to the next exercise. 32 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . 22 Click File menu ➤ Save. Notice the completed elevator shafts are displayed in the 3D view.21 On the Design Bar. you add columns at specific grid intersections. click Modify. Adding Structural Columns on page 32.

click Structural Column. 5 Click grid location A6 to place the first column. Press the SPACEBAR to rotate the column so that it is perpendicular with grid line 6 as shown. 4 In the Type Selector. 2 On the View toolbar. i_RST_EW_Modelling. select W-Wide Flange-Column : W14X43. B5 Adding Structural Columns | 33 . click structure. . Place columns at specific grid intersections 1 Click inside the plan view. place a column at the following grid locations: ■ ■ B6 A5. and draw a zoom box around the upper-left corner of the 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.rvt. 6 Using the same method.Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise.

10 In the Type Selector. 9 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 34 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . click (Grid Intersection). 12 Draw a selection box around the entire view to select all grid lines. click Finish. 13 On the Toolbar. Columns are placed at each grid intersection. and enter ZF. 14 Click inside the 3D view. Place remaining columns using the grid intersection tool 8 Click inside the plan view. and enter ZF. 11 On the Options Bar. select W-Wide Flange-Column : W14X43. click Modify. click Structural Column.7 On the Design Bar.

16 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt. select W-Wide Flange : W12X26. 2 On the View toolbar. and draw a zoom box around the upper-left corner of the 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Adding Structural Beams | 35 . Adding Structural Beams on page 35. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. click Chain. click Beam. Adding Structural Beams In this exercise. 4 In the Type Selector.15 Click File menu ➤ Save. you add structural beams to level 2 to form the steel framework of the structure. click structure. . 5 On the Options Bar. i_RST_EW_Modelling. You also set the offset value of the steel beams to allow for the concrete slab that will be added in a later exercise. Add beams using the chain tool 1 Click inside the plan view.

Create sloped beams 9 Select the beam between grid locations A6 and B6. place additional beams in the upper-left bay of the structure. and then click to enter the beam startpoint. The triangle indicates the midpoint of the column. and A6. click the midpoints of the columns at grid locations B5. enter 5' 0". A5. and select the beam between A6 and A5. press CTRL. 36 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . 7 Click the midpoint of the column at grid location B6 to specify the beam endpoint. and press ENTER. 8 Using the same method.6 Move the cursor over the column at grid location A6 until a triangle is displayed. that is. 10 Click the column at grid location A6.

and enter ZF. Adding Structural Beams | 37 . This project does not require sloped beams. Add remaining beams using the grid intersection tool 12 Click inside the plan view. select W-Wide Flange : W12X26. 15 On the Options Bar. 14 In the Type Selector. click . 16 Draw a selection box around the entire view to select all grid lines.Notice the 3D view displays the sloped beams based on the new offset height. 13 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Beam. 11 On the Toolbar. click . NOTE The method used to create sloped beams is shown for demonstration purposes only.

and enter ZF. click through A5. 20 Click inside the plan view. 19 On the Design Bar. and draw a zoom box around the beams at grid locations A2 22 Select each beam. 21 On the View toolbar. 38 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . Delete beams outside the drawing floor extents Six beams that were placed at grid locations outside of the floor extents of the architectural drawing need to be deleted. and press DELETE. Notice the beams are deleted in the 3D view. click Finish. 18 Click inside the 3D view.17 On the Options Bar. Beams are placed within the grid. . click Modify.

delete the beams on grid locations G2 through G5. between grid lines G2 and G5. click Beam. Add new beams within the drawing floor extents The new beams are placed within the floor extents of the architectural drawing. Adding Structural Beams | 39 . 29 Click the beam on grid line 3 to establish the beam endpoint. 25 On the View toolbar.23 Using the same method. 28 Using the architectural drawing as a guide. click the intersection of the beam on grid line 2 and the centerline of the wall to establish the beam startpoint. 27 In the Type Selector. 26 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and draw a zoom box around the southeast side of the structure. select W-Wide Flange : W12X26. 24 Click inside the plan view. click .

30 Using the same method. 40 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . place 2 additional beams between grid lines 3 and 5.

click . Delete beams inside the northeast and southwest stair shafts 33 Click inside the plan view. 32 Select grid line A for the center of the mirror reflection. 35 Select the beam between grid lines G5 and G6. click . and press DELETE. 34 On the View toolbar. Notice the new beams are displayed in the 3D view. and draw a zoom box around the northeast stair shaft. and on the Toolbar.31 Select the 3 new beams. Adding Structural Beams | 41 .

36 On the View toolbar. 38 Click inside the 3D view. and draw a zoom box around the southwest stair shaft. 42 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . click . 37 Select the beam between grid lines A1 and A2. and enter ZF. and press DELETE.

40 On the View toolbar. click center of the structure. select W-Wide Flange : W12X26. This is the startpoint for the first beam. This is the endpoint for the first beam. click Beam.Add 3 beams above the elevator shaft walls These beams will support a beam system that is added in the next exercise. 44 Click the existing beam on grid line 3. 42 In the Type Selector. 39 Click inside the plan view. Use the architectural drawing to locate the outline of the elevator shaft wall. 43 Click the existing beam on grid line 2. Adding Structural Beams | 43 . and draw a zoom box around the elevator shafts located in the 41 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. .

click . click Modify. Use the architectural drawing to locate the outline of the outside wall of the elevator shaft. 48 Click the beam on grid line D .45 Click the existing beam on grid line 4. 46 On the Design Bar. and on the Toolbar. Mirror the elevator shaft beams 49 Select the 3 new beams. 47 Click the second beam to establish the startpoint for the third beam. This is the endpoint for the second beam. This is the endpoint for the third beam. 44 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops .

Notice the new beams are displayed in the 3D view. Set the beam offset value The offset value for all beams is lowered to accommodate the slab that will be added in a future exercise.50 Select grid line D for the center of the mirror reflection. 52 Draw a selection box around the entire model. 51 Click inside the 3D view. Adding Structural Beams | 45 .

Only the structural framing elements (girders and joists) are highlighted.53 On the Options Bar. click ■ ■ ■ . 46 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . 56 In the Element Properties dialog. enter -0' 5". do the following: For z-Direction Justification. and then click OK. select Other. under Constraints. click ■ ■ ■ ■ (Filter Selection). Under Category. select Structural Framing (Girder). Notice the beams have been lowered in the 3D view. do the following: Click Check None. Under Category. 54 In the Filter dialog. Click OK. For z-Direction Offset Value. select Structural Framing (Joist). Click Apply. 55 On the Options Bar.

you add multiple structural beam systems to the steel frame on Level 2. select W-Wide Flange : W12X26. .rvt. select Maximum Spacing. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 5 On the View toolbar. select 3D. Automatically create multiple beam systems 1 Click inside the plan view. Click OK. i_RST_EW_Modelling. For Maximum Spacing. 3 On the Options Bar. Adding Structural Beam Systems | 47 . for Layout Rule. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. click Beam System. 58 Proceed to the next exercise. and enter ZF. click of the structure. Adding Structural Beam Systems In this exercise. 4 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. Adding Structural Beam Systems on page 47. click ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . enter 9' 0". For Beam Type. and draw a zoom box around the bays on the northeast side 6 Select the beam between grid locations A5 and A6 to set the beam system direction.57 Click File menu ➤ Save. Under Pattern.

do not place a beam system in the bays for the stairs in the northwest and southeast corners of the structure. 10 Click inside the 3D view. 9 On the Design Bar. 8 Using the same settings and method. 48 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . Also. 7 Click to place the beam system. place a beam system in the remaining bays of the structure.The beam system location displays with a blue dashed line. click Modify. and enter ZF. Notice the beam system displays in the 3D view. NOTE Some beam systems might include 2 beams based on the size of the bay.

Trace the architectural drawing floor plan 1 Click inside the plan view. and use the mirror tool to complete the sketch. 12 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt. i_RST_EW_Modelling. click Lines. you sketch a concrete slab on Level 2 by tracing the outside edge of the architectural drawing. You are now in sketch mode. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. click Slab.11 Click File menu ➤ Save. Adding a Structural Slab on page 49. Adding a Structural Slab | 49 . 3 On the Design Bar. You create the sketch lines for the left side of the slab. and enter ZF. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Adding a Structural Slab In this exercise.

When sketching the slab. and draw a zoom box around the northwest corner of the 5 Click the edge of the floor outline to start the slab sketch. 8 Continue sketching the slab until you reach grid line D. and make sure there are no duplicate sketch lines. 50 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . click structure. If necessary. . use (Trim/Extend) on the Options Bar. and DELETE to remove unwanted lines and to clean up line intersections. 7 Continue sketching lines along the drawing perimeter using the exterior-most model lines of the imported drawing. zoom in and out as needed.4 On the View toolbar. 6 Place the first sketch line along the exterior edge of the architectural drawing.

11 On the Toolbar. Adding a Structural Slab | 51 . 12 Select grid line D for the center of the mirror reflection.Use the mirror tool to copy the slab sketch 9 Enter ZF. click . 10 Draw a selection box around the left half of the view to select all sketch lines.

click line D.13 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 14 Enter ZF. 52 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . click Lines. 16 On the Design Bar. Complete the slab sketch 15 On the View toolbar. . and draw a zoom box around the top of the slab sketch at grid 17 Draw a single line to join the 2 halves of the slab sketch.

18 On the View toolbar. 19 On the Design Bar. click grid line D. . 23 On the Design Bar. 21 Enter ZF. click Lines. click Lines. . 22 On the View toolbar. and draw a zoom box around the bottom of the slab sketch at 20 Draw a single line to join the 2 halves of the slab sketch. click structure. and draw a zoom box around the southeast corner of the Adding a Structural Slab | 53 . 24 Modify the slab sketch until it appears as shown.

click Modify.25 On the Design Bar. click structure. click Finish Sketch. 31 On the Design Bar. 54 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . 26 Enter ZF. 29 Modify the slab sketch until it appears as shown. 28 On the Design Bar. click Lines. 27 On the View toolbar. . and draw a zoom box around the northeast corner of the 30 Enter ZF.

Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. Copying Elements to Multiple Levels In this exercise. beams. 32 Click File menu ➤ Save. beam systems. i_RST_EW_Modelling.In the Revit dialog. click No when asked if you would like walls that go up to this floor level to attach to its bottom. Copying Elements to Multiple Levels on page 55.rvt. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. you copy columns. and the slab from Level 2 to the remaining levels of the structure. Copying Elements to Multiple Levels | 55 . Notice the completed slab is displayed in the 3D view.

Notice the elevator shaft walls are displayed in the 3D view. click ■ ■ 6 In the Element Properties dialog. Click Apply. and enter ZF. 5 On the Options Bar. Click OK. do the following: For Top Constraint. select Walls. 3 On the Options Bar. select Up to level: Level 5. .Extend the elevator shaft walls up to Level 5 1 Click inside the plan view. 4 In the Filter dialog. and then click OK. Under Category. do the following: Click Check None. click ■ ■ ■ (Filter Selection). under Constraints. 56 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . 2 Draw a selection box around the entire view.

Under Category. do the following: Click Check None. For Top Offset. Notice the columns are extended to Level 5 in the 3D view. select Level 5. click ■ ■ ■ . under Constraints. and draw a selection box around the entire view. Notice the columns are extended to Level 3 in the 3D view. enter 4' 0". click ■ ■ ■ 11 In the Element Properties dialog. 14 In the Select Levels dialog. do the following: For Top Level. . Click Apply. Copy columns up to Level 5 12 With the columns still selected. click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. select Level 3.Extend columns up to Level 3 7 Click inside the plan view. 8 On the Options Bar. Copying Elements to Multiple Levels | 57 . 10 On the Options Bar. and then click OK. 9 In the Filter dialog. 13 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. select Structural Columns. Click OK. and then click OK.

and then click OK. Click OK. 24 Enter ZF 58 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . click Modify. do the following: Click Check None. on the Options Bar. click ■ ■ . enter 4' 0". select Floors. Structural Framing (Girder). enter 0' 0'.Change the top and bottom offset values 15 With the columns still selected. 19 On the Options Bar. select Level 3 and Level 5. For Top Offset. 23 In the Select Levels dialog. 17 On the Design Bar. do the following: For Base Offset. while pressing CTRL. click ■ ■ ■ . and draw a selection box around the entire structure. and Structural Framing (Joist). Copy remaining structural elements up to Level 5 18 Click inside the 3D view. Click Apply. 22 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. Under Category. under Constraints. Structural Beam Systems. 20 In the Filter dialog. and then click OK. ■ 21 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 16 In the Element Properties dialog.

2 Enter ZF. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. i_RST_EW_Modelling. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save.25 On the Design Bar. Adding Foundations In this exercise. click Modify. Place isolated foundations under each column 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1. under Structural Plans. and then you add a slab foundation under the elevator shafts.rvt. Adding Foundations | 59 . Adding Foundations on page 59. you add an isolated foundation under each structural column. 27 Proceed to the next exercise.

click Finish. click Foundation ➤ Isolated. Delete 2 footings near the elevator shaft 9 On the View toolbar. 60 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops .3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. All the structural columns are highlighted. The structural columns are now supported by isolated foundations. 5 On the Options Bar. select Footing-Rectangular : 72" x 48" x 18". 6 Draw a selection box around the entire structure. 4 In the Type Selector. 8 On the Design Bar. and draw a zoom box around the elevator shafts. click Modify. Notice the footings located between the elevator shaft walls. 7 On the Toolbar. click . click (Structural Column).

click (Rectangle). click Foundation ➤ Slab. 16 Click above the upper-left corner of the elevator shaft walls and sketch the slab so it surrounds the walls and columns as shown. Adding Foundations | 61 . 15 On the Options Bar. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. and press DELETE. (3D). click Finish Sketch. for Type. click Lines. 14 On the Design Bar. select 12" Foundation Slab. 12 On the Design Bar.10 Select both footings. Place a slab foundation under the elevator shafts 11 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 17 On the Design Bar. click 19 Enter ZF. You are now in sketch mode. The foundation is now displayed in 3-dimensions. 18 On the View toolbar. click Floor Properties. and click OK.

Next. Structural Detailing In this lesson. 62 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . you create and annotate model-based details in a section view. You then import detail views from a Revit detail library project and place them in a new sheet.20 Click File menu ➤ Save. You have completed the Structural Modelling Express Workshop tutorial. you place it in an existing project sheet. you learn to import and modify an AutoCAD DWG file. You begin by importing an AutoCAD drawing as a reference section. and modify its line properties. Finally. incorporating its line styles within the Revit Structure workflow. 21 Proceed to the next lesson. Structural Detailing on page 62.

but do not open it. You begin by setting Revit Structure to associate line weights to the DWG/DXF color numbers of the imported AutoCAD file. and select \Imperial\ i_RST_EW_Free_Standing_Wall_Section. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Name the view Typical Wall Section. Select a scale of 1/4”= 1'-0". 7 In the left pane of the Import/Link CAD Formats dialog. 3 Save the Import Line Weight file as line. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. do the following: ■ Select the Link option.rvt. ■ Click Save As. do the following: ■ ■ Specify the DWG/DXF Color Number 4 to a line weight of 5. Import the DWG file 6 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats.txt in the Data folder of the Revit Structure installation directory. Create a new drafting view 4 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. click Training Files.dwg.Importing/Linking a DWG File In this exercise. 8 In the Import/Link CAD Formats dialog. 2 In the Import Line Weights dialog. and open \Imperial\i_RST_EW_Working_with_AutoCAD. click Training Files. Importing/Linking a DWG File | 63 . Click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Specify the DWG/DXF Color Number 7 to a line weight of 9. you import and link a 2-dimensional (2D) architectural AutoCAD drawing (DWG format) to use as a detail reference in a sheet. 5 In the New Drafting View dialog. Map line weights to DWG/DXF color numbers 1 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Setting ➤ Import Line Weights DWG/DXF.

9 Enter ZF (Zoom to fit). select Black and White. ■ Click Open. Using a Detail Drawing as a Section View on page 65. For Positioning. select Auto . 12 Proceed to the next exercise. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 11 Navigate to a folder of your preference. This is the project training file that is used for all remaining exercises in this tutorial. and save the new project as i_RST_EW_Detailing. 64 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops .■ ■ For Colors. Notice the imported detail is linked into the Typical Wall Section drafting view with the mapped line weights.rvt.Center to Center.

rvt. i_RST_EW_Detailing. From the adjacent drop-down list of views. select Views (all) ➤ Structural Plans ➤ Level 1. select Drafting View: Typical Wall Selection. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. click Section. Using a Detail Drawing as a Section View | 65 . 4 On the Options Bar.Using a Detail Drawing as a Section View In this exercise. click . Create the section reference 1 In the Project Browser. Select the Reference other view option. 2 On the View toolbar. Notice that Level 1 is bold. select 1/4" = 1'-0". 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For Scale. you create a section that references an existing detail view. This is the active view that displays in the drawing area. and draw a zoom box around grid locations A2 and A3.

5 Click outside the wall between grid lines 2 and 3.rvt. i_RST_EW_Detailing. and click inside the north wall to place the section. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. expand select Sheets (all). move the cursor down. 2 In the Project Browser. Placing a Detail in a Sheet on page 66. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. Placing a Detail in a Sheet In this exercise. 3 Enter WT (Tile Windows). 7 Proceed to the next exercise.Unnamed. you place the imported detail view on an existing sheet. Add the detail view to a sheet 1 Close all views except for Level 1. and double-click S. 66 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops .1.

Sheet S-1 . 6 Release the mouse button. . and draw a zoom box around the empty space to the right of 5 In the Project Browser.Unnamed and the Level 1 structural plan views are now aligned horizontally in the drawing area. and drag Typical Wall Section onto the sheet view. click Level 1 on the sheet. expand Views (all) ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). Placing a Detail in a Sheet | 67 . 4 On the View toolbar.

7 Move the cursor to align the detail outline in the empty space of the sheet. 68 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . 8 Click to place the detail.Notice the detail drawing outline.

and draw a zoom box around the title block in the lower-right 10 Double-click the sheet number. notice the section callout has updated according to the detail and the sheet number. .0. Change the sheet number in the title block 9 On the View toolbar. change it to S-1.In the structural plan view of Level 1. click corner of the sheet. and click ENTER. Placing a Detail in a Sheet | 69 .

11 Click File menu ➤ Save. 70 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . 12 Proceed to the next exercise. notice the section callout has updated according to the new sheet number. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. Adjusting Line Weights of Imported Details on page 70.rvt.In the structural plan view of Level 1. Adjusting Line Weights of Imported Details In this exercise. i_RST_EW_Detailing. you change the line properties of the imported AutoCAD drawing to display differently in Revit Structure.

expand Views (all) ➤ Drafting Views (Detail).Determine the drawing layer of the line 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click Typical Wall Section. 3 On the Options Bar. 2 Click on the detail drawing. click . 4 Click one of the lines representing the exterior surface of the wall cross-section. Adjusting Line Weights of Imported Details | 71 .

9 Click the CONT5 row. 6 Click OK.5 In the Import Instance Query dialog. for Weight. 10 Click the Override button in the Lines column of the CONT5 row. 13 Click Apply. 14 Click OK. 11 In the Line Graphics dialog. select 4. 8 Click the Imported Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. Change the weight of the line 7 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 72 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . notice the Layer value CONT5. 12 Click OK.

Creating a New Details Sheet from a Detail Library In this exercise.TYPICAL CONCRETE WALL CONTROL JOINT DETAIL ■ ■ ■ ■ Click OK. do the following: ■ ■ For Views. Creating a New Details Sheet from a Detail Library | 73 . Select the following views to insert: ■ ■ ■ Drafting View 001 . Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. 2 In the left pane of the Import/Link CAD Formats dialog. Import detail views from a Revit Structure detail library 1 Click File menu ➤ Insert from File ➤ Views. Creating a New Details Sheet from a Detail Library on page 73.TYPICAL CONCRETE FOOTING WITHOUT PIER OR PILASTER DETAIL Drafting View 007 .rvt. select Show all views and sheets. and select \Imperial\ i_RST_EW_Typ_slab_detail_library. click Training Files.rvt. 15 Click File menu ➤ Save.TYPICAL ELEVATION OF STEPPED WALL FOOTINGS AT UTILITY OPENING DETAIL Drafting View 004 .TYPICAL ELEVATION OF STEPPED WALL FOOTING DETAIL Drafting View 002 . i_RST_EW_Detailing.Notice that all lines associated with the CONT5 layer are now set to a line weight of 4.TYPICAL PLAN OF HORIZONTAL REINFORCING OF CONCRETE WALLS DETAIL Drafting View 009 . 3 In the Insert Views dialog. you import multiple detail views and place them on a new project sheet.TYPICAL SLOPE BETWEEN FOOTING DETAIL Drafting View 003 . 16 Proceed to the next exercise.

Add the detail views to a sheet 8 In the Project Browser. Notice the imported details are listed In the Project Browser under Views (All) ➤ Drafting Views (Detail) Create a new sheet 5 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet.4 In the Duplicate Types dialog. 7 Click OK. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal : E1 30x42 Horizontal. and drag 001 . 11 Click to place the detail. 6 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. 9 Release the mouse button. 12 Use the same method to place the remaining views that were imported earlier in this exercise. click OK. expand Views (all) ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). 10 Move the cursor to position the detail outline on the sheet. 74 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops .TYPICAL ELEVATION OF STEPPED WALL FOOTING DETAIL onto the sheet view.

S. and close all other views. click . you create a section view and crop it so that it can be displayed side by side with a related structural plan. 2 On the View toolbar. i_RST_EW_Detailing. double-click Level 3 . Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise.T.O. 14 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt. and draw a zoom box around grid locations C1 and D1. Prepare a section view 1 In the Project Browser. Preparing Views for Detailing in a Section on page 75. Preparing Views for Detailing in a Section | 75 . Preparing Views for Detailing in a Section In this exercise.13 Click File menu ➤ Save.. expand Views (all) ➤ Structural Plans.

3 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Section. 4 On the Options Bar, for Scale, select 3/4" = 1'-0". 5 Click outside the wall, halfway between grid lines C and D, move the cursor to the right, and click inside the west wall to place the section.

6 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all) ➤ Sections (Building Section), and double-click Section 1.

76 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops

7 In the section view:

Locate the double-arrow control at the top of the crop area, and drag it down to just above the Level 3 - T.O.S. elevation line.

Preparing Views for Detailing in a Section | 77

Click and drag the double-arrow control handle at the bottom of the crop area to just below the Level 3 - T.O.S. elevation line.

Click the double-arrow control handle to the left of the crop area, and drag it to the right to reduce white space.

78 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops

8 On the View Control Bar:
■ ■

Click Click

(Hide Crop Region). (Detail Level: Fine).

9 On the View toolbar, click wall.

, and draw a zoom box around the beam connection, slab, and

10 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all) ➤ Structural Plans, double-click Level 3 - T.O.S., and close all other views. 11 Enter WT. Level 3 - T.O.S. and Section 1 are now aligned horizontally in the drawing area. 12 Click File menu ➤ Save. 13 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding a Cantilever to a Slab on page 79.

Adding a Cantilever to a Slab
In this exercise, you add a cantilever to the existing slab using section and plan views. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise, i_RST_EW_Detailing.rvt. Select a slab and enter sketch mode 1 In the section view to the right, select the slab.

Adding a Cantilever to a Slab | 79

Notice the slab is highlighted in the plan view to the left.

2 On the Options Bar, click 4 Click Open View.

.

3 In the Go to View dialog, select Structural Plan: Level 3 - T.O.S. Notice the plan view has entered sketch mode. Add the cantilever 5 In the plan view, while pressing CTRL, select the vertical and arc segments of the slab.

80 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops

6 On the Option Bar, for Cantilevers : Concrete, enter -9", for Steel, enter -2". 7 Press ENTER to apply the setting. 8 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

Notice that the cantilever now extends from the slab. 9 Click File menu ➤ Save. 10 Proceed to the next exercise, Coping Beam Connections on page 82.

Adding a Cantilever to a Slab | 81

Coping Beam Connections
In this exercise, you will cope a beam where it joins a perpendicular beam. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise, i_RST_EW_Detailing.rvt. Extend the beam flush to the connection 1 In the section view, select the beam as shown.

2 Unpin the selected beam by clicking on the pin.

3 Drag the control at the left of the selected beam to the left so the end of the beam is flush to the center of the perpendicular beam, as shown.

82 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops

4 On the Toolbar, click

(Coping).

5 Select the newly extended beam, as shown.

6 Select the perpendicular beam, as shown.

Coping Beam Connections | 83

Notice the beam is coped to the shape of the beam it joins.

7 Click File menu ➤ Save. 8 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding Detail Components on page 84.

Adding Detail Components
In this exercise, you will add a shear connector, a structural angle, an expansion bolt, and an L-angle welded connection to the section view. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise, i_RST_EW_Detailing.rvt.

84 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops

Add a shear connector 1 Close the Level 2 plan view, and maximize the Section 1 view. 2 On the View toolbar, click and slab. , and draw a zoom box around the top of the beam connection

3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Detail Component. 4 In the Type Selector, select Shear Connectors-Side : 3/4”. 5 Move the cursor to the top center of the beam as shown.

6 Click to place the shear connector.

Adding Detail Components | 85

Add a structural angle 7 In the Type Selector, select AISC Angle Shapes-Section : L8x6x7/16. 8 Move the cursor to the empty space below and to the right of the beam as shown.

9 Press the SPACEBAR once to rotate the angle 90° counterclockwise. 10 Click to place the angle. 11 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Modify. 12 Select the angle.

86 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops

13 Click the vertical flip control.

Adding Detail Components | 87

14 On the Toolbar, click

(Align).

15 Click the bottom segment of the beam, as shown.

88 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops

16 Click the angle, and then click the lock for the alignment.

Adding Detail Components | 89

17 Click the interior segment of the exterior wall, as shown.

90 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops

18 Click the angle, and then click the lock for alignment.

Adding Detail Components | 91

select Expansion Bolts-Side : 3/4”. click Detail Component. 22 Press the SPACEBAR twice to rotate the bolt 180° counterclockwise. 92 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . 21 Move the cursor into the drawing area near the angle.Add an expansion bolt 19 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. as shown. 20 In the Type Selector. 23 Align the bolt halfway along the left side of the angle.

Adding Detail Components | 93 . click (Move).24 Click to place the bolt. 26 On the Toolbar. 27 Click the center of the interior segment of the bolt head. 25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. as shown.

28 Move the cursor to align with the outer segment of the angle. 94 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . as shown.

Adding Detail Components | 95 .29 Click to move the bolt flush with the angle.

Add an L-angle connection 30 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select L-Angle-Welded Connection-Elevation : L4x4x5/16. 96 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . 31 In the Type Selector. click Detail Component. 32 Move the cursor into the drawing area to the right of the beam connection.

35 Select the L-angle. and then click the lock for the alignment. . click Modify. 42 Click the left segment of the L-angle. 34 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. change the value for L to 10” 40 On the Toolbar. click (Align). 41 Click the right segment of the perpendicular beam.33 Click to place the L-angle. click 38 Click OK. 39 Click on the L-angle and drag it to the middle of the beam. Adding Detail Components | 97 . 36 On the Options Bar. as shown. as shown. 37 In the Element Properties dialog.

43 Click File menu ➤ Save 44 Proceed to the next exercise. 98 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . Adding Final Annotation and Detailing on page 98. Adding Final Annotation and Detailing In this final exercise. you will add break lines and annotation to the section view. Add break lines 1 Enter ZF.rvt. i_RST_EW_Detailing. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise.

select Break Line. The crop area for the section view will be adjusted later. as shown. 6 Move the cursor onto the exterior wall. to the right of the coping detail. as shown. 5 Click to place the break line. 4 Move the cursor onto the exterior wall above the slab. below the structural angle and expansion bolt. 9 Move the cursor onto the slab. click Detail Component 3 In the Type Selector. Notice the white space beneath the break line and the continuation of the wall beyond it.2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Adding Final Annotation and Detailing | 99 . 8 Click to place the break line. as shown. 7 Press the SPACEBAR twice to rotate the break line 180° counterclockwise.

11 Click to place the break line. 12 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.10 Press the SPACEBAR 3 times to rotate the break line 270° counterclockwise. click Modify. click ■ ■ (Show Crop Region). 13 On the View Control Bar. Drag the right double-arrow control to the left to obscure the slab and beam to the right of the break line. 14 Select the crop region and adjust it as follows: Drag the bottom double-arrow control upward to obscure the wall below the break line. 100 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops .

click ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ (Two Segments). and do the following: Click on the top segment of the slab. click Text. Move the cursor to the right. 17 On the Options Bar. click Add annotation (Hide Crop Region). away from the text box.15 On the View Control Bar. ■ Type STRUCTURAL SLAB (SEE PLAN). Click to finish the second leader segment. Click to finish the first leader segment. Move the cursor up and to the right. as shown. 18 Click in the drawing area. 16 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Adding Final Annotation and Detailing | 101 .

21 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 23 On the Options Bar. 102 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . click Modify. 20 Click on the bottom segment of the beam and do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Move the cursor down and to the right. Move the cursor to the right. 22 Click on the leader. click (Add Left Leader). as shown. Click to finish the first leader segment.19 Click the right drag handle and move it to the left to resize the text box. Click to finish the second leader segment. Type STL BEAM (SEE PLAN).

25 Drag the dot control at the right of the text box to the left to resize the box. as shown. Adding Final Annotation and Detailing | 103 .24 Drag the dot control of the new leader down so that it meets the bottom segment of the beam.

SECTIONS FOR REINF. Click to finish the second leader segment. EXPANSION ANCHORS. Move the cursor to the left. ANCHORED TO WALL USING 2-3/4” DIA.26 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Click to finish the first leader segment. and do the following: Click on the bottom segment of the structural angle. click ■ ■ ■ ■ (Right). INFO). click 32 On the Options Bar. Click to finish the leader segment. away from the text box.C. (One Segment). 104 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . Type L8X6X3/16 (LLH) x ‘1-0” LONG CLIPS 2 4’-0” O. 30 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Move the cursor down and to the right. and do the following: Click on the exterior segment of the wall. away from the text box. click Text. 27 On the Options Bar. as shown. 29 Drag the dot control at the right of the text box and move it to the left to resize the box. Type CMU WALL (SEE FOUND. click ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ (Two Segments). click Text. 33 Click in the drawing area. 31 On the Options Bar. Move the cursor to the right. 28 Click in the drawing area.

as shown.34 Drag the dot control at the left of the text box and move it to the right to resize the box. 35 Click File menu ➤ Save You have completed the Structural Detailing Express Workshop. Adding Final Annotation and Detailing | 105 .

106 .

Notice that the drawing area is black.rte. and open Imperial\i_Tutorial_Default. click the Graphics tab. and set it as your default template. 4 In the Options dialog. selection default options. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects. they are not saved to project or template files. journal cleanup options. 2 Click File menu ➤ Close to close all open projects. click OK. Modifying System Settings In this lesson. click Browse. 6 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit Structure project. you modify the settings that control your local Revit Structure working environment. you learn how to control the system settings within Revit Structure. Finally. notification preferences. Set graphics settings 1 Open Revit Structure. and click OK. In the first lesson. under Template file. 5 Under Colors. 9 In the New Project dialog. 3 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. you modify the system environment. In the second lesson. Modifying General System Options In this exercise. 8 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. and your username when using worksets. which is independent of the project settings. These settings control the graphics. 7 In the New Project dialog. select Invert background color. 107 . you create an office template. you modify project settings to control the appearance of the components and subcomponents within that project. you learn how to modify your Revit Structure 2009 working environment.Modifying Project and System Settings 3 In this tutorial. click Training Files.

the elements causing the error display using this color. For Tooltip Assistance. 20 On the Design Bar. When an error occurs. select One hour. select None. 12 Under Colors. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. 23 Click File menu ➤ Close. select yellow. and click OK. click Modify. specify the following options: ■ ■ ■ For Save Reminder interval. click the Graphics tab. This setting controls only the tooltips that display within the drawing area. and open Imperial\i_RST_Settings. 22 Place the cursor over any of the icons on the toolbars. 13 In the Color dialog. 18 Sketch a simple straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. 108 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . 21 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. 16 Click OK. Setting Options 25 Click File menu ➤ Open. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. click No.10 Click Settings menu ➤ Options.rvt. click the value for Selection Color. 19 On the Design Bar. For Save to Central Reminder Interval. and select the wall. Notice that the system settings apply to this project. 15 Under Notifications. click Modify. select One hour. click Training Files. click Structural Wall. 26 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 24 When prompted to save. 11 In the Options dialog. Notice that a tooltip is displayed even though you set Tooltip Assistance to None. Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. 14 Click the General tab. 17 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

Notice that there are industry-specific templates that you can set as your default template. 5 Under Default path for user files. select Red. and click Open. click the File Locations tab. 7 In the Options dialog. TIP To view a template. They are saved at the termination of each Revit Structure session.27 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. These settings control location of important Revit Structure files such as your default project template. Specifying File Locations In this exercise. Under Journal File Cleanup. ■ ■ 30 Click OK. and select Normal for Tooltip Assistance. 6 In the Browse for Folder dialog. 3 Under Default template file. Specifying File Locations on page 109. If prompted. clear Invert background color. you can start a new project with that template. Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. Notice that the drawing area background colors are no longer inverted and that tooltips display when you place the cursor over any building component. and the family template files. Specifying File Locations | 109 . the family libraries. 29 Click the General tab and make the following changes: ■ Under Notifications. Journal files are text documents that record each step during your Revit Structure sessions. select your preferred Save Reminder interval. click Browse. under Default path for family template files. enter the name you want to use during worksharing. Journal files are deleted automatically after their number exceeds the value you specify. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. 4 Click Cancel. select the folder to save your files to by default. Set file locations 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. Under Windows Username. click Browse. The path may vary depending on your operating system or where you installed Revit Structure. select values for When number of journals exceeds and Delete journals older than (days). 28 In the Options dialog. These files are used primarily in the software support process. as well as the material and rendering libraries. and click Browse to select a template. 2 In the Options dialog. you specify your default file locations. click Browse. 31 Click File menu ➤ Close. NOTE Revit Structure Journal files are normally found in C:\Program Files\Autodesk Revit Structure\Journals. click the Graphics tab and make the following changes: ■ ■ Under Graphics. do not save the changes. For Selection Color. Your login name displays by default. Journals can be run in order to detect a problem or recreate lost steps or files.

However. you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane. centralized. (Add Library Path) that displays 110 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog. structural firm where customized templates reside on a network drive.This path is set automatically during the installation process. 10 Under Libraries. Each library path points Revit Structure to a folder of families or training files. and you can create new libraries. 11 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. such as in a large. and change the name to My Library. In the following illustration. You can modify the existing library names and path. and notice the list of library names. click Place. click (Add Value). 8 Click Cancel. or loading a Revit Structure file. NOTE When you are opening. saving. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. 12 Click in the Library Path column for My Library. and click on the right-side of the field. there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path.

Specifying File Locations | 111 . 15 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list. Load. TIP The library icons display in the order that they are listed in the Options dialog. 21 Under Libraries. The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit Structure Open. 18 Click Cancel. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. you may want to set up an office library on a network path in order to increase productivity and maintain office standards. 16 Click File menu ➤ Open. and click OK. and select it as the library path. Notice that Revit Structure navigates directly to the library path. 20 Click the File Locations tab. select My Library. and click Open. templates. If you work in a large office. or families.13 Navigate to C:\My Documents or any other folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit Structure projects. 17 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Save. click the My Library icon. and Import dialogs. 19 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 14 Under Library Name. click My Library. 22 Click (Remove Value) to delete the library.

14 Click in the drawing area. 5 In the text editor. enter sheetmtl-Cu. 12 On the Standard toolbar. Click File menu ➤ Exit. click Edit. This resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. click OK. click the Spelling tab. 20 Under Settings. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit Structure. do not save the changes. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. 22 In the text editor. select Ignore words in UPPERCASE. click Text.23 Proceed to the next exercise. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. 19 In the Options dialog. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. 17 Click OK. click the Spelling tab. click Edit. 4 Under Personal dictionary. 18 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. 24 Click File menu ➤ Close. 11 In the Options dialog. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. click Restore Defaults. 112 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . click OK. to open a new Revit Structure project using the default 13 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. Notice that there is also a building industry dictionary. 23 In the Options dialog. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. click Edit. Specifying Spelling Options on page 112. 21 Under Personal dictionary. If prompted. Click File menu ➤ Save. 9 In the text editor. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Delete sheetmtl-CU. 2 In the Options dialog. click Modify. click template. 15 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Modify spelling settings 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. 3 Under Settings. scroll down the list of building industry terms. 16 Click Tools menu ➤ Spelling.

25 Proceed to the next exercise. 7 Under Object Snaps. click OK. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. under Template file. enter SM and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you perform an action. click OK. For example. click Structural Wall. 8 In the Snaps dialog. you modify snap settings. Modifying Snap Settings on page 113. You can turn snap settings on and off. 5 Click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. These are shortcut keys that you can use at any time when working on the design. In this exercise. 4 In the New Project dialog. As you zoom in and out within a view. you modify snap increments. work with snapping turned off. click Training Files.rte. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. 2 In the New Project dialog. Modify snap increments 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit Structure project. snapping reverts to the system default settings. 6 Under Dimension Snaps. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 4'. click Browse. 9 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. Revit Structure uses the largest increment that represents less than 2 mm in the drawing area.. and open Imperial\i_Tutorial_Default. and enter 1. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. Modifying Snap Settings | 113 . 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog.

zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 1'. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys such as ZO to zoom out. The listening dimension reacts to the movement of your cursor and to numerical keyboard entries. Use snapping shortcut keys 15 On the Design Bar. Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. 14 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall.10 Click in the center of the drawing area. 11 While sketching a generic straight wall. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. and click Wall. it refers specifically to the dimension that appears while you are in the act of sketching. If it does not. Sketch without snapping 12 While sketching the wall. and move the cursor to the right. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the context menu. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. click Modify. Do not set the wall end point. Notice that snapping is once again active. While sketching. TIP To zoom while in the act of sketching. 16 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. 114 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . 13 Click to set the wall endpoint. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. This is the increment that you added previously. and move the cursor to the right. If you do not have a wheel button. Notice that the dimension snaps at 4' increments. This kind of dimension is called a listening dimension. use the wheel button on your mouse. zoom out until it does so. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right.

and open Imperial\i_RST_Proj_Settings. you modify the way the Project Browser organizes the project. 21 Click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. You create and modify materials. and use it to complete the exercises. it will snap to the endpoints. Create a new material 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. 2 Scroll down. all materials that are part of that component family are also loaded into the project. Using these options. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. it defines the appearance of that component in shaded and rendered views. Well designed materials provide the foundation for photorealistic renderings. and object styles. This list includes all materials available for use on model components. If you move the cursor along the wall. and the wall edges. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. If you cannot complete the exercises in their entirety. Finally. you learn how to control the project environment by using the options available on the Settings menu. you modify the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. Modifying Project Settings In this lesson. 25 Proceed to the next lesson. annotations. 19 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. 20 Move the cursor downward. and do not save the file.Precast Concrete for Name. you create a new material and apply it to a model component. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. click Training Files. lines. In the left pane of the Open dialog. save the project file with a unique name. Creating and Applying Materials In this exercise. 24 Click File menu ➤ Close. When you apply a material to a component. the midpoint. 23 Click OK. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. 3 Click (Duplicate). 17 Enter SM. Modifying Project Settings | 115 . When a model component is loaded into a project. and delete the value 1". Modifying Project Settings on page 115. fill patterns.Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. and select Concrete .rvt. 18 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. The exercises in this lesson should be done sequentially using the same project file.. and specify the wall endpoint. 22 Under Dimension Snaps. Notice the materials listed on the left side of the dialog.

and click . and double-click T. 14 Click OK 3 times. 12 On the right side of the Material field. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. 17 In the Type Selector. 16 Press CTRL. Wall.O. 13 In the Materials dialog. This layer represents the exterior finish of the wall. 8 Click Duplicate. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. and click OK. click This is the material you created previously. The lower wall now uses the Concrete texture when you render it. Fnd. 15 Select the left foundation wall. enter Concrete . 116 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . and click OK.This creates a new material using the selected material settings as the starting point.Custom for the new wall name. and click OK. click Modify. Notice that the material settings have not changed from the material that you duplicated. click Edit. 4 In the Duplicate Material dialog. 6 Select the lower exterior wall. and select the remaining exterior walls. 10 In the Value field for Structure. select Basic Wall: Foundation-Custom.Precast. All of the exterior walls of this project are now changed to the new type. 9 Enter Foundation . . select Concrete-Precast for Name. In the steps that follow. click Edit/New. Apply the new material 5 In the Project Browser. You have created a new material that can be applied to any model component in this project. 18 On the Design Bar. you modify the material so that it displays correctly in a shaded or rendered view. It is currently assigned the material Concrete Cast-in-place concrete. 11 Click in the Material field for Layer 2.

When it is finished. Creating and Applying Materials | 117 . 20 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. click Rendering dialog. click . The rendering process begins. the material that you created is displayed.19 On the View Toolbar. NOTE If you want to see the material in greater detail. and select Rendering. This is because a surface pattern was not selected when the material was defined. zoom into the model. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns on page 118. you create a pattern and apply it to this material. In the following exercise. Notice that the foundation walls are no longer gray and there is no material pattern applied in this view. do the following: ■ ■ For Quality Setting. draw a pick box around the entire 3D image. and drag a zoom box around the area you want to render. TIP If the Rendering tab is not available on the Design Bar. Click Render. select Best. 21 In the drawing area. 22 In the Rendering dialog. right-click the Design Bar.

7 Under Custom. such as steel.rvt. Create a new fill pattern 1 In the Project Browser. i_Settings-in progress. Model patterns are fixed and scale with the model. 26 Navigate to a folder of your preference.rvt.23 On the Rendering dialog. expand Elevations. click Custom. such as brick coursing or ceramic tile on a wall. There are 2 types of fill patterns: model and drafting. Both pattern types are created and applied in a similar way. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns on page 118. You can also dimension to model pattern lines. Notice that no model surface pattern displays on the wall. and save the file as i_Settings-in progress. rotate. 118 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . and move model patterns. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a building. You can align. Drafting pattern density is fixed. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. choose Model. which consists of a double-diagonal hatching pattern. Notice that a concrete surface model pattern is not available. 24 Close the Rendering dialog. click Import. click Show Model. 6 In the Add Surface Pattern dialog. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. TIP Drafting patterns represent materials in symbolic form. 4 Scroll down the list of patterns. under Display. 25 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns In this exercise. 5 Click New. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a structure. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Fill Patterns. 3 Under Pattern Type. 8 Navigate to the training folders installed with your Revit Structure software. Drafting patterns represent material in symbolic form. and double-click West. you create a new pattern and apply it to the material you created in the previous exercise. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise.

18 In the Edit Assembly dialog.pat from the Common folder. and click Open. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns | 119 . TIP If the pattern does not display. and click OK. click 20 Under Surface Pattern. 10 Under Custom. click Edit. 27 Zoom into the model until the fill pattern appears. 17 In the Value field for Structure. The location of these files can vary depending on the path you set during installation. 23 In the Materials dialog. 12 Click OK. 11 Enter Concrete Surface for Name. click . click OK. 25 On the Design Bar. . It is currently assigned the material Concrete-Precast.TIP Typically. 15 On the Options Bar. 14 Select the wall. The west wall of the building displays as solid fill. Apply the concrete surface pattern 13 On the View Control Bar. 19 On the right side of the Materials field. click in the Material field for Layer 2. your training files can be found on C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RST 2009\Training. under Pattern Type. 9 Select Concrete_Surface. click . click . click Modify. The new model pattern is available in the Name list in the Fill Patterns dialog. 16 In the Element Properties dialog. adjust your zoom settings as needed. select Model Graphics Style: Wireframe. click Edit/New. and click OK. 22 Select the Concrete Surface model pattern. to select a fill pattern. select Model. 21 In the Fill Patterns dialog. This layer represents the exterior finish of the wall. 26 On the View Toolbar. 24 Click OK 3 times. select Concrete and enter 30 for Import scale.

Apply object styles 1 In the Project Browser. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. 120 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings .28 Click File menu ➤ Save. Object styles allow you to control the appearance of multiple components of the same type. there are often multiple trusses within a project. For example. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. expand 3D Views.rvt. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. i_Settings-in progress. Object styles are applied in every view and can be overridden in a particular view by modifying the Visibility/Graphics settings. and double-click 3D. you can change the type properties center chase width of one truss and then apply the change to all trusses. Controlling Object Styles You can use object styles to control the appearance of components and subcomponents. use the shortcut keys ZF (Zoom to Fit) so the entire model fits in the drawing area. Controlling Object Styles on page 120. Rather than continually modify the type properties of each truss. 2 On the keyboard.

double-click the Line Color field.3 On the View Control Bar. and click OK. Notice the line color is applied to the wall. 6 Under Category. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Model Graphics Style. and click Hidden Line. expand Walls. click Show categories from all disciplines. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles on page 122. 9 In the Object Styles dialog. click OK. 5 In the Object Styles dialog. under Custom Colors. 11 Proceed to the next exercise. Controlling Object Styles | 121 . 7 Under the Walls category. 4 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 8 In the Color dialog. select Blue.

NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. You then create a new line style to represent underslab drainage. 4 In the Line Pattern Properties dialog. 122 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . 3 In the Line Patterns dialog. expand Structural Framing. 5 Enter the Types and Values shown in the following illustration: 6 Click OK twice. 10 In the Object Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Category. 8 On the View Control Bar. enter Truss for Name. click Model Graphics Style. Click OK. (example: plan view).rvt. you create a new line pattern and apply it to the truss in plan view. click New.O. Wall. Create a new line pattern 1 Verify the 3D view is active. under Floor Plans. select Truss. Under Line Pattern. Apply the new line pattern 7 In the Project Browser. and select Web Joist. now you must apply it. or you can use Object Styles to apply the change to all views. double-click T. Fnd. 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. There are 2 ways to apply the line style to the truss.Modifying Line Patterns and Styles In this exercise. i_Settings-in progress. and click Hidden Line. You have created a new line pattern. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. You can use the Visibility/Graphics settings to modify the truss appearance in a specific view. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Patterns.

Select Blue for Line Color. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles | 123 . Select Truss for Line Pattern. 12 Click the Model Categories tab. 14 In the Select Line Style dialog. and select Web Joist for Visibility. expand Structural Framing. 15 Click OK twice. This overrides the appearance of the truss only in the current view.11 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. select Override and specify the following options: ■ ■ ■ Select 2 for Line Weight. 13 Click Override for Line Style Projection.

24 Click outside the upper-left corner of the slab to begin the rectangle. Click OK. 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select 6 for Line Weight Projection. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Click .Create a new line style 16 In the Project Browser. 21 On the Modelling Tab of the Design Bar. and click to set the rectangle endpoint. . 22 In the Type Selector. 18 In the Line Styles dialog. select Underslab Drainage. move the cursor to the bottom-right corner of the slab. click New. Select Red for Line Color. Slab. and click OK. 20 For the Underslab Drainage category. Enter 2' 0" for Offset. double-click T. 19 Enter Underslab Drainage for Name. Click . 26 Draw 3 vertical lines.O. 23 In the Options Bar. 124 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . Select Double Dash 5/8" for Line Pattern. under Floor Plans. under Modify Subcategories. specify the following: ■ ■ Click Click . 25 In the Options Bar. click Lines. equally spaced as shown below.

Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. click .rvt. i_Settings-in progress. you create a new dimension style using units of measurement that differ from the project settings. 28 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. This turns off the visibility of the underslab drainage lines only in this view. and clear Underslab Drainage. 4 Enter Linear . Modifying Annotations on page 125. Modifying Annotations In this exercise. 32 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 33 On the Model Categories tab.27 On the View Toolbar. Modifying Annotations | 125 . and clear Underslab Drainage. 34 Click OK. You also load a new beam annotation symbol and apply it to show the beam instance number rather than the beam type number. 35 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Duplicate. 3 In the Type Properties dialog. Create a new dimension style 1 Verify the 3D View is active. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Linear.Imperial for name. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. 29 On the Model Categories tab. 30 Click OK. expand Lines. Notice the underslab drainage lines appear in this view. 31 In the Project Browser. expand Lines. under Floor Plans. 5 Under Text. double-click Level 1. and click OK. click the default value for Units Format. 36 Proceed to the next exercise.

22 On the View Toolbar. 15 Under Loaded Tags. . Wall. notice the structural framing tag appears twice. You have created a new dimension style. Each tag category has a different loaded tag: one displays the type value. 20 Select the structural framing tag category with the loaded tag. This tag is used when tagging using the Beams By Category option. verify that Create is clear. click Structural Framing Tag.O.Imperial dimension available. 16 Click OK. notice that there is a Linear . Fnd. A beam instance tag displays on the selected beam. Load a new beam tag 10 In the Project Browser. 11 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. 7 Click OK twice. 19 On the Design Bar. and open Imperial\Structural Framing Tag. 18 Click a beam. click Training Files. click Dimension.6 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. click Tag ➤ By Category. In the Type Selector. and click OK. Notice that you can choose between the 2 beam tag types loaded into this project. 13 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Under Category. Select Feet and fractional inches for Units. double-click T. click Tag All Not Tagged. the other displays the instance value. 126 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . click Modify. scroll to Structural Framing Tag and notice that Structural Framing Tag is now the assigned tag. and select the drop-down arrow that displays. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click 23 Click File menu ➤ Save. Structural Framing Tag. under Floor Plans. 14 In the Tags dialog. 12 Click Load. 17 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 21 Under Leader.rfa. 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. The remaining untagged beams are tagged.

Specifying Units of Measurement. Any new view created using this scale is automatically assigned the detail level Medium. under Length.Temporary Dimensions. and click OK. and Detail Level Options In this exercise. you use the arrows between the columns to move view scales from one detail level to another. click the default value for Format. select Openings. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. Notice the 1/4" = 1' 0" view scale moved to the Medium column.24 Proceed to the next exercise. Modifications to area rounding are displayed in schedules and area tags. click the default value for Format. and click OK. Specifying Units of Measurement. select To the nearest 1/16" for Rounding. Temporary Dimensions.rvt. and Detail Level Options | 127 . Specify temporary dimension properties 7 Click Settings menu ➤ Temporary Dimensions. you modify the detail level assignments. temporary dimensions now snap to the centerline faces and to the openings. select SF for Unit suffix. you modify the temporary dimension settings.Temporary Dimensions. TIP You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties dialog.unless there is an override. select Centerlines 9 Under Doors and Windows. select 0 decimal places for Rounding. under Area. the detail level is specified automatically according to the arrangement in the table. When you create a new view and specify its view scale. In the first section. i_Settings-in progress. 3 In the Format dialog. you modify 3 settings that have a broad impact on the project. and Detail Level Options on page 127. 5 In the Format dialog. and click OK. The view scale moves either from the bottom or the top of the column based on the direction. Unless there is an override. Specify detail levels 10 Click Settings menu ➤ Detail Level. You do not select a view scale to move it. In the final section. In the second section. 8 Under Walls. dimension values display using this setting. 2 In the Project Units dialog. 4 In the Project Units dialog. 11 Between the columns Coarse and Medium. dimensions use these project settings. you specify the project units of measurement . 12 Click OK. In this table. In this project. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. Specifying Units of Measurement. Set units of measurement 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. click . 6 Click OK.

rvt. Modifying Project Browser Organization In a typical project. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. Organize the Project Browser by views 1 In the Project Browser. you modify the Project Browser organization and create new methods of grouping and sorting the views and sheets. Revit Structure project files do not include ceiling plans. 3 Open each of the 3D views in the following order. and open Common\c_Project_Browser.Phase 2-Structure West Wing . you open a project that was created using Revit Architecture to better demonstrate different phases of construction.Phase 3-Structure Completed Project-Structure Completed Structure w/ Roof&Floors 128 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . In the left pane of the Open dialog. you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify how the Project Browser groups and sorts.Phase 1-Structure East Wing . Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In this exercise. 2 In the Project Browser. expand Sheets (all). and notice the progression of each view: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Main Bldg . and double-click Completed Project. NOTE In this exercise. These drawings and sheets can become so numerous that navigating the lengthy Project Browser list is cumbersome.13 Click File menu ➤ Save. Modifying Project Browser Organization on page 128. In order to organize the views and sheets into sets of deliverables. click Training Files. you often produce multiple packages of related drawings. 14 Click File menu ➤ Close. expand Views (all) ➤ 3D Views. Notice that the sheets are listed alphanumerically based on the sheet number.

notice that views are grouped based on phase. 18 In the Browser Organization Properties dialog. expand each view type. expand Complete ➤ 3D Views and then expand Architectural and Structural. click the Folders tab. select Type/Discipline. and click OK. under Views. Organize Project Browser by sheets 11 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. 12 Click the Sheets tab. expand each sheet set. expand both the Architectural and Structural category of views. and click OK. 7 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. notice that Views are divided into Architectural and Structural disciplines. 21 In the Project Browser. 13 Select Sheet Prefix. 8 Select Phase. select Phase/Type/Discipline as the current browser organization. and click OK. select Discipline. 16 Click the Views tab. and click OK. 6 In the Project Browser. under Sheets. 4 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. Modifying Project Browser Organization | 129 . In the Project Browser. and click New. 5 On the Views tab. and click Apply.■ Completed Project Each of the 3D views varies by phase and discipline. and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Group by: Phase Then by: Type Then by: Discipline 19 Click OK. 10 In the Project Browser. Create a new browser organization name 15 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. and click OK. 20 In the Browser Organization dialog. 9 In the Browser Organization dialog. and notice that each is grouped by discipline. 17 Enter Phase/Type/Discipline. On the Project Browser. 14 In the Project Browser.

expand Views ➤ Elevations. Although Revit Structure provides many templates to choose from. you create an office template. When you create new projects. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to other templates. By saving these settings as a template and using it throughout the office. All the settings that you changed in this lesson are saved with the project. 130 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . 3 Select the Structural Analysis-Default. select Project for Create new. When you create a new template based on an existing template. enter a unique file name. 6 In the Project Browser. In the lesson that follows. certain baseline settings are still assigned to the new project. you may decide to modify one or more of these templates to the specific needs of your company. Notice there are a number of different templates to choose from. You can also save these settings in a template file. 4 In the New Project dialog. Other than the default template. Depending on your needs. Creating a Structural Template In this lesson. and click Open. you maintain consistent standards and reduce the amount of repetitive work. This lesson is intended to provide you with a blueprint of how to create your structural template. the project template is used to provide the initial project settings such as materials. The first step in creating your structural template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. such as structural or construction. when you create a new project. Review existing templates 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. 2 Under Template File.Notice that the Project Browser has reorganized all the views within this project according to Phase. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. and click OK. a group of settings are used to specify the project environment. For example. and Discipline. click Browse. you can select an existing template or begin the project with no template. 22 Click File menu ➤ Close. You can save Project Browser organization schemes. choose the option that will help you develop the best template with the least amount of work. you create a Revit Structure template file and set it as your default template.rte template. navigate to your preferred directory. and rendered scenes in a template. you select the starting point for your structural template. You can use an existing template as the baseline or use no template at all. each is modified in a way to make it useful to a particular industry. dimensions styles. named print settings. Choosing the Base Template In this exercise. 5 Click OK. A well designed template will ensure office standards are maintained and will reduce repetitive work. It is mostly conceptual and is designed as a road map with options for your consideration. If you want to save this file. In this lesson. and view names. Even if you choose not to base that project on a template. If your work requires a variety of templates. preloaded families. levels. Whenever you create a new project or template. and double-click Building Elevation. the same rules apply. you modified various project settings that affect project appearance and organization. The lesson begins with choosing the right base template and progresses through many of the most common modifications that you would consider in order to make a template unique to your situation. Type.

These settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. in the drawing area. select Project Template. are simple in respect to the predefined views and schedules. drag a zoom region around the level heads. 14 Under Create New. Notice that there are more predefined levels than you normally see in the default template. you can create the materials commonly used in most projects. The specifics regarding each of these are addressed at the end of this exercise. you can select it now. 8 In the Project Browser. you can dictate its appearance in all views and renderings. Modifying Project Settings on page 131. In this exercise. such as the structural template.7 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region and. close them. For example. Other templates. you modify the project settings for your new template. 11 Under Template File. 13 Click Open. click Browse. you can establish the settings that are common to most projects. there are additional commands on the Settings menu that allow modifications that can be saved in a template. In order to maintain office standards and reduce rework. If you want to use a template other than the default. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. 12 Select a default template. Modifying Project Settings | 131 . and click OK. 9 Click File menu ➤ Close. weights. 10 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. Notice that the structural analysis template is more complex than the default template. When you create the material. and patterns Annotations Project units Temporary dimensions Detail levels Project Browser organization View direction In addition to the list above. but the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of the structural tools. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. navigate throughout the various views and schedules. Modifying Project Settings In this exercise. you modify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Materials Fill patterns Object styles Line styles. If you have additional projects open.

Create and modify materials 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. or modify existing patterns. specific modifications are not dictated. 6 Create new fill patterns as needed. 3 Click OK twice to close the Material Library and Materials dialogs. Modify line weights 15 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Weights. You may want to rename or modify some of the existing materials. you can set line weights. and scroll through the list of categories. or refer to the Help documentation. 11 If necessary. and one for annotation symbol line styles. The Model Line Weights tab controls the line width of structural components. If there are materials that are commonly used within your office or industry. TIP When the material of a component is set to by category. 2 Scroll down the Name list. and create new subcategories as needed. You are merely pointed to each area where you can adapt the template to your needs. 9 Click the Model Objects tab. In the dialog. The widths are dependent on the scale of the design. Specify object styles 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. create new subcategories. such as beams and columns in orthographic views. 5 Scroll through the list of model and drafting patterns. Create and modify fill patterns 4 Click Settings menu ➤ Fill Patterns. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a structure.During this exercise. In the Object Styles dialog. see the previous lesson. You can add and delete view scales. one for perspective model line styles. create and modify them as needed. and move model patterns. 132 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . and materials for different categories and subcategories of components or imported objects. 12 Click the Annotation Objects tab. 10 Modify the properties of any existing categories as needed. rotate. there are 3 tabs: one for model component line styles. The Line Weights command controls the display of line widths for each scale of a view. Observe the materials that are already defined. You can define the widths of 16 different pens for 6 different drawing scales. 14 Click OK to close the Object Styles dialog. Modifying System Settings on page 107. line colors. line patterns. it adopts the material assigned to its object styles category. TIP Drafting patterns represent materials in symbolic form. 7 Click OK when finished. 13 Modify categories. RELATED See Modifying Project Settings on page 115 for more information on creating new fill patterns. You can align. For more details on modifying these settings.

30 For existing line categories. To see the details of a particular style. 36 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing arrowhead. select it. select it from this list. or line pattern as needed. 21 Click the Annotation Line Weights tab. line color. create new line subcategories using line weights and line patterns previously modified or created. 41 Modify the properties of existing linear dimension styles if necessary. 16 Click the Model Line Weights tab. 43 If you need to create a new linear dimension style. such as section lines and dimension lines. and click Edit. modify the line weight. 28 Click OK. select it from this list. 19 Click the Perspective Line Weights tab. 35 Modify the properties of existing arrowhead styles if necessary. and notice the list of existing arrowhead styles. click Duplicate. Modify line styles 29 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. 23 Click OK. The Annotation Line Weights tab controls the line width of annotation symbols. and dimensions. angular. Modify arrowheads 33 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Arrowheads. 32 Click OK. name the style. 18 Add and delete view scales as needed. 25 Scroll through the list of line patterns. The arrowheads configured within this dialog can be applied to text notes. To see the details of a particular style. tags. 27 Add and delete line patterns as needed. 20 Modify existing line weights as needed. Annotation line widths are independent of the view scale. 34 Select the Type drop-down list. 37 If you need to create a new arrowhead style. Modify Dimension Styles 39 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Linear. 31 If necessary. and radial dimensions are modified separately. and specify the properties. 38 Click OK. Modifying Project Settings | 133 . 22 Modify existing line weights as needed. 42 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing style. 17 Modify existing line weights as needed. name the style. click Duplicate. Modify line patterns 24 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Patterns. Linear.The Perspective Line Weights tab controls the line width of objects in perspective views. and notice the list of existing linear dimension styles. 40 Select the Type drop-down list. and specify the properties. 26 To modify a line pattern.

make sure each category is assigned the desired tag. 49 After you have loaded the necessary tags. 52 Modify the unit settings if necessary. Specify temporary dimensions 57 Click Settings menu ➤ Temporary Dimensions. The detail level is based on view scale. View scales are organized under the detail level headings Coarse. You can override tag assignment using the Type Selector. specify the default location for temporary dimensions. 54 Repeat the previous 2 steps for the Area. Volume. you can modify the location of temporary dimension witness lines. 47 Scroll through the list of loaded tags. Specify project units 50 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. 60 Click OK. Specify detail levels 61 Click Settings menu ➤ Detail Level. You can have multiple tags loaded for any category. 56 Click OK. 58 Under Walls. and choose a decimal symbol. 51 Under Length. Medium. 134 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . or Fine. and click OK. Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Radial. the detail level of that view is automatically assigned using this table. 53 Click OK. the last loaded tag becomes the default tag. click Format. when you add a structural framing tag with the tag option selected.44 Click OK. The tag assignments in this dialog dictate the default tag for each category. the beam is tagged using the tag assigned to the structural framing category in this dialog. and Angle settings. and move view scales as needed. click Load. you can move view scales from one detail level to another. specify where you want the temporary dimensions to measure from by default. Modify loaded tags 46 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. Using the arrows between the columns. TIP In the drawing area. In the Tags dialog. 45 Repeat the previous 5 steps for angular and radial dimensions. For example. 55 Specify the Slope option. 62 Review the table. you can override the assignment by selecting a different tag from the drop-down list. When more than one tag has been loaded for a category. 59 Under Doors and Windows. When you create a new view. Notice many categories do not have loaded tags. 48 To load new annotation tags. ■ ■ Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Angular. You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties command.

65 In the Browser Organization dialog. In order to organize the views and sheets into sets of deliverables. Rename. click the arrows between columns. Setting View Direction 72 In the Project Browser. These drawings and sheets can become so numerous that navigating the lengthy Project Browser list is cumbersome. click View Direction. In certain projects. you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify how the Project Browser groups and sorts. create new browser organization types. Modifying Project Settings | 135 . In a typical project. To move the view scales. This parameter makes it possible for you to select a different view direction. you can view the project from the slab looking up (up direction). 74 In the Type Properties dialog. Rename. The view scales move from the lower-left to the upper-right and vice-versa. right-click any plan view of the Structural Plan Family. For example. you often produce multiple packages of related drawings. 69 Delete. 70 If necessary. or from the roof looking down (down direction). engineers view plans using different orientations in different countries. 71 Click OK. 66 Delete. and select Properties. or Edit existing organization types. click Edit/New. 68 Click the Sheets tab.NOTE You cannot select specific scales in this dialog. 73 In the Element Properties dialog. 63 Click OK. click the Views tab. 67 If necessary. or Edit existing organization types. Modify project browser organization 64 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. create new browser organization types.

you may only want to add generically named settings that would be applicable to most projects. and framing tags. and make modifications in each area as necessary. 136 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . 76 Click OK to exit the dialogs. You can find additional information in Help. you must decide if the time investment is offset later by the reduction in repetitive work.75 Use the down arrow to change the parameters to Up or Down. If necessary. However. This could be useful for things such as title blocks. See Setting up Shared and Project Parameters on page 144. you should consider each carefully before applying changes to a template. you can add project (and shared) parameters to a template. See Modifying Views and View Templates on page 139. Use the table below as a checklist. Links to associated tutorials are provided. Additional project settings 77 On the Settings menu. View Templates Create and modify the view templates to control the appearance of default views. Settings Menu Command Project Parameters Associated Tutorial Considerations This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. Each of these areas is covered later in this lesson or in other tutorials. you can save rendered scene settings to a template. there are several additional commands that control the project environment. For example. Although these settings can be saved within a template. In such a case. This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. Each command is available on the Settings menu.

each component loaded will add to the length of the relative Type Selector list.Settings Menu Command Structural Settings Associated Tutorial Considerations This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. and click Open. and click OK. Load and modify families 1 Use the project started in the previous exercise. you should only load components that tend to be used in every project and are not likely to change. If necessary. and column symbols. select Load. In the Element Properties dialog. or add to this selection. If you have not completed the previous exercise. select Edit/New. Click Duplicate. Make modifications. there are some important thoughts to consider. notice the list of beams is already loaded. click on the Options Bar. you may want to delete. you can set the symbolic representation settings for cutback distance. 78 Proceed to the next exercise. or load a new beam type. you can move onto the next component type. This would be cumbersome and counterproductive. modify. titleblocks. if you loaded every beam type you could find. Modify type properties. Use the instructions in the table below to perform these steps. select Edit/New. Depending on the intended use of this template. and click OK. You can do this in several ways: select a component type and click Properties to modify or add a new type. create. For example. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups In this exercise. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups on page 137. do so before starting this exercise. you do both. You should think very carefully about what families or groups to load and modify within a template. 2 In the Type Selector. See Modifying Structural Settings on page 142. In the Element Properties dialog. you could load detail components. Goal: Load new beam type Steps: In the Element Properties dialog. You may want to modify slab types to add a more diverse selection within the template. and on the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. you load and modify families or groups into the template started in the previous exercise. Although this is possible. In addition. brace symbols. If this selection is satisfactory. Although the options are endless. Navigate to the directory containing the beam type. You can load any family or group into a template. It is important to understand that you should not load every conceivable family into a template file. enter a name. click Beam. select it. you may want to load families into the template to save time later or ensure consistency throughout the office. and click OK. it is not recommended because it would increase the file size significantly before the first component was added to the project. you would have to scroll through a lengthy list of beams every time you changed a beam within a project. 3 To modify. Obviously. However. Modify beam type Create new beam type Loading and Modifying Families and Groups | 137 . For example. and beams. In the steps that follow. or use the Project Browser to delete an existing type.

create. This titleblock is currently part of the template. or modify any component families or groups as necessary. Notice that there is a titleblock symbol loaded. 138 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . 11 To load a titleblock. 13 Using any of the techniques learned in previous steps. 5 Repeat the process for any component type that you want to modify. Notice it has Revit in the upper-right corner. Notice that each family category is listed. You can use the Project Browser to delete a component from the project/template. You can use the Project Browser to modify family types. and select the titleblock type.) 9 Expand the titleblock. You may want to open other Design Bar tabs and make modifications to components not available on this tab. click Load. Notice that you have the option to Load Family or Load Group. load. 10 In the Type Properties dialog.4 Click OK. 8 Expand Annotation Symbols. and click Delete. 12 Click OK. Modifying Views and View Templates on page 139. Press ESC twice to return to the template. click Preview. Loading from the library is quickest when you know exactly what families you want to load. To do so. right-click the component. expand Families. You can also load families and groups from the File menu. 6 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library. Use Project Browser to modify families 7 In the Project Browser. 14 Proceed to the next exercise. You may want to load a titleblock applicable to your office and then delete this titleblock. (The titleblock name may vary depending on the template you started with.

TIP To select the view template directly from the Project Browser. 5 Repeat the steps above for each of the view templates in the Name drop-down list. you create and apply the underlying view templates that control the initial appearance of the views. These values represent the starting point for each plan view. These settings are applied when you create a new plan view by adding a new level. select the view. and then create new views that will automatically use those templates. and double-click Level 1. Modifying Views and View Templates | 139 . and the visibility settings of categories and subcategories. you will first modify view templates. you can apply a view template to any view. Apply view templates 7 In the Project Browser. By modifying the view templates according to your specific needs. you create the views required for your template.Modifying Views and View Templates At the beginning of this lesson. and make modifications. In addition. In this exercise. Create and modify view templates 1 Click Settings menu ➤ View Templates. 4 If necessary. 3 Specify each value as needed. You can also apply a template to an existing view at any time using the Apply View Template command. right-click. you created new projects using different templates. and you noticed that each template had a unique set of predefined views. At any time. rename or duplicate the view template. View Range. expand Views ➤ Structural Plans. you save time and increase consistency. and select Apply View Template. 6 Click OK. 2 For Name. select Structural Framing Plan. Detail Level. Discipline. 8 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. View templates help standardize the look of all views by providing the initial settings for a view. Keep in mind that these settings are the default settings for this view type. The view inherits view properties such as View Scale. In this exercise.

and apply the appropriate template. This option means that every time a new plan view is created. click View menu ➤ View Properties. or delete this view. 18 In the Project Browser. TIP To apply the template to multiple views. under 3D Views. 15 If you modified any other view templates. 14 Select the Structural Plan template. duplicate. 13 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. Then right-click and select Apply View Template. and notice the context menu includes options to rename. under Floor Plans. if desired. 22 Add the new level within the elevation view. To do so. this view template will be used to set the initial view properties. 10 Select Apply automatically to new views of same type. under Structural Plans. duplicate. 17 In the Project Browser. After the template is applied. 24 Create additional levels as needed. select Make Plan View. Create 3D views 25 To add 3D views to the template. Make sure you are still in the Level 2 view. Create and modify views 16 In the Project Browser. click Level on the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Notice the level names have blue titles for the associated plan views. When the view template is applied the view properties of the target view are instantly reset to match those of the template. The associated floor plan will use the Structural Plan view template to set its initial view properties. There is no limit to the number of times you can apply a view template to a view. Rename. review the Structural plans and elevations. on the View toolbar.Applying a view template to a view is a one-time action. Subsequent modifications to the view template do not affect any current views unless you reapply the view template. nor is there a limit to the number of view templates that you can apply. double-click Building Elevation. 9 Select the Structural Framing Plan template. Black levels have no associated views. 140 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . under Structural Plans. click 26 In the Project Browser. and select Rename. and click OK. If necessary. 19 In the Project Browser. review the existing floor plans. 21 In the Options Bar. You can also duplicate or delete the view. under Elevations. and press Ctrl while selecting additional views. open the view from the Project Browser. 28 Rename the 3D View. 11 Click Apply. 20 To add additional levels to the template. the view is not linked to the template in any way. expand 3D Views. double-click Level 2. right-click Level 1. 27 In the Project Browser. 23 Rename and reposition the level as needed. right-click {3D}. and click OK. select the view in the Project Browser. you may want to modify the view properties of any new views. You can rename this view. click Apply. or delete them as needed. 12 In the Project Browser.

You may want to add schedules to a template. on the View toolbar. 35 In the Schedule Properties dialog. click Schedule/Quantities. make the following modifications as needed: ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. and click OK. You may want to consider adding the schedules that you use most often. select and order required fields. Save the view 32 To save the view. On the Filter tab. This can save time and ensure office standards are maintained.29 To create additional 3D views. The view is listed in the Project Browser under Views ➤ 3D Views. assign filters. click . and click OK. click Dynamically Modify Views 30 On the View toolbar. modify settings. Using this dialog. Create and modify schedules 33 On the View tab of the Design Bar. This tool provides freeform navigation for exterior and interior viewing. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. select the category type. 31 Click the arrow on the right side of the Dynamic View icon and select Options. 34 If you want to add schedules to your template. and modify their properties accordingly. click . Modifying Views and View Templates | 141 . supply a view name. The Steering Wheel is displayed in the drawing area. you can modify the Steering Wheel visibility and appearance.

and click OK. 39 Add views to the sheet by selecting Add View from the View tab of the Design Bar. You may want to add symbolic settings to a template. select one. beams.■ ■ On the Formatting tab. To later add a titleblock to a sheet. right-click the sheet in the Project Browser. 37 Repeat the steps above for each schedule type you add to the template. You may want to consider adding the settings that you use most often. 40 To rename or renumber the sheet. select the default titleblock. Modifying Structural Settings on page 142. You can also create custom brace symbols for use in plan views and for parallel line offset distances. select the titleblock and delete it. 2 In the Structural Settings dialog. This can save time and ensure office standards are maintained. TIP You can add sheets to the template and delete the titleblock. You are prompted to select a titleblock. You can still add views to the sheet. On the Appearance tab. double-click the sheet number. To do so. and click Rename. After the sheet is created. or on the sheet itself. Modifying Structural Settings You can create custom cutback distances for braces. Add sheets to the template 38 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Subsequent sheets are numbered consecutively based on the previous sheet. 41 Create new sheets as needed. modify settings. and columns. 142 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . Create custom symbolic representations 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Structural Settings. click Sheet. click View menu ➤ New ➤ Place Titleblock. TIP You can drag and drop views directly from the Project Browser onto the sheet. If you have already loaded your titleblocks into the template. and click OK. and modify their properties accordingly. click the Symbolic Representation Settings tab. 42 Proceed to the next exercise. modify settings. 36 Click OK.

The Export Layers command maps Revit Structure categories and subcategories to specific layer names that are available after exporting to other CAD programs.3 Under General. you modify the export layer settings for DWG/DXF and DGN. Modify export layers for DWG and DXF 1 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DWG/DXF. specify the desired line representation and offset as follows: ■ Plan representation: Select the desired symbolic line type for plan representation (Line or Line with Angle. ■ 5 Click OK. 6 Proceed to the next exercise. Modifying Import/Export Settings on page 143.) Parallel line offset: Enter the symbolic distance for the parallel line offset. ■ 4 Under Brace Symbols. each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen number/line weight settings you created. The layer names are stored in a text file (exportlayers. and are exported along with your project into the appropriate CAD program. Modifying Import/Export Settings | 143 . The layer mapping files reside in the Data folder of the Revit Structure program installation directory. When you import a DWG or DXF file.txt). Revit Structure presets the layer names to American Institute of Architects (AIA) industry standards. Symbolic column cutback distance: Sets the distance from the center of the column to the beam endpoint. You then set the import line weights for DWG/DXF. enter the desired values for the following cutback distances: ■ Symbolic brace/beam cutback distance: Sets the distance from the center of the brace/beam to the center of the adjoining beam. Modifying Import/Export Settings In this exercise.

and unlike shared parameters. Set as many pen-line weight mappings as desired. and click Save. windows. click Save As. you can define additional parameters that are not included in either the pre-defined instance and type parameters within family components or within the project template. and related multi-category tags and schedules. Modify export layers for DGN 4 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DGN. you do not need to worry about where the text file is saved. match the pen (DWG/DXF Color Number) to the appropriate line weight (values from 1 .2 For each category. it lists components regardless of category by using an external parameter as a filter. they cannot be used to tag objects. click Save As. name the file. Project parameters are those parameters (either instance or type) that are used within a single project for the purposes of scheduling information specific to that project. they become the set mappings for the project. The layer mapping files reside in the Data folder of the Revit Structure program installation directory. and so on. When you create a multi-category schedule. and so on. you could use shared parameters to add specific parameters to an existing family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not initially present by default. 9 Click Save As. You can import pen numbers from a DWG or DXF file and map them to a Revit Structure line weight. name the file. Pen Number 1 to Line Weight Number 1. 8 In the dialog. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters In this exercise. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. 5 For each category. 144 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . project parameters. for example. and click Save. Using shared parameters. each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen number/line weight settings you created. Modify import line weights 7 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Import Line Weights DWG/DXF. When scheduling. You can add these shared parameters to any family regardless of category. specify the following: ■ ■ Projection Level Number and Color ID Cut Level Number and Color ID 6 If you modified the settings in this dialog. you normally schedule a single category: rooms. For example. When you import a DWG or DXF file.txt) for MicroStation. Pen Number 2 to Line Weight Number 2. The layer names are stored in a text file (exportlayersdgn. you refine the template further by setting up shared parameters. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters on page 144. name the file. therefore. Their definitions are stored in an external file ensuring consistency across families and projects. When you save these mappings to a text file. specify the following: ■ ■ Projection Layer Name and Color ID Cut Layer Name and Color ID 3 If you modified the settings in this dialog. They cannot be shared with other projects. Their values may also be aggregated and reported using multi-category schedules.16). These settings are retained within the project template. and click Save. doors. Multi-Category Tags employ shared parameters to permit tagging of any family component regardless of category. and then are exported along with your project into the appropriate CAD program.

select a parameter discipline type. 19 Specify whether the parameter is stored by instance or type. 15 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 3 Name and save the file. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters | 145 . and click OK. 20 Select the element categories to which this parameter applies. 2 Click Create. and select a shared parameter. 5 Enter the group name. 7 Under Parameter group. Set up project parameters 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. detailed instructions are not supplied because each office has a unique set of needs. add required parameters. and select Shared Parameter. 27 Click OK. you may want to save the file to a network location. you can browse to that file and modify it as needed. you can begin creating parameter groups. Creating Named Print Settings. and click OK when finished. under Groups. After the file is named. click New. If a file already exists. click New. and specify the categories to which this parameter applies. select a group to which you want to add parameters. 18 Under Type.In this exercise. 16 Under Name. 17 Under Discipline. 25 Click OK. 26 Specify whether you want the shared parameter to be an instance or a type parameter. select Project parameter. 14 Click Add. 28 Add shared project parameters as needed. NOTE This procedure is for creating a new shared parameter file. select a parameter value type. 8 Under Parameters. Create and load multi-category tags 29 Create required multi-category tags in the Family Editor. 4 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. 12 Click OK when you have finished creating shared parameters. and specify the Type. 11 For each parameter group. you can create a list of parameters. For each parameter group. 23 To add a shared project parameter. If this template will be used by multiple people within an office. 9 Name the parameter. enter a parameter name. This allows you to name the external parameter file. Set up shared parameters 1 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters. 10 Click OK. 21 Click OK. you can skip this exercise and move on to the last exercise of this lesson. 22 Add project parameters as needed. click Add. If you do not need to make changes to shared or project parameters. 6 Create as many groups as needed. 24 Click Select.

37 Create additional multi-category schedules as needed. you can set options such as sheet sizes. 2 Under Name.For information on creating multi-category tags. select the first printer for which you want to create named settings. Creating Named Print Settings on page 146. For each printer. select the tag. 33 Select <Multi-Category> for Category. you create named print settings. You can also create named settings for printing to a DWF writer. and add them to your default template file. The tag is now part of the template. This can be beneficial if you have numerous printers in a large networked office. make minor modifications if necessary. 35 Create the schedule as you did in the previous exercise. click Schedule/Quantities. After you have created the multi-category tags within the Family Editor. and click OK. and click Open. 38 Proceed to the final exercise. click OK. or consult the Help documentation. 34 Under Name. Creating Named Print Settings In this exercise. 30 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 31 Navigate to the directory that contains the tag you want to load. you need only select a setting. see the tutorial referenced in the introduction of this exercise. and the percent of actual size. Create multi-category schedules 32 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and print. you can load them into the template. paper placement. enter a name for the schedule. Create named print settings 1 Click File menu ➤ Print. 146 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . 36 When you have completed the schedule. By creating named settings within the template. Notice that the shared parameters created in previous steps are included under Available fields.

8 Click OK when you have finished creating named settings for this printer. and create additional settings as needed. 6 Modify the printer settings. 4 Click Save As. 5 In the New dialog. enter a name for the print setting and click OK. click New. 7 If you want to have multiple settings for this printer. Creating Named Print Settings | 147 .3 Under Settings. click Setup.

19 Click OK. 23 Navigate to the template location. and click Save. loaded components. Your template is complete. 13 Navigate to the directory where you want to save the template. Use the template 16 To use the template. select Template Files (*. you help ensure the office standards are maintained and reduce repetitive work that would be done by each employee for each project. click Setup. 21 Click the File Locations tab. If you need to share this file with others. you should save it to a network path. The changes you made to the template are now the starting point for this project. and save it as a template file. 10 Repeat these steps as needed. 17 Select Browse. select a different printer. In this lesson. you can use the Transfer Project Standards tool to move standards from one project to another. you modified settings. By investing the time to individualize your template. The only remaining task is to save it. TIP Another way to create a template is to delete all model geometries from an existing project. Save the template 12 Click File menu ➤ Save. 24 Click OK. 14 Under Save as type. TIP You can also create named settings for your DWF writer. You can also set this template as your default template. select it. 148 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings .rte). and click Open. and navigate to the location where you saved the template. In addition. 22 Next to Default template file. and create new settings for this printer. 11 Click OK when finished. This can provide a good starting point for a template. 18 Select the template.9 In the Print dialog. and click Open. click Browse. Set the template as your default template file 20 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. and saved them to a template. 15 Name the template.

Importing/Linking Drawing Files In this lesson. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_1. 4 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ Select Link and Current view only. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Notice that Level 2 is bold. AutoCAD Architecture. The imported file is used as a background template for creating the structural elements of the model. click Training Files. and Revit Architecture.rvt. and select Imperial\i_STR_CSM_Level2. In the next tutorial Creating a Structural Model on page 161.Starting a New Project 4 In this tutorial you begin your structural model in Revit Structure 2009. some structural columns were added to the model at off-grid locations in conjunction with architectural columns. select Views (all) ➤ Structural Plans. by importing or linking an existing Autodesk architectural project created in AutoCAD. 1 In the Project Browser.dwg. 2 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. This is the active view that displays in the drawing area. click Training Files. you learn how to import or link to files from different drawing programs. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you use these columns to complete the structural framing. you learn how to import or link a 2-dimensional (2D) drawing created in AutoCAD for use as a background. 3 In the left pane of the Import/Link dialog. 149 . Importing/Linking a 2D AutoCAD File In this lesson. NOTE For training purposes.

click drawing area. and a few basic interior walls and doors display in the view.NOTE Selecting Current View Only prevents the DWG file from appearing in all views. Click Open. 5 In the drawing area. copy. drag. stairs and elevator opening symbols. However. The file becomes view specific and will behave like an annotation. 6 On the Options toolbar. select Auto . paste. Exterior facade outlines. you cannot select individual elements in the linked model. ■ ■ ■ For Colors.Center to Center. For Positioning. and rotate the view as one object. Selecting Link (instead of import) allows you to view. click the imported/linked file. select Black and White. to pin the drawing so that it cannot be moved within the 150 | Chapter 4 Starting a New Project .

and select the latest available format. some structural columns were added to the model at off-grid locations in conjunction with architectural columns. and expand Structural Plans. In the next tutorial. Creating a Structural Model on page 161. click Training Files. you use these columns to complete the structural framing. expand Views (all). select the Imported Categories tab. In the next tutorial. 1 In the Project Browser. Bind all external reference files (xrefs) to make the architectural data visible to the engineer after export.dwg. 10 Click File menu ➤ Close. Notice that Level 2 is bold. and click OK. Before exporting the file from AutoCAD Architecture.7 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. In the left pane of the Open dialog. This is the active view that displays in the drawing area. Importing /Linking an AutoCAD Architecture File | 151 . 2 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats 3 In the left pane of the Import/Link dialog.dwg. 8 In the Visibility/Graphic dialog. On the File menu. a new training file is supplied. select each file and select Insert for Bind Type. click Training Files. 9 Select Halftone for the value of i_STR_CSM_Level2. Importing /Linking an AutoCAD Architecture File In this lesson. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_1. You can save the open file if you wish. the file should be prepared as follows: ■ ■ Proxy graphics should be enabled by setting the system variable to 1. The halftone of the imported drawing is used as a background for placing columns. and select Imperial\i_RST_Import_ADT. select Export to AutoCAD. ■ Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Creating a Structural Model on page 161. NOTE For training purposes.rvt. In the Xref Manager dialog. you learn how to import a 3-dimensional (3D) drawing created in AutoCAD Architecture for use as a background.

Exterior facade outlines. select Invert. 6 On the Options toolbar. 8 In the Visibility/Graphic dialog.Origin to Origin. click the Imported Categories tab. 5 In the drawing area. to pin the drawing so that it cannot be moved within the 7 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Click Open. click the imported/linked file. click Revit Structure drawing area. stairs. and a few basic interior walls and doors display in the view. 152 | Chapter 4 Starting a New Project .4 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Colors. and elevator opening symbols. select Auto . For Positioning.

12 On the Options toolbar. click 14 In the Element Properties dialog. Importing /Linking an AutoCAD Architecture File | 153 . Under Constraints. enter -1' 0' for Base Offset. click Partial Explode. Click OK. and click OK. The halftone of the imported drawing is used as a background for placing columns. click the linked file.9 Select Halftone for the value of i_RST_Import_ADT.dwg. and on the Option Bar. do the following: ■ ■ . 10 On the View toolbar. click . 11 In the drawing area. 13 Select any column.

select Project under Create New. 4 In the left pane of the Import/Link dialog. 154 | Chapter 4 Starting a New Project . Open a new project 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. walls. 16 Click File menu ➤ Close. for Positioning. and click OK. 15 Close the Element Properties dialog. You also learn how to use the Copy/Monitor feature to provide project coordination between architects and structural engineers. Linking a Revit Architecture File In this exercise. Link a Revit Architecture file 3 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Revit.Origin to Origin. 2 In the New Project dialog. select a template file. levels. You can copy grids. 6 Click Open. In the next tutorial.rvt. click Training Files. 5 In the Add Link dialog. columns.Notice the column adjusts to the change. and floors from the original design and monitor any changes made to those elements. you learn how to link to a 3-dimensional (3D) drawing created in Revit Architecture for use as a background. This is the active view that displays in the drawing area. a new training file is supplied. and open Imperial\i_STR_CSM_Revit. You can save the open file if desired. select Auto . Creating a Structural Model on page 161. Notice that Level 2 is bold.

Linking a Revit Architecture File | 155 . click Revit Structure drawing area. stairs and elevator opening symbols. click Options. The Design Bar changes to Copy/Monitor mode Set options 12 On the Design Bar. and a few basic interior walls and doors display in the view. to pin the drawing so that it cannot be moved within the 10 Click Tools menu ➤ Copy/Monitor ➤ Select Link. This is the keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit. 7 Enter ZF. 8 In the drawing area. 9 On the Options toolbar. 11 Click the imported Revit drawing.Exterior facade outlines. click the linked file.

under Structural Plans. 15 Set the other parameter as desired. NOTE Architectural columns typically extend through multiple layers of a model. and the New Type for the corresponding element available in the template selected. 13 In the Copy/Monitor Options dialog. Each tab provides various parameters that can be set for that specific element. Grids. Therefore. you can exclude element types you do not want to copy. To select more than one grid. Elements available for monitoring are separated into 5 categories (Levels. select Level 2. click OK to close the Copy/Monitor Options Dialog. 156 | Chapter 4 Starting a New Project . 18 Click the grid to be copied/monitored. under Additional Copy Parameters. 17 On the Copy/Monitor Design Bar. 14 In the Columns dialog. Columns. and while pressing CTRL. Copy grids 16 In the Project Browser. Also. and Floors).The Copy/Monitor Options dialog opens. A column may span from level 1 to level 10 of a structure and may present a problem when the analytical model is generated. columns need to be split at each level. select Split Columns by Levels. click Multiple on the Options toolbar. Walls. click the Columns tab. make selections. On each tab the Original Type column identifies the type for the Revit Architecture file. click Copy. When finished.

and that the type from the new project will be used. click Multiple on the Options toolbar. an eyeball symbol is displayed to indicate a relationship with the original element. NOTE A warning message may indicate that the loaded type has been renamed. NOTE If you are prompted that the element type already exists in the project. To select more than one level. The warning can be ignored.NOTE If you are prompted that the element type already exists in the project. and select each level. press CTRL. 20 On the Copy/Monitor Design Bar. click OK. Copying levels 19 In the Project Browser. After you select the grid. under Elevations (Building Elevation). 21 Click the level to be copied/monitored. click Copy. click OK. and that the type from the new project will be used. Linking a Revit Architecture File | 157 . double-click Building Elevation.

press CTRL. NOTE A warning message may indicate that the loaded type has been renamed. and columns 22 In the Project Browser. an eyeball symbol is displayed to indicate a relationship with the original element. and on the Options Bar. floors.After you select each level. To select more than one element. The warning can be ignored. The warning can be ignored. an eyeball symbol is displayed to indicate a relationship with the original element. 24 Click the structural elements to be copied/monitored. NOTE A warning message may indicate that the loaded type has been renamed. 25 On the Design bar. 158 | Chapter 4 Starting a New Project . and select each element. click . click Copy. under Structural Plans. Copy structural walls. select Level 1. and that the type from the new project will be used. click Finish Mode. Change the structural usage of the copied elements 26 Select a structural wall to be copied/monitored. NOTE If you are prompted that the element type already exists in the project. 23 On the Copy/Monitor Design Bar. After selecting each element. click OK. click Multiple on the Options toolbar.

■ Select Overlay. select Bearing for Structural Usage. the structural usage parameter must be changed in the Element Properties dialog. check the value for Structural. and floors. Links will appear in the file they are linked into. 32 In the Manage Links dialog. 28 Select a floor to be copied/monitored. Click OK. click Reference Type. ■ Linking a Revit Architecture File | 159 . click the Revit tab. click . so that Revit Structure will enable the analytical projection plane feature for those elements.27 In the Element Properties dialog. 29 In the Element Properties dialog. columns. The linked Revit file is displayed. Manage links 30 Click File menu ➤ Manage Links. and click OK. The link will not follow the host if it becomes linked into another file. Select Attachment to make a link visible when its host document is linked into another file. 31 In the Manage Links dialog. and click OK. NOTE For all copied/monitored structural walls. and on the Option Bar.

NOTE All copied elements are monitored for possible changes. Creating a Structural Model on page 161. 34 Proceed to the next tutorial. The coordination monitor function provides notification that updates have occurred.33 Click File menu ➤ Close. In a later tutorial. the updated Revit Architecture file is reloaded into Revit Structure. 160 | Chapter 4 Starting a New Project . a new training file is supplied. You can save the open file if you wish. In the next tutorial. Project Coordination on page 461.

you add horizontal framing to an area of Level 2. 161 . you begin by adding columns from Ground Level to Level 2. After you copy columns. and then copy this framing to other levels.Creating a Structural Model 5 In this chapter. You also learn how to splice the columns. You copy columns and use the paste-align command to add structure to other levels. you create a structural model using the tools available in Revit Structure 2009. Creating a Structural Model In this lesson.

1 On the View toolbar. and draw a zoom box around the upper-left corner of the 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files. which you use as a background drawing for placing columns. 5 Click the value in the grid head. the imported drawing is a halftone. Notice the grid line is highlighted with a blue value within the grid head. 4 Select the left vertical grid line. click Grid. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Grids. click .rvt.Adding Grid Lines to the Imported Drawing In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 On the Options Bar. and enter A. . click structural model. 162 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model .

The last vertical grid is K. Notice it is grid L. 9 On the View toolbar. 8 When you get to grid I. Zoom in and out as needed. and draw a zoom region around the upper-right corner of the 10 Select the upper horizontal grid line. 7 Select the remaining vertical grid lines moving from left to right. Adding Grid Lines to the Imported Drawing | 163 . Notice it is labeled B. . click structural model. they are labelled in alphabetical sequence.As you select subsequent grid lines. 6 Select the next vertical grid line to the right of grid line A. change the value to J.

13 Select the remaining 3 horizontal grids. click Grid. 164 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . 12 Select the next grid line below grid 1. 16 On the View toolbar. 14 On the Design Bar.11 Click the blue value within the grid line L head. 18 On the Options Bar. and draw a zoom box around the atrium. Notice that the sequencing has adjusted from alphabetical to numeric. The bottom grid should be grid 5. 19 Click the column to select the arc start point. click Modify. click . and enter 1 for the new value. 17 On the Design Bar. click . Draw a grid using the arc tool 15 Enter ZF (keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit).

Adding Grid Lines to the Imported Drawing | 165 . 21 Click the column to set the arc radius.20 Click the column to select the arc endpoint.

Extend grid 23 Drag the arc start point approximately as shown. click Modify. and select the grid. 166 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . 24 Drag the arc endpoint approximately as shown.22 On the Design Bar.

The next exercise uses a new training file.rvt. Adding Structural Columns In this exercise. To save changes. Adding Structural Columns on page 167. and save the exercise file with a unique name.25 Click File menu ➤ Close. or close the exercise file without saving changes. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Adding Structural Columns | 167 . click File menu ➤ Save As. Place columns at grid intersections 1 Enter ZF. 26 Proceed to the next exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. These columns extend from an elevation to a splice elevation just above Level 2. click Training Files. you load a new column type from the Revit Structure Library and add columns at each grid intersection. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Add_Columns.

Revit Structure places the tops of the columns at the current level and the bases of the columns at the level below. right-click in the Design Bar. 5 Select the entire grid by drawing a pick box around it. click Structural Column. select W-Wide Flange-Column: W10x33. NOTE If the Modelling tab of the Design Bar does not display.Level 2 plan view 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 168 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . NOTE When you use the Grid Intersection tool to place columns. click . 4 In the Options Bar. 6 On the Options Bar. 3 In the Type Selector. and click Modelling. click Finish.

14 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. H5. K1 G2. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). In addition.7 Press ESC. Notice the new level is named Level 3. 19 Adjust the zoom settings so you can select the grid control below the grid head. Under Constraints. K5 K3. 11 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. 16 Use the same method to create Level 4. 12 On the Design Bar. which are outside of the structure footprint. J5. click Modify. and click Select All Instances. and press DELETE. J2. enter 2' 0" for Top Offset. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ G1. NOTE If necessary. and then specify the endpoint aligned with the existing level heads on the right side. 17 On the Design Bar. specify a start point for the third level at a distance of 10' 0" above Level 2. Create new levels 13 In the Project Browser. there are a few extraneous columns on grid line intersections that are exterior to the structure. H1. 8 Select the columns listed below. A new structural plan view by the same name is also created and listed within the Project Browser. Click OK. 10 On the Options Bar. TIP You may have to zoom into the grid intersection to right-click one of the columns. Notice that columns are placed at each grid intersection. and double-click South Elevation. click Level. H2. K2 G5. enter 2' 0" for Base Offset. J1. Adjust location of the grid 18 Select grid head A. Level 3 should be 10' 0" above Level 2. K4 A5. you can adjust the height by clicking the temporary dimension and modifying the level elevation. Adding Structural Columns | 169 . C5 Specify base and top of column elevations 9 Right-click the column located at C2. B5. Level 4 should be 10' 0" above Level 3 with an elevation of 30' 0". 15 On the left side of the elevation. click Modify. click ■ ■ ■ .

click . 27 In the Select Levels dialog. and save the exercise file with a unique name. TIP Press and hold CTRL when making multiple selections. under Structural Plans. or close the exercise file without saving changes. click File menu ➤ Save As. 170 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . under Elevations (Building Elevation). and click OK. 26 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. select Level 3 and Level 4. 31 Proceed to the next exercise. 23 On the Options Bar. 28 On the Design Bar. select Structural Columns. 24 In the Filter dialog. click Check None. Adding Horizontal Framing on page 171. double-click South Elevation. All of the structural columns in the model remain selected. The next exercise uses a new training file. Spliced columns display from Ground Level to Level 4 30 Click File menu ➤ Close. double-click Level 2.20 Drag the grid control above Level 4 as shown. click Modify. 22 Draw a pick box around the entire structural model. 29 In the Project Browser. To save changes. and click OK. 25 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. Copy the columns to new levels 21 In the Project Browser.

Add girders 4 On the View toolbar. Specify beam type 1 In the Project Browser. select W-Wide Flange: W18x40.Adding Horizontal Framing In this exercise. 3 In the Type Selector. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click . click Finish. click Modify. under Structural Plans. you frame 4 bays of Level 2 by adding horizontal members and a steel deck. click Training Files. 5 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Specify Level 2 for Plane. 6 Select grid lines H and J. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 8 On the Design Bar.rvt. TIP Place the cursor over a grid to display the grid name in a tooltip. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Add_Framing. 7 On the Options Bar. Adding Horizontal Framing | 171 . and draw a zoom box around the east area of the structure. Specify Girder for Usage. Click Grid. click Beam. double-click Level 2.

12 Select a column center. and draw a girder from column to column. framing tag visibility was turned off and the beam visibility increased for training purposes. expand 3D Views. select Other.Perspective. Set top of steel 14 Right-click the girder between H3 and J3. 20 Click OK. 172 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . 18 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. for z-Direction Justification. framing the bays with girders. click Beam. NOTE In the following image. delete the 2 small beam sections between grid lines 4 and 5. select Level 3 and Level 4. Under Constraints. 15 On the Options Bar. and double-click East Section . 16 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. for z-Direction Offset Value. enter -0' 7". Click OK. 10 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Copy the girders to levels above 17 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. click ■ ■ ■ . 21 In the Project Browser. click Modify. 19 In the Select Levels dialog. and click Select All Instances.9 On grids H and J. 13 On the Design Bar. 11 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Specify Level 2 for Plane. Specify Girder for Usage.

rvt. select Center. click File menu ➤ Save As. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Adding Beam Systems on page 173. 7 Click OK. and save the exercise file with a unique name. enter -0' 7" for Elevation. click Structural Beam System Properties. 23 Proceed to the next exercise. click Sketch. For Justification. Notice the copied beams on Levels 3 and 4. under Structural Plans. 2 Zoom in on the east side of the structure where you previously added the beams. To save changes. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. you add beam systems to Level 2. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The next exercise uses a new training file. you can select the section crop view and drag its borders to adjust the extents of the view. or close the exercise file without saving changes. 4 On the Options Bar. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Add_Beam_System. double-click Level 2. click Beam System. 22 Click File menu ➤ Close. 5 On the Design Bar. Adding Beam Systems In this exercise. Under Pattern. click Training Files. For Spacing.NOTE If necessary. enter 6' 0". 6 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. select Fixed Distance for Layout Rule. select W-Wide Flange: W14x22. Sketch the beam system 1 In the Project Browser. For Beam Type. Adding Beam Systems | 173 .

click Beam Direction. 11 Select the vertical girder between J2 and J3.8 On the Design Bar. Then select the 3 girders that surround the upper-left bay. 9 Select the girder between H3 and J3. NOTE The 2 short lines adjacent to the H3-J3 girder represent the beam system direction. The longitudinal axis of the beam system members will be placed parallel to these lines. 10 On the Design Bar. 174 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . click Pick Supports. In the next step you edit the beam direction.

Adding Beam Systems | 175 .12 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. the framing tag visibility has been turned off for training purposes. NOTE In the image above and all subsequent images.

select the girder between J2 and J3. enter -0' 7" for Elevation. specify 2. 176 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . For Number of Lines. 14 When specifying the beam direction. Under Pattern. select W-Wide Flange: W14x22. For Beam Type. click Finish Sketch. select Fixed Number for Layout Rule. 15 On the Design Bar.13 Use the same method to sketch a beam system for the bay to the right using the following beam system property values in the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints.

For Beam Type. 23 Select the top girder in the lower-right bay. under Structural Plans. 19 On the Options Bar. 21 Select the top girder in the lower-left bay. Under Pattern. specify 3. select Fixed Number for Layout Rule. click Beam System. Click OK. Adding Beam Systems | 177 . select W-Wide Flange: W14x22. For Number of Lines. 22 Click to place the beam system. enter -0' 7" for Elevation. 20 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. click ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ .Automatically create a beam system 16 In the Project Browser. 17 Zoom in on the east side of the structure where you previously added the beams. double-click Level 2. 18 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

and press TAB until the beam system highlights. NOTE A beam system displays with dashed lines. click Modify.24 Click to place the beam system. Copy the beam systems to levels above 26 Hold the cursor over grid line H of the lower-left beam system. 25 On the Design Bar. You will need to cycle through some of the elements in your model by pressing TAB as explained above. Be sure that you have selected a beam system (not just a beam) when copying elements to other levels. 178 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model .

or close the exercise file without saving changes. The next exercise uses a new training file. Adding a Composite Deck on page 180. Adding Beam Systems | 179 . 33 Click File menu ➤ Close. 30 In the Select Levels dialog.Beam system displays with dashed lines 27 Right-click on the beam system. 29 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. 28 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. Notice the copied beam systems. and save the exercise file with a unique name. select Level 3 and Level 4. 34 Proceed to the next exercise.Perspective. and click Select All Instances. double-click East Sections . click File menu ➤ Save As. To save changes. under 3D Views. 32 In the Project Browser. 31 Click OK.

Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Slab. Add composite deck 1 In the Project Browser. Under Constraints. 8 On the Design Bar. 6 On the Design Bar. 180 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . you add a composite deck to Level 2. enter -0' 2" for Height Offset from Level. 7 Sketch lines along the structure perimeter using the interior-most model lines of the glazing as snap points. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Structural Plans. click Training Files. click Lines. click Finish Sketch. select 3" LW Concrete on 2" Metal Deck.Adding a Composite Deck In this exercise. and then sketch along the girders. click Floor Properties. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ For Type. 5 Click OK.rvt. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Add_Deck. 3 On the Design Bar. double-click Level 2.

Revit Structure provides a deck span direction symbol when the deck is placed. double-click East Section . Adding a Composite Deck | 181 . 12 In the dialog. 13 On the Design Bar. select Level 3 and Level 4. and click OK. Copy the slab to other levels 9 Select the slab. 15 Click File menu ➤ Close. 11 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name.Perspective. click Modify. 14 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. 10 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. The filled half-arrows of this symbol represent the span of the deck.

Use the Status Bar to see the snap point.To save changes. Adding Bracing on page 182. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. double-click Elevation 1-a. click to place the framing elevation symbol in the direction shown. 4 In the Project Browser. click Framing Elevation. Adding Bracing In this exercise. or close the exercise file without saving changes. 182 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . under Structural Plans. and when it highlights. 7 Add a brace from Level 2 to Level 3: ■ Enter SE (keyboard shortcut for snap to endpoint). click File menu ➤ Save As. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Add_Bracing. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Move the cursor on or near the grid line between 4H and 4J. click Brace. The next exercise uses a new training file. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. and save the exercise file with a unique name. double-click Level 2.rvt. select L-Angle: L8x6x5/8. 5 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Create the framing elevation 1 In the Project Browser. you add vertical bracing to a bay. and then click the left endpoint of the Level 2 beam for the start point. click Training Files. under Elevations (Interior Elevations). 6 In the Type Selector.

NOTE If necessary. you can select the section crop view and adjust the left/right extents to see the columns on grids H and J. 9 Repeat these steps to add bracing from Level 3 to Level 4. and then click the midpoint of the beam at Level 3 for the endpoint. 8 Use the same method for the opposite brace.■ Enter SM (keyboard shortcut for snap to midpoint). Adding Bracing | 183 .

rvt. click File menu ➤ Save As. 11 Click File menu ➤ Close. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Add_Shear_Walls. 2 Zoom in on the east stair in grid location F3-G4. under 3D Views. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. 184 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . In the left pane of the Open dialog. double-click Level 2. and save the exercise file with a unique name. Adding Shear Walls In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. under Structural Plans. Adding Shear Walls on page 184. or close the exercise file without saving changes.Perspective. click Training Files. double-click East Section . Notice the braces in the back/right of the structural model.10 In the Project Browser. To save changes. Add shear walls 1 In the Project Browser. you create shear walls that surround one of the stairwells. The next exercise uses a new training file.

4 In the Type Selector.3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. you can select a wall and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to nudge the wall to a particular location. TIP After sketching the walls. specify Ground Level. click Structural Wall. select Basic Wall: Exterior . For Depth. Adding Shear Walls | 185 . tracing over the centerline of the walls in the imported drawing file. 6 Sketch 4 walls.10" Concrete. 5 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Select Chain.

7 Press ESC twice to finish placing walls. Place isolated foundations 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. TIP During selection. you add isolated foundations to column locations. 8 Select all 4 walls. click . click File menu ➤ Save As. Adding Isolated Foundations on page 186. click Training Files. 9 On the Options Bar. under Structural Plans. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. The next exercise uses a new training file. and draw a zoom box around the east area of the structure. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 186 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . click . 4 On the Options Bar. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. 11 Click File menu ➤ Close. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Constraints. specify Up to level: Level 4 for Top Constraint.rvt. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Add_Foundation. 3 Draw a pick box around all structural elements. To save changes. Adding Isolated Foundations In this exercise. you can use the TAB key to highlight the entire wall chain and select it with one click. or close the exercise file without saving changes. double-click Level 2. and save the exercise file with a unique name. click . 2 On the View toolbar.

6 On the Options Bar. select Ground Level for Bottom Vertical Projection. 9 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click the midpoints of the columns where you have added horizontal framing to place an isolated footing at each location. click ■ ■ ■ ■ 7 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. the imported DWG file does not display in this view. click Modify. In your training file. under Structural Plans. Click OK. 8 In the Project Browser. NOTE In the following image. Adding Isolated Foundations | 187 . do the following: ■ ■ ■ Click Check None. . enter 0' 0" for Base Offset.5 In the Filter dialog. select Level 2 for Top Vertical Projection. select Footing-Rectangular: 72"x48"x18". Select Structural Columns. Under Analytical Model. click Foundation ➤ Isolated. the footing is placed at Ground Level. 12 On the Design Bar. double-click Ground Level. 10 In the Type Selector. Click OK. the curtain wall visibility was altered for training purposes. 11 In the drawing area. By default. Under Analytical Model.

and save the exercise file with a unique name. 14 Click File menu ➤ Close. as well as cantilevers and outriggers. Completing the Steel Framing of Level 2 In this exercise. or close the exercise file without saving changes. 3 In the Type Selector. you have added columns and horizontal framing to your model. select W-Wide Flange: W18x40. Completing the Structural Model on page 188. double-click Level 2. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. you complete the horizontal framing of Level 2 by adding girders and beam systems. openings. click Training Files. foundation. Add girders using the grid tool 1 In the Project Browser. The next exercise uses a new training file. Completing the Structural Model In previous lessons.13 In the Project Browser. 4 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Specify Level 2 for Plane. 188 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . adding horizontal framing. Click Grid.Perspective. under Structural Plans. and concrete wall framing. Specify Girder for Usage.rvt. click Beam. bracing. click File menu ➤ Save As. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you complete the structural model. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. double-click East Section . and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_2. In the exercises that follow. To save changes. under 3D Views.

NOTE Although you previously added girders to the structural model. click Modify. complete the framing of this bay. zooming in and out as needed: ■ Above grid line 1 between B and E. TIP You can also press CTRL and select all grid lines manually. Completing the Steel Framing of Level 2 | 189 . Add beam chains to the following locations. Use the W-Wide Flange: W18x40 beam type for the 5 new beams. . using the Grid tool does not duplicate girders at these locations. 5 Draw a pick box around all the grids. 6 On the Options Bar. and draw a zoom box around the upper-left corner of the 9 Using the framing skills you have learned in previous exercises. 10 Add girders between the perimeter columns that were not captured by the Grid tool. 7 On the Design Bar. ■ Around the perimeter of the rotunda. Manually add additional beams 8 On the View toolbar. click model. click Finish.

■ Between the column just above K4 and over to F5.■ Between the column below the midpoint of H2-H3 and the corner of the stairwell shear walls. ■ Between the lower-left corner between A4 and D5. 190 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model .

for z-Direction Justification. select Other. Completing the Steel Framing of Level 2 | 191 . Click OK. Select W-Wide Flange: W14x22 for Beam Type. . 17 On the Options Bar. for z-Direction Offset Value. 20 Click to place the beam system. click ■ ■ ■ . and click Select All Instances. and draw a zoom box around the bay in the upper-left corner 12 Select the girder between A2 and B2. click ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . Under Pattern. click of the model. 15 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. enter 3. Add a beam system to the bay 16 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 13 Right-click.Specify the top of steel 11 On the View toolbar. 14 On the Options Bar. enter -0' 7" for Elevation. 18 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. For Number of Lines. enter -0' 7". select the top girder. 19 In the bay adjacent to the upper-left stairwell. Click OK. click Beam System. select Fixed Number for Layout Rule. Under Constraints.

Under Pattern. 26 On the Sketch Design Bar. For Number of Lines. click ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . click Beam System. trace the outline of the bay. Select W-Wide Flange: W14x22 for Beam Type. 192 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . enter -0' 7" for Elevation. click Finish Sketch. 24 On the Options Bar. select Fixed Number for Layout Rule. Click OK. enter 3.Sketch a beam system 21 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 23 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. 22 On the Options Bar. 25 Using the sketch tool. click Sketch.

Completing the Steel Framing of Level 2 | 193 . 28 Click File menu ➤ Close. If a warning appears indicating that pinned objects were deleted.27 Select the beam that spans the middle of the stairwell and delete it. ignore it.

under Structural Plans. The visibility of structural framing tags has been turned off in the Level 2 plan view. the structural framing on Levels 3 and 4 (that you built in the first lesson of this tutorial) has been deleted for training purposes. Rather than having you add beam systems to the dozens of bays within this model. double-click Level 2. you add cantilevered members and outriggers to Level 2. Lastly. Adding Cantilevered Beams In this exercise. beam systems have been added to all bays. a new training file is provided in the next exercise with the beam systems added as shown. . 2 On the View toolbar. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. In addition. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding Cantilevered Beams on page 194. and draw a zoom box around the upper-left corner of the 194 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model .NOTE You can save the open file if you wish. the base offset of the structural columns on the lower level has been set to zero so they will attach to the footings. click model. click Training Files. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_3. Add cantilevered members and outriggers 1 In the Project Browser. In this new training file.

click Beam. Add cantilevers at columns 6 Select column A1 as the beam start point. 5 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. for z-Direction Justification. for z-Direction Offset Value. Under Constraints. click ■ ■ ■ . 7 Move the cursor to the left and select a perpendicular point on the inside face of the exterior glazing as the endpoint. 4 On the Options Bar. Adding Cantilevered Beams | 195 . Click OK. select Other.3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. enter -0' 7".

The next exercise uses a new training file. 12 Select the left endpoint of the adjacent cantilever at A2 as the endpoint of the outrigger. add a cantilever beginning at column A2. 11 Select the left endpoint of the cantilever at A1 as start point of the outrigger. To save changes. click File menu ➤ Save As. you add a concrete slab with a metal deck to the model. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. 14 Click File menu ➤ Close. 196 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . Adding a Concrete Slab with Metal Deck on page 196. click Beam.8 Using the same method. Training File ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Adding a Concrete Slab with Metal Deck In this exercise. 10 In the Type Selector. Add intermediate cantilevers 13 Sketch intermediate beams between the outrigger and the beam between A1 and A2. Add an outrigger 9 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and save the exercise file with a unique name. or close the exercise file without saving changes. select W-Wide Flange: W18x40.

6 Sketch lines along the structure perimeter using the interior lines of the glazing as snap points. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_4. enter -0' 2". select 3" LW Concrete on 2" Metal Deck.rvt. straight. In this training file. click Lines. 5 On the Design Bar. the following new levels were added: 5.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Floor Type. click Slab. In addition. and arced. The pre-existing columns were paste-aligned to the roof level. Garage Level-1. you can use a combination of lines including. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Click OK. For Height Offset from Level. under Structural Plans. Add concrete slab with metal deck 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 2. sketched. click Training Files. Roof. picked. click Floor Properties. Adding a Concrete Slab with Metal Deck | 197 . 3 On the Design Bar. 7. When sketching this deck. Use Trim/Extend to clean up line intersections and close gaps. 6. additional cantilever beams and outriggers were added to the model. and Foundation.

10 Click File menu ➤ Close. 8 On the View toolbar. The next exercise uses a new training file. 9 Enter SD (keyboard shortcut for Shading with Edges). 198 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . and sketch a chain of continuous line segments. click File menu ➤ Save As. select Chain on the Options Bar.TIP To sketch lines along the lower arced wall. 7 Click Finish Sketch. and save the exercise file with a unique name. click . or close the exercise file without saving changes. To save changes.

11 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding Shafts on page 199.

Adding Shafts
In this exercise, you add 2 shaft openings on Level 2. Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Adding_Shafts.rvt.

Add first stairway shaft opening 1 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Level 2. NOTE Make sure this view is using the Wireframe model graphics display style. If it is not, use the View Control Bar to make the change. 2 Enter WF (keyboard shortcut for Wireframe). 3 Zoom around the stairway in grid location F3-G4. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Opening ➤ Shaft Opening. 5 On the Design Bar, click Pick Walls. 6 Select the 4 walls surrounding the stairwell.

7 On the Design Bar, click Properties. 8 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, do the following:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Top Constraint, select Up to level: Roof. For Base Constraint, select Foundation. For Top Offset, enter -1' 0". For Base Offset, enter -1' 0". Click OK.

Adding Shafts | 199

These settings ensure that the shaft extends through the structure without penetrating the roof or the foundation. 9 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. Add second stairway shaft opening 10 Zoom around the stairway in grid location A1-B2. 11 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Opening ➤ Shaft Opening. 12 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 13 Sketch the opening surrounding the stairwell.

TIP When sketching the shaft, use the Lines tool in combination with the Pick option and select the external face of the walls imported with the DWG file. Use the Trim tool to clean up gaps and intersections. 14 On the Design Bar, click Properties. 15 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, do the following:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Top Constraint, select Up to level: Roof. For Base Constraint, select Foundation. For Top Offset, enter 1' 0". For Base Offset, enter 1' 0". Click OK.

16 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 17 On the View toolbar, click .

200 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model

18 Click File menu ➤ Close. To save changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name, or close the exercise file without saving changes. The next exercise uses a new training file. 19 Proceed to the next exercise, Duplicating Framing on page 201.

Duplicating Framing
In this exercise, you copy Level 2 framing to other levels. Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Duplicate_Framing.rvt.

Copy Level 2 framing and deck 1 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Level 2. 2 Enter ZF, and draw a pick box around the entire model. 3 On the Options Bar, click .

4 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Structural Framing (Girder, Joist, and Other), Structural Beam Systems, and Floors, and then click OK. 5 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 6 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. 7 In the Select Levels dialog, select Level 3, Level 4, and Level 5, and then click OK.

Duplicating Framing | 201

8 On the View toolbar, click
Copied levels with stair openings

.

Modify roof and framing 9 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Level 5. 10 Select the floor. 11 On the Options Bar, click Edit. 12 Delete the atrium arc, and use the Trim tool to close the gap.

NOTE In the image shown above, the weight of the sketch lines was increased for training purposes.

202 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model

13 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 14 On the View toolbar, click 15 Select all framing and columns. NOTE Press and hold CTRL as you make multiple selections. , and draw a zoom box around the former atrium area.

16 Press DELETE. Ignore the warning that pinned objects were deleted. Add cantilever beams and outriggers 17 Zoom in on the former atrium area.

18 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Beam. 19 On the Type Selector, select W-Wide Flange: W18x40. 20 On the Options Bar, specify Girder for Usage. 21 On the Options Bar, click .

Duplicating Framing | 203

22 In the Element Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

Under Constraints, for z-Direction Justification, select Other. Under Constraints, for z-Direction Offset Value, enter -0' 7". Click OK.

23 Add cantilever beams and outriggers to complete the new corner.

Extend the shaft to roof level 24 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Level 2. 25 Zoom around the stairway in grid location F3-G4. 26 Select the 4 walls surrounding the stairwell.

27 On the Options Bar, click
■ ■

.

28 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, do the following: For Top Constraint, select Up to level: Roof. Click OK.

Copy roof framing and slab to Level 6 and 7 29 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Level 5. 30 Zoom out until you can see the entire model within the drawing area. 31 Draw a pick box around the entire model. 32 On the Options Bar, click .

204 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model

33 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Structural Framing (Girder, Joist, and Other), Structural Beam Systems, and Floors, and then click OK. 34 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 35 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. 36 In the Select Levels dialog, select Level 6, and Level 7, and click OK. 37 On the View toolbar, click .

Notice the atrium columns on Levels 5 through 7 need to be deleted. This is done for you in the next training file. 38 Click File menu ➤ Close. To save changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name, or close the exercise file without saving changes. The next exercise uses a new training file. 39 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding a Shape-Modified Slab on page 205.

Adding a Shape-Modified Slab
In this new training file, beam systems have been added to the roof level to support a new shape-modified slab, and the footings added at the beginning of the tutorial have been deleted. In this exercise, you add a shape-modified slab to the new roof framing, and create a custom roof type with tapered insulation. In this exercise, you create a shape-modified slab above Level 7. Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_5.rvt.

Adding a Shape-Modified Slab | 205

Open the roof framing section view 1 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Roof. 2 Double-click the section bubble located near grid line D to open the section view of the roof.

Notice the structural framing is sloped to provide for roof drainage. Create new roof type 3 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Roof. 4 On the View toolbar, click , and draw a zoom box around the upper roof framing.

206 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model

5 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Slab. 6 On the Design Bar, click Floor Properties. 7 In the Element Properties dialog, for Type, select 1 1/2" Metal Roof Deck - Tapered Insulation, and click Edit/New. 8 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 9 In the Name dialog, enter 1 1/2" Metal Roof Deck - 4" Rigid Insulation, and click OK. 10 In the Type Properties dialog, under Construction, for Structure, click Edit. 11 In the Edit Assembly dialog, for Layer 2, clear Variable, and click OK twice. 12 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, for Height Offset From Level, enter 3' 5 1/2", and click OK. Trace the outline of the roof

13 On the View toolbar, click structure. 14 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 15 On the Options Bar, click

, and draw a zoom box around the upper-left corner of the

, and enter 5" for Offset.

16 Click the beam on the upper-left corner of the structure so the offset is placed on the outside of the beam.

17 Enter ZF. 18 Using the same method, click additional lines that outline the roof.

Adding a Shape-Modified Slab | 207

19 On the Toolbar, click

(Trim).

20 With the Trim/Extend tool selected, click one of the sketched lines, and then click each additional line to complete the roof outline.

Each line will be extended and trimmed as it is selected. 21 On the Design bar, click Finish Sketch.

208 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model

22 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click 3D - Atrium.

Edit the slab 23 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Roof. 24 Select the slab, and on the Options Bar, click Edit. 25 On the Design Bar, click Pick Supports. 26 Select specific supports.

27 On the Toolbar, click

.

Adding a Shape-Modified Slab | 209

28 With the Trim/Extend tool selected, click one of the sketched lines, and then click each additional line to complete the outline of the shape-modified slab.

Each line will be extended and trimmed as it is selected. 29 On the Design bar, click Finish Sketch. 30 Double-click the section bubble located near grid line D to open the section view of the roof.

Notice the opening in the shape-modified slab. 31 On the View toolbar, click section view. , and draw a zoom box around the upper-left corner of the

Notice the slab is not sloped towards the opening in the center of the slab. Pick supports for modifying the slope of the roof slab 32 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Roof. 33 Select the slab, and on the Options Bar, click (Modify Sub-Elements).

210 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model

The corner points of the slab are highlighted.

34 On the Options Bar, click

(Pick Supports).

35 Click each of the 6 roof supports shown below in the order indicated.

NOTE The Pick Supports tool will create an elevation control point at the end of each of the 6 selected support location lines. 36 On the Design bar, click Modify. 37 Double-click the section bubble located near grid line D to open the section view of the roof. 38 On the View toolbar, click , and draw a zoom box around the center of the section view.

Adding a Shape-Modified Slab | 211

Notice the roof deck is now resting on the roof supports. 39 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Roof. 40 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Slab. 41 On the Design Bar, click Floor Properties. 42 In the Element Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

For type, select 1 1/2" Metal Roof Deck - Tapered Insul Under Constraints, for Height Offset From Level, enter 2' 9 1/2". Click OK.

43 On the Design Bar, click Pick Supports. 44 Select specific supports.

45 On the Toolbar, click

.

46 With the Trim/Extend tool selected, click each line to complete the outline of the shape-modified slab.

212 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model

Each line will be extended and trimmed as it is selected.

47 On the Design bar, click Finish Sketch. 48 Double-click the section bubble located near grid line D to open the section view of the roof. 49 On the View toolbar, click , and draw a zoom box around the center of the section view.

Notice the flat portion of the roof is now covered by the slab. Draw split line to slope the variable layer 50 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Roof. 51 On the View toolbar, click , and draw a zoom box around the center of the roof.

52 Select the roof (that was just created) as shown.

Adding a Shape-Modified Slab | 213

Press TAB to make sure the interior roof boundary is selected. 53 On the Options Bar, click (Draw Split Lines).

The corner points of the opening are displayed.

54 Sketch a split line.

55 Press ESC. 56 Select the split line that was just created. 57 On the Options Bar, enter 5" for Elevation. 58 Press ENTER.

214 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model

Notice the tapered insulation tapers away from the split line support. 62 On the View toolbar. click Modify. 61 Double-click the section bubble located near grid line D to open the section view of the roof. 60 Enter ZF. 64 Select the existing flat roof to the left of the tapered roof. click (Join Geometry). click Modify. 65 Select the tapered roof. and on the Design Bar. and draw a zoom box around the center of the section view.59 On the Design Bar. click . Join the geometry of the roof types 63 On the Toolbar. Adding a Shape-Modified Slab | 215 .

Adding a Shape-Modified Curved Slab In this exercise.66 In the Project Browser. 68 Proceed to the next exercise. double-click Level 5. using the slab shape edit tools. click Training Files. double-click 3D . you add a shape-modified slab to the curved roof of the atrium. click . click File menu ➤ Save As. The next exercise uses a new training file. To save changes. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 67 Click File menu ➤ Close. under Structural Plans. 2 On the View toolbar. 216 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . and draw a zoom box around the atrium roof framing.rvt. Adding a Shape-Modified Curved Slab on page 216. under 3D Views. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and save the exercise file with a unique name. or close the exercise file without saving changes.Atrium. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Curved_Slab. Open the plan view 1 In the Project Browser.

Notice that the shape edit tools display on the Options Bar. 4 On the Options Bar. click (Modify Sub-Elements). click (Draw Split Lines). Sketch split lines 5 On the Options Bar. and is available for modification. 6 Click the center point of the slab arc. Adding a Shape-Modified Curved Slab | 217 . The edge of the curved slab highlights.3 Select the atrium curved slab.

9 Click to place a drainage point approximately along the split line. 218 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . Place a single drainage point 8 On the Options Bar.7 Sketch a single split line to approximately the edge of the slab. click (Add New Points).

click Modify.Place additional points 10 Click to place six additional points approximately along the edge of the slab. 12 Select the curved slab. Adding a Shape-Modified Curved Slab | 219 . 11 On the Design Bar. Notice that the shape edit points display. Delete split lines 13 On the Options Bar. 14 Select the split lines. click . and press DELETE.

Notice that the edges of the curved slab display. under 3D Views. and draw a zoom box around the atrium roof.Set drainage point elevation 15 Click the drainage point elevation dimension.Atrium. and enter -0’ 6”. 220 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . The general shape of the curved slab displays. click . View the atrium slab in 3D 16 In the Project Browser. 17 On the View toolbar. double-click 3D .

double-click Level 5. click section view. 25 In the Element Properties dialog.Atrium. double-click Section 3. 19 On the View toolbar. click OK. Set the curved edge condition 20 In the Project Browser.View section view of slab 18 In the Project Browser. for Curved Edge Condition. . click Conform to Curve. click Project to side. 21 Select the slab. under 3D Views. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. click . under Structural Plans. 24 In the Curved Edge Condition dialog. Complete the slab geometry 26 In the Project Browser. under Sections (Building Sections). double-click 3D . and click OK. 22 On the Options Bar. under Slab Shape Edit. Adding a Shape-Modified Curved Slab | 221 . and draw a zoom box around the upper-right corner of the Notice that the tapered insulation layer of the curved slab is sloped towards the drainage point.

enter SX. and select the left endpoint of the curved slab. 29 Click the center drainage point. click 28 On the Options Bar. 30 Click the center drainage point. 222 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . .27 On the Options Bar. click . and select the right endpoint of the curved slab. enter SX (Snap to Point).

under 3D Views. 34 Select the atrium curved slab. Adding a Shape-Modified Curved Slab | 223 . 35 On the Options Bar. double-click 3D . 32 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 5.31 On the Design Bar.Atrium. under Structural Plans. click . click Modify. 36 Select each point along the slab edge and verify that the spot elevation is set to 0' 0". Verify the slab spot elevation 33 In the Project Browser.

2 Select the slab. you add miter joins to the beams on the roof frame to create a flush connection. click Training Files. . To save changes. double-click 3D . under 3D Views. click File menu ➤ Save As. 224 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . 38 On the View toolbar.View the completed slab section 37 In the Project Browser. and save the exercise file with a unique name. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Miter_Joins. 39 Click File menu ➤ Close. double-click Section 3. click section view. The next exercise uses a new training file. or close the exercise file without saving changes. Adding Miter Joins on page 224.View.rvt. under Sections (Building Sections). In the left pane of the Open dialog. and draw a zoom box around the upper-right corner of the Notice the tapered insulation layer slopes to the low point as a planar surface. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Adding Miter Joins In this exercise. 40 Proceed to the next exercise. View the roof frame 1 In the Project Browser.

and draw a zoom box around the corner of the roof frame. You can now use the Beam Join Editor. click . 4 On the View toolbar. click (Edit Beam Joins). 6 On the Options Bar. The slab is now hidden. Only non-concrete beams with shared end joins are available for edit. select Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element.3 On the View Control Bar. Add the miter join 5 Click the beam on the west side of the roof frame. Adding Miter Joins | 225 .

8 Click the arrow control on the second beam. 226 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model .7 Click the arrow control on the first beam.

The miter join is complete. 9 Click the padlock icon to lock the miter join. The miter lock is used to lock geometry but allows symbolic manipulation (in Coarse View). Adding Miter Joins | 227 .

select Detail Level: Fine. 228 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . 11 Click the arrow on the beam symbolic line. Notice the symbolic line is no longer joined. 12 On the View Control Bar.View the miter join in coarse view 10 On the View Control Bar. Notice the miter lock remains locked. select Detail Level: Coarse.

you add a curved beam to the atrium.Notice the miter lock remains locked. Adding Curved Beams | 229 .rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Curved_Beams. Zoom in on the atrium 1 In the Project Browser. Adding Curved Beams on page 229. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. 13 On the Design Bar. click Training Files. To save changes. The next exercise uses a new training file. click File menu ➤ Save As. click Modify. 2 On the View toolbar. Adding Curved Beams In this exercise. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 14 Click File menu ➤ Close. double-click Level 4. and draw a zoom box around the atrium. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Structural Plans. click . or close the exercise file without saving changes.

click Beam.Place the curved beams 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 5 On the Options Bar. 6 Click the atrium column to select the beam start point. 4 In the Type Selector. select Chain. select W-Wide Flange: W14 X 22. 7 Click the column to select the beam endpoint. 230 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . and click .

Adding Curved Beams | 231 .8 Click the grid line so the beam snaps to the grid.

click . 10 Using the same method. Set the curved beam properties 11 Select one of the curved beams. place additional curved beams between the atrium columns. select the remaining curved beams. 232 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . 12 While pressing CTRL. 13 On the Options Bar. 9 Press ESC twice.The beam is placed.

and for Vertical Projection. enter -0' 7" for Start Level Offset Under Constraints. For Beam Type. select Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element. For Maximum Spacing. 22 Select the bottom beam.14 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. under Structural Plans.Atrium. View the analytical model of the curved beams 15 In the Project Browser. For Elevation. Adding Curved Beams | 233 . enter 6' 0". select W-Wide Flange: W14 X 22. Scroll down to Analytical Model. Click OK. select 3D. 17 Click or drag the ViewCube to rotate the view so the curved beams are visible. click ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . click Beam System. Under Pattern. select Top of Beam. for Layout Rule. 21 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. and on the View Control Bar. select Top. 19 On the Modelling Tab of the Design Bar. Add a beam system to the atrium 18 In the Project Browser. select Maximum Spacing. double-click Level 4. 16 Select the floor. 20 On the Options Bar. enter 0' 0". double-click 3D . enter -0' 7" for End Level Offset For z-Direction Justification. Click OK. Notice the orange lines representing the curved beam analytical model are placed at the top of beam. under Structural Plans.

234 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . 23 Using the same method.The beam system is placed. place a beam system in the remaining bays of the atrium.

25 Select the beam. and on the Options Bar.Approximate the curve of the analytical model 24 On the View toolbar. the analytical model will end at points on the curve where other framing members are joined. click . Adding Curved Beams | 235 . double-click 3D . and draw a zoom box around one of the curved beams. select Approximate Curve. For Maximum discretized offset. click 26 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Analytical Model. under Structural Plans. NOTE When hard-points are enabled. Additional line segments will be added to satisfy the Maximum Discretized Offset parameter. Click OK. 27 In the Project Browser. 28 Select the floor. . Select Use hard-points.Atrium. and on the View Control Bar. select Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element. enter 0' 4".

click . and draw a zoom box around the stairway. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. Adding an Opening on page 236. or close the exercise file without saving changes. double-click Ground Level. Notice the analytical line of the curved beam is represented by segments instead of a single curved line.29 Click or drag the ViewCube to rotate the view so the curved beams are visible. 31 Proceed to the next exercise. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 30 Click File menu ➤ Close. you then copy the opening to each level. you add an opening (doorway) to the structural walls of the stairway. Adding an Opening In this exercise. 236 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 On the View toolbar. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Add_Openings. under Structural Plans. click Training Files. 1 In the Project Browser. To save changes. click File menu ➤ Save As. The next exercise uses a new training file.

Adding an Opening | 237 . 4 Click stairway wall to place the door opening approximately as shown. 5 On the Design Bar. click Modify. click Door.3 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar. 6 Select the door opening.

select 3D View. 9 In the Select Levels dialog.. click stairway. so that levels 2-7 are highlighted. 11 Click OK. 13 Click or drag the ViewCube to rotate the view so the stairway is visible. and draw a zoom box around the opening created in the 238 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . 7 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. select Level 2. 10 While pressing SHIFT. under 3D Views. 14 On the View toolbar. select Level 7. 12 In the Project Browser. . 8 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name.

Adding an Opening in a Beam | 239 . click Training Files. or close the exercise file without saving changes. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click . under Structural Plans. click Opening ➤ Opening by Face. and save the exercise file with a unique name. click File menu ➤ Save As. 2 On the View toolbar. 4 Select the beam that requires the opening.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The next exercise uses a new training file. Adding an Opening in a Beam In this exercise. Add an opening (by face) to a single beam 1 In the Project Browser. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Add_Opening_in_Beam. You then add an opening to selected beams by creating an extrusion in the beam family. Finally.15 Click File menu ➤ Close. Adding an Opening in a Beam on page 239. and draw a zoom box around any beam on an upper floor. expand 3D Views. you add an opening to the face of a single beam and add stiffener plates to the beam opening. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and double-click 3D View. you import the revised beam back into the project. To save changes.

click Finish Sketch.Press TAB to make sure you are selecting the beam and not the floor or beam system. draw a stiffener plate on both horizontal surfaces of the opening. 240 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . click Modify. select Linear Stiffener-Plate: Standard. Add stiffener plates to the opening 7 On the Modelling Tab of the Design Bar. click Component. 10 On the Design Bar. draw an opening in the beam approximately as shown. 9 Using the sketch tool. Make sure the opening forms a closed loop. 6 On the Design Bar. 5 Using the sketch tools. 8 In the Type Selector.

The next exercise uses a new training file. under Structural Plans. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click ■ ■ . for d. or close the exercise file without saving changes. To save changes. and draw a zoom box around any beam on a lower floor. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you load the new family into the project. and double-click 3D View. 2 On the View toolbar. 12 On the Options Bar. click File menu ➤ Save As. enter 0' 2". 14 Click File menu ➤ Close. Adding an Opening to a Beam Family In this exercise. and save the exercise file with a unique name. click Training Files.rvt. Select the beam 1 In the Project Browser. select both stiffener plates. Finally. Adding an Opening to a Beam Family | 241 . Adding an Opening to a Beam Family on page 241. You then modify the beam by adding an opening. expand 3D Views. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Add_Opening_in_Beam. 13 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Dimensions.Change the stiffener plate properties 11 While pressing CTRL. 15 Continue with the next exercise. Click OK. click . you open an existing beam family using the Family Editor.

12 Click the centerline of the beam. 9 In the Work Plane dialog. 5 In the Revit dialog. 7 On the View toolbar. click Edit Family. click . expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations (Elevation 1). 242 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . 8 On the Family Design Bar. and double-click Front. and draw a zoom box around the center line of the beam. Open the beam family 4 On the Options Bar. and click (Circle). 10 Click OK 11 On the Options Bar.3 Select the beam. The beam is displayed in a new window. and select Reference Plane: Center (Front/Back). click Yes to open the W-Wide Flange beam type for editing. click Name. 14 On the Family Design Bar. click Modify. click located to the left of Offset. 13 Press ESC. The Front elevation of the beam is displayed. click Void Form ➤ Void Extrusion. and draw a circle approximately as shown. under Specify a New Work Plane. Add an opening by extrusion 6 In the Family Project Browser.

23 Click the lock to lock the reference plane to the centerline of the circle. 24 On the Design Bar. 20 Press ESC. regardless of the length. 18 Select the vertical centerline reference plane. 17 On the Options Bar. and on the Options Bar. 19 Click the lock to lock the reference plane to the centerline of the circle. click Finish Sketch. and click OK. Adding an Opening to a Beam Family | 243 . click . and the select the centerline of the circle. 21 On the Options Bar. click (Align). click The centerline of the circle is now visible. 25 On the View toolbar. 22 Select the horizontal centerline reference plane. 16 In the Element Properties dialog. click (Align). NOTE Aligning and locking the centerline of the circle to the reference plane ensures the circle will remain in the center of the beam.15 Select the circle. select the Center Mark Visible parameter. . and select the centerline of the circle.

and slide the cylinder to the right so the extrusion passes through the beam. The extrusion is displayed as a cylinder. 30 Navigate to a folder of your preference. 29 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 27 On the View Control toolbar.rfa. Extrude the opening 28 Click the right directional arrow. 244 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . select Model Graphic Style: Shading w/Edges.26 Select the circle on the beam. and save the revised beam family file as W-Wide Flange with Opening.

and draw a zoom box around the beams for the lower floors.rvt located in the Imperial project file. The project file reopens. 34 On the View toolbar. Select the new beam family 37 In the Type Selector. Adding an Opening to a Beam Family | 245 . select the beams for Levels 2 through 4. click . 38 Click in the drawing area. 33 Enter ZF.rfa. click Load into Projects. 32 In the Load into Projects dialog. 35 Click on the lowest beam located on the corner of Level 2. 36 While pressing CTRL. select the modified beam type W-Wide Flange with Opening: W18X40. and click OK.Load the modified beam family into the project 31 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. select i_RST_CSM_Add_Opening_in_Beam.

246 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . The next exercise uses a new training file. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. the atrium columns on Levels 6 and 7 have been deleted. click Training Files. 40 Continue with the next exercise. or close the exercise file without saving changes. To save changes. In addition. Adding Foundation Walls In this exercise. You add these walls using the Ground Level view. Adding Foundation Walls on page 246. click File menu ➤ Save As. and walls are generated downward to the foundation. In this new training file.The modified beams with openings display. 39 Click File menu ➤ Close. and save the exercise file with a unique name.rvt. a roof with tapered insulation has been added over Level 7. you add structural walls. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_6.

enter -0' 6". For Top Offset. select Wall Centerline. 5 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. 4 On the Options Bar. Adding Foundation Walls | 247 . The imported DWG file was copied and paste-aligned to this level for you. under Structural Plans. double-click Ground Level. select Foundation. For Base Constraint. click Structural Wall. click ■ ■ ■ ■ .Sketch the atrium walls 1 In the Project Browser. select Basic Wall: Foundation . for Location Line. 6 On the Options Bar. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 3 In the Type Selector. click 7 Click the arc line of the imported DWG file. Click OK. .12" Concrete.

and select Chain. under 3D Views. On portions of the south wall. 13 Click File menu ➤ Close. click .A foundation wall is added and aligned with the wall centerline. 11 In the Project Browser. you can use an arc or a chain of small wall segments. 248 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . Sketch the remaining foundation walls 8 On the Options Bar. 9 Use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to add foundation walls to the remaining perimeter of the model. 10 Press ESC twice to finish the wall sketch. double-click 3D View. Use the center of the curtain wall lines in the DWG file as an underlay to trace over. 12 Click or drag the ViewCube to rotate the view so the foundation wall is visible.

press TAB. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Piers. click Modify. you will still need to manually add piers to the locations that are not on a grid line. In addition. double-click 3D View. 14 Proceed to the next exercise. select Foundation for Depth. TIP You can use the Grid Intersection tool to speed up this process. add a concrete column centered on each steel column location. If you select all the grid lines and add columns to all intersections. Concrete pier centered on steel column 6 On the Design Bar. and click Hide Element. such as the atrium. Adding Piers or Pilasters | 249 . and select the foundation wall chain. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Adding Piers or Pilasters In this exercise.rvt. 7 In the Project Browser. double-click Ground Level. or close the exercise file without saving changes. 9 On the View Control Bar. click File menu ➤ Save As. 8 Place the cursor over one of the foundation walls. 3 In the Type Selector. select Concrete-Square-Column: 18x18. make sure you delete the columns outside the structure perimeter. click Structural Column. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Add concrete piers 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. under Structural Plans. 4 In the Options Bar. 5 Within the perimeter of the structure model. under 3D Views. and save the exercise file with a unique name. click the Temporary Hide/Isolate control. Adding Piers or Pilasters on page 249. you add piers or pilasters and concrete columns at each steel column location. The next exercise uses a new training file.To save changes. click Training Files.

and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_7. 5 On the Design Bar. sloped slabs. Click OK. click Floor Properties. Framing Ground and Parking Garage Levels on page 250. click Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. 11 Click File menu ➤ Close. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. The next exercise uses a new training file. under Structural Plans. double-click Ground Level. For Height Offset From Level. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. To save changes. or close the exercise file without saving changes. click Slab. 3 On the Design Bar. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. enter 0. 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Type. click Training Files. Framing Ground and Parking Garage Levels In this exercise.rvt Frame ground and parking levels 1 In the Project Browser. click Pick Walls. and save the exercise file with a unique name. and concrete beam framing.This provides a better view of the new below-grade piers. 10 On the View Control Bar. 250 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . In the left pane of the Open dialog. select 6" Concrete. you frame the garage and ground levels by adding slabs. click File menu ➤ Save As. The foundation wall is displayed.

NOTE When prompted whether you would like the walls that go up to this floor’s level to attach to its bottom. under 3D Views. click Delete Type. 7 Click Finish Sketch. 9 Click or drag the ViewCube to rotate the view so the slab is visible.6 Select the exterior face of the foundation walls. 8 In the Project Browser. If necessary. Framing Ground and Parking Garage Levels | 251 . use the flip controls to toggle to the exterior face. click Yes. double-click 3D View. WARNING If an error dialog displays regarding the span direction component. TIP Press TAB to select the wall chain.

This prevents a beam being added between the atrium at G1 and G3. It will display as selected in the drawing area. double-click Ground Level. click Grid. Resolve the problem by clicking the appropriate solution. NOTE If you are warned of a problem with keeping elements joined. 12 In the Type Selector. click Beam. expand the warning and select the framing element. 13 On the Options Bar. 252 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . click Finish. select the line.Frame concrete girders 10 In the Project Browser. 11 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 19 Manually delete the beams placed between grid F2 and G2. 15 Remove grid line G from the selection: while pressing SHIFT. 17 Manually add a beam between G3 and G4. under Structural Plans. 16 On the Options Bar. It is most likely a segment that can be deleted or unjoined. click Modify. select Concrete-Rectangular Beam:16x32. 18 Manually delete the beams added to the atrium. and another between G4 and G5. 20 On the Design Bar. 14 Select all grid lines.

NOTE The foundation walls have been hidden in this view so the girders are visible. 23 In the Filter dialog. 29 On the Design Bar. click . Framing Ground and Parking Garage Levels | 253 . 24 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 25 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. select Garage Level -1. and click OK. 22 On the Options Bar. double-click 3D View. Joist. select Structural Framing (Girder.Copy the framing and slab to Garage Level -1 21 Drag a pick box around the entire model. 26 In the Select Levels dialog. Other) and Floors. and then click OK. under 3D Views. 28 Click or drag the ViewCube to rotate the view so the concrete girders are visible. click Check None. click Modify. 27 In the Project Browser.

and select Element Properties. 32 Zoom in around the lower-left corner of the model. click Slope Arrow. double-click South Elevation. click Lines. double-click Garage Level -1. click Finish Sketch. 254 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . 38 Right-click the slope arrow. click the Model Graphics Style control. enter 0. enter 0' 6". 41 In the Project Browser. click Slab. For Height Offset at Head. For Level at Head. under Elevations (Building Elevation). 37 Sketch a slope arrow from left to right. and click Hidden Line. 39 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. and click Hidden Line. under Structural Plans. For Height Offset at Tail.Add the garage entrance exit ramp 30 In the Project Browser. 31 On the View Control Bar. 34 On the Design Bar. 40 On the Design Bar. select Ground Level for Level at Tail. Click OK. select Garage Level-1. 43 Zoom in on the lower-left corner to see the ramp. 42 On the View Control Bar. 36 On the Design Bar. 35 Sketch the slab in the southwest exterior corner of the structure. click the Model Graphics Style control. 33 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

select Pick a plane. under Specify a new Work Plane. Under Pattern. 49 Select the underside face of the existing ramp. click Set Work Plane. enter 5. and draw a zoom box around the ramp.Completed ramp Add a sloped beam system under the ramp 44 In the Project Browser. 46 On the Modelling Tab of the Design Bar. click 54 On the Design Bar. 48 In the Work Plane dialog. click . Framing Ground and Parking Garage Levels | 255 . and click OK. Click OK. For Value. 55 Draw an outline of the ramp. 50 On the Design Bar. under Structural Views. . under 3D Views. double-click 3D View. 52 In the Project Browser. under Number of Lines. 51 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Beam Type. select Concrete-Rectangular Beam: 16 X 32. select Structural Beam System Properties. 47 On the Design Bar. select Ground Level. and zoom in on the ramp. select Fixed Number for Layout Rule Value. click Lines. 45 On the View toolbar. 53 On the View toolbar. click Beam System.

double-click 3D View. You can immediately draw the rectangular opening. 62 Sketch the opening. and zoom in on the wall that faces the end of the new ramp. click Opening ➤ Wall Opening. 61 Select the foundation wall that faces the short edge of the new ramp. 256 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . 58 On the View toolbar. corner to corner. there are no drawing tools to select. under 3D Views. Add a wall opening at the garage entrance 59 On the View toolbar. 57 In the Project Browser.56 On the Design Bar. NOTE Ignore the warning regarding the analytical point of the beam and slab. When you are adding a wall opening. click Finish Sketch. click . and zoom in on the ramp. click . 60 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

Placing a Wall Foundation | 257 . In this case. click Unjoin Elements. you may get a warning message that elements cannot remain joined. and continue with the next step. To save changes. The next exercise uses a new training file. Placing a Wall Foundation on page 257. 66 Proceed to the final exercise. click Modify. and save the exercise file with a unique name. click File menu ➤ Save As. or close the exercise file without saving changes. 64 Select the garage opening.NOTE Depending on where you draw the opening. Notice that you can adjust the opening extents using the controls. 65 Click File menu ➤ Close. 63 On the Design Bar. you add a continuous foundation beneath the exterior walls of the structural model. In addition. you add an isolated foundation beneath the piers. Placing a Wall Foundation In this exercise.

select Footing-Rectangular: 72"x48"x18". 2 Enter ZF. 4 Place the cursor over one of the foundation walls. 7 On the Options Bar. click 9 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ . enter 1' 6". for Toe length. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Wall_Foundation. Place isolated foundation 10 On the View menu. enter 1' 6". click Training Files. Click OK twice. 13 In the Type Selector. 258 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . 12 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. For Foundation Thickness. click Visibility/Graphics.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. double-click Foundation. A continuous foundation is added. click Foundation ➤ Wall. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click to select the foundation wall chain. click Edit/New. under Visibility. Sketch the continuous foundation 1 In the Project Browser. press TAB until the chain of walls is highlighted. 14 Click the midpoint of each of the concrete columns to place an isolated foundation at each location. For Heel length. 5 On the Design Bar. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Under Dimensions.rvt. click Modify. clear Structural Framing. click Foundation ➤ Isolated. under Structural Plans. and click OK. enter 1' 6". 11 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Edit foundation properties 6 Select one of the foundation walls.

Placing a Wall Foundation | 259 . click Modify. 16 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. Precast Concrete on page 261. 18 Proceed to the next tutorial. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save.15 On the Design Bar. In the next tutorial a new training file is supplied. double-click 3D View. You have completed the Creating a Structural Model tutorial. You can save the open file if you wish.

260 .

you add a precast concrete beam system to an existing structure. you add a precast beam system to the roof of an existing structure. you work with precast concrete components using the tools available in Revit Structure 2009. click Training Files. you add a precast concrete beam system to an existing project. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 261 . In the left pane of the Open dialog.Precast Concrete 6 In this tutorial.rvt. You then modify the precast beam type within the Revit Structure family editor. and open Imperial\i_RST_Precast_Concrete. click Beam System. 1 In the Project Browser. Adding a Beam System to the Structure In this exercise. double-click Roof. In the first lesson. Creating a Precast Beam System In this lesson. under Structural Plans. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

4 In the Element Properties dialog. 262 | Chapter 6 Precast Concrete . under Pattern. 6 Click to place the beam system.3 On the Options Bar. 7 In the Project Browser. For Justification. NOTE The dotted lines represent the beam system direction. click ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . double-click 3D. For Clear Spacing. The longitudinal axis of the beam system members will be placed parallel to these lines. For Beam Type. under 3D Views. select Center. select Precast-Double Tee: 8' x 20". enter 0' 1". do the following: For Layout Rule. Click OK. 5 Select the top girder on the north side of the structure as shown. select Clear Spacing. The beam system is displayed.

and draw a zoom box around the edge of the beam system as Notice the gap between the edge of the beam system and the concrete beam. 9 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt. . click shown. 2 Click one of the precast beams as shown. you change the construction properties so the beam system will extend to the concrete support beam.8 Click File menu ➤ Save As.rvt. i_RST_Precast-in progress. and save the model to a location of your choice using the following filename: i_RST_Precast-in progress. 1 On the View Toolbar. Training File ■ Use the project file that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. Changing the Beam System Properties | 263 . Changing the Beam System Properties In this exercise. Changing the Beam System Properties on page 263.

6 Click File menu ➤ Save. you change clear spacing of the beam system to adjust the gap between each beam. under Sections (Building Section). click . 4 On the Options Bar. 2 In the Project Browser. under Construction. Changing the Beam System Clear Spacing In this exercise. 264 | Chapter 6 Precast Concrete . Notice the spacing between each precast beam. Training File ■ Use the project file that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. i_RST_Precast-in progress. 3 Select the beam system. double-click Section 1.rvt 1 In the Project Browser. The beam system now extends to the concrete support beam. double-click Roof. for Start and End Extension. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. enter 0' 5". under Structural Plans.3 Right-click the selected beam. and click OK. Changing the Beam System Clear Spacing on page 264. 7 Proceed to the next exercise. and click Select All Instances.

Notice the clear spacing between each precast beam is removed. Modifying the Precast Beam Family In this lesson. click . you open the precast beam within the family editor and add a chamfer to both beam supports. 8 Proceed to the next lesson. you add a chamfer to the existing double-tee beam family. for Clear Spacing. and click OK. Modifying the Precast Beam Family | 265 .4 On the Options Bar. under Construction. under Sections (Building Section). 6 In the Project Browser. enter 0' 0". Modifying the Precast Beam Family on page 265. You then import the revised beam back into the project. Adding a Chamfer to the Beam In this exercise. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. double-click Section 1. 7 Click File menu ➤ Save.

rvt. The beam is displayed in a new window. 4 In the Family Project Browser.Training File ■ Use the project file that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. 266 | Chapter 6 Precast Concrete . expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations (Elevation 1). click Yes to open the Precast-Double Tee Family for editing. 2 On the Options Bar. 3 In the Revit dialog. and double-click Left. i_RST_Precast-in progress. Open the beam type for editing 1 Click one of the precast beams as shown. click Edit Family. 5 Select the beam.

expand Families ➤ Profiles ➤ Double Tee-Profile. The reference planes and dimensions are now visible.Open the beam profile 6 In the Family Project Browser. and then click OK. click the Annotations Categories tab. 7 Right-click Double Tee-Profile. click . Click Apply. and draw a zoom box around the left tee of the beam. 12 Select each of the dimensions representing the slope length. Zoom in on the left tee of the beam 11 On the View Toolbar. 10 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. click Yes to open the Double Tee-Profile for editing. 8 In the Revit dialog. 9 Click View menu ➤ Visibility Graphics. ■ ■ Under Visibility. click Dimensions and Reference Planes. Adding a Chamfer to the Beam | 267 . and click Edit. and drag them above the top horizontal surface of the beam profile as shown. NOTE The dimensions should be visible under normal circumstances but are purposely hidden for this demo.

select Not a Reference. 18 On the Options Bar. for Is Reference. 268 | Chapter 6 Precast Concrete . click Ref Plane. under Options.Draw horizontal reference plane 13 On the Design bar. 16 Press ESC. and click Modify. Draw vertical reference planes 20 On the Design Bar. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. 15 Click the reference plane dimension and enter 0' 2". 17 Select the horizontal reference plane. and click OK. click Ref Plane. 21 Draw a vertical reference plane to the left of the center line as shown. 14 Draw a horizontal reference plane below the existing plane. click .

and click OK. 23 Click the reference plane dimension and enter 0' 2". under Options. for Is Reference. Add dimensions to each reference plane 29 On the Design Bar. select both vertical reference planes.22 Press ESC. 24 Press ESC. and click the lock symbol next to the dimension to lock the distance. click . 27 On the Options Bar. 28 In the Element Properties dialog. 26 While pressing CTRL. 25 Use the same technique to draw a vertical reference plane to the right of center as shown. click Dimension. 30 Add a dimension for the left vertical reference plane. Adding a Chamfer to the Beam | 269 . select Not a Reference.

and draw a zoom box around the left tee of the beam. click .31 Repeat for the vertical reference plane on the opposite side as shown. Align the bottom horizontal surface of the beam 35 On the View Toolbar. 34 Press ESC. NOTE Make sure the top dimension line snaps to the horizontal reference plane and not the horizontal line of the beam. 270 | Chapter 6 Precast Concrete . 32 Add a dimension for the horizontal reference plane as shown. 33 Click the lock symbol next to the dimension to lock the distance.

42 Repeat this technique for the inside of the same tee. 41 Press ESC. Adding a Chamfer to the Beam | 271 . 37 Enter AL (this is the keyboard shortcut for Align).36 Click the bottom horizontal line of the beam. 40 Click the lock symbol to lock the alignment. Press TAB to make sure you are selecting the end point of the line and not the reference plane. 39 Select the line representing the bottom surface of the beam as shown. 38 For the align-to point. select the vertical reference plane as shown. and drag the end point away from the angled line as shown. Sketch new profile 43 Select the angled line as shown.

47 Press ESC. Snap to the intersection of the horizontal and vertical reference planes. Snap to the end of the top horizontal line. 45 On the Design bar.44 Press DELETE. 48 Repeat this technique for the opposite side of the beam. click Lines. 46 Sketch the new profile for the beam as follows: ■ ■ ■ Snap to the end point of the lower horizontal plane. 272 | Chapter 6 Precast Concrete .

click . 51 On the View Toolbar.Modify the right tee of the beam 49 Enter ZF (this is the keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit). 50 Click the horizontal reference plane and drag it beyond the right tee of the beam as shown. and draw a zoom box around the right tee of the beam. Adding a Chamfer to the Beam | 273 .

55 Click Edit menu ➤ Undo Family Type to undo the dimension changes. Align the bottom horizontal surface. Add dimensions to each reference plane. 57 In the Reload Family dialog. 274 | Chapter 6 Precast Concrete . ■ ■ ■ ■ Draw vertical reference planes. Notice the project file becomes active and the beam updates with the latest changes. enter 6' 0". For Width. Creating Drawings on page 275. Flex the design 53 On the Design bar. click Load into Projects. fix any problems with alignment or constraints. and click Yes. The beam should adapt to all changes. click Family Types. Sketch the new profile. select Override parameter values of existing types.52 Repeat the following techniques for the right tee of the beam. If it does not. 58 Proceed to the next tutorial. Click Apply. 54 In the Family Types dialog. enter 10' 0". and then click OK. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ For Tee Width. Reload the family into the project 56 On the Design Bar.

you create a drawing sheet that includes a plan view. Depending on the type of drawing that you want to create. elevation. The project used in the following exercises is the same one used in the previous lesson. To create a printed or plotted set of drawings from the views in your structural model. how to add views to the sheets. you can add different views of the model directly to the sheet. and are accessible from the Project Browser. usually contain a title block. 3D view. and section views. 275 . Creating a Drawing Sheet In this exercise. Sheet views update automatically when you modify your model. Sheets are defined by borders. and how to create new views from a model. and three-dimensional (3D) views. begin by first creating sheets.Creating Drawings 7 In this tutorial. The model views that you can add to sheets include plan. you learn how to create drawings from a building information model using Revit Structure 2009. you learn how to create sheets within a Revit Structure project. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project In this lesson. section. which are a type of view in a project.

enter Initial Draft. 2 In the Element Properties dialog box. Anytown. The title block that you selected is a family that has already been loaded into the project. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. MA 12345. click Edit for Project Address. enter 2006-01. Smith. Create a sheet 7 On the View tab of the Design Bar.rvt. and click OK. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal: E1 30x42 Horizontal. 8 In the Select a Title block dialog box. For Project Status. enter J. For Client Name. Enter the project information to display in the title block of the drawing sheet 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information. A title block and drawing borders are displayed on the drawing sheet. right-click. 6 Click OK. TIP If the View tab is not displayed in the Design Bar. For Project Number. and click View.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Imperial\i_RST_Drawings. click Training Files. enter 31 March 2006. For Project Name. enter the following address: 123 Main Street. 3 In the Edit Text dialog box. 5 Specify the remaining instance parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date. click Sheet. enter Office Structure. 4 Click OK. 276 | Chapter 7 Creating Drawings . The text fields in the title block family (shown below) contain labels that automatically display the corresponding project information that you entered.

enter S-1. on the Options Bar.Unnamed. Add a plan view to the sheet 14 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Structural Plan: Level 2. click 12 In the Element Properties dialog. Creating a Drawing Sheet | 277 .NOTE The Project Path parameter in the lower-right corner of the sheet view automatically updates every time the project file is saved. Under Identity Data ➤ Sheet number. expand Sheets (all). The new sheet is displayed in the Project Browser with the name S-2 . 15 In the Views dialog box. and select the title block. Under Identity Data ➤ Sheet name. 13 Click OK. 11 When the title block highlights. click Modify. and click to place the view. Change the sheet name and number in the title block 10 On the Design Bar. The sheet name and number are displayed in the title block and in the Project Browser. do the following: ■ ■ . and click Add View to Sheet. enter Plans and Elevations. 9 In the Project Browser. click Add View. 16 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet.

and click View Properties. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. clear Crop View. specify 1/16" = 1'. 23 Click on the lower half of the sheet to place the view.17 With the view selected. 18 In the Element Properties dialog box. 28 Adjust the length of the title line by selecting the view. 27 Drag the title line under the elevation view. 278 | Chapter 7 Creating Drawings . right-click. 20 Adjust the length of the title line by selecting the view. you would see that the scale plan view is now 1/16" = 1'0". NOTE If necessary. Add an elevation to the sheet 21 On the View tab of the Design Bar. specify 1/16" = 1'. 26 Position the view below the Structural Plan: Level 2. under Graphics. Under Extents. Click OK. and dragging the right end control until it fits under the view.0" for View Scale. The scale of the view on the sheet changes. and click OK. and click Add View to Sheet. and dragging the right end control until it fits under the view. right-click. 22 In the Views dialog box. and click Element Properties. select Elevation: South Elevation. right-click. you can select the view title separately and move it to a new position. click Add View.0" for View Scale. If you were to open the Structural Plan: Level 2. and click Element Properties. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. 19 Drag the view to the upper-left corner of the sheet. 24 With the view selected.

click Add View. you can select the view title separately and move it to a new position. 31 Click on the upper-right corner of the sheet to place the view. 30 In the Views dialog box. and dragging the right end control until it fits under the view. 34 Navigate to a folder of your preference. select 3D View: East Section . you can select the view title separately and move it to a new position.Perspective. 33 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Adding a Sheet to the Project on page 280. Creating a Drawing Sheet | 279 .rvt.NOTE If necessary. Add a 3D view to the sheet 29 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 35 Proceed to the next exercise. NOTE If necessary. 32 Adjust the length of the title line by selecting the view. and click Add View to Sheet. and save the file as i_RST_Drawings-in progress.

The new sheet. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. incrementally named S-2 Section Views. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. and on the Options Bar. is displayed in the Project Browser. under Sheets (all). under Identity Data.Adding a Sheet to the Project In this exercise. and click OK. 5 Click File menu ➤ Save.rvt. and adjust the scale of the view. 280 | Chapter 7 Creating Drawings . you add a new sheet to the project. 2 In the Select a Title block dialog box. 3 Select the title block. click . Section Views is displayed in the title block as the sheet name. Creating New Views to Add to Sheets on page 280. and then add them to a new drawing sheet. Add a new sheet to the project 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. enter Section Views for Sheet Name. you learn how to create a new section view and a new callout view. click Sheet. i_RST_Drawings-in progress. add a section view. 4 In the Element Properties dialog box. Creating New Views to Add to Sheets In this exercise. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal: E1 30x42 Horizontal. and click OK. 6 Proceed to the next exercise.

Creating New Views to Add to Sheets | 281 . 2 On the View Toolbar. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. and add it to the sheet 1 In the Project Browser under Structural Plans. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. double-click Level 2. and zoom in on the east area of the structure as shown. 5 Add a section line that cuts through the right side of the building: ■ Click between grid lines G and H to place the start point of the section line and the section head (section tag). click Section.NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. select 1/16" = 1'. Create a section view of Level 2. i_RST_Drawings-in progress.0" for Scale. click . 4 On the Options Bar.rvt.

0" for View Scale. and add it to the sheet 14 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 282 | Chapter 7 Creating Drawings . 9 Click on the upper-left corner of the sheet to place the view. and click Properties. 6 In the Project Browser. right-click. double-click S-2 Section Views. you can select the view title separately and move it to a new position. under Sheets (all). 12 Drag the title line under the elevation view. select Section: Section 1. and click Add View to Sheet. under Graphics. 11 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Add View.■ Move the cursor to the right and click between grid lines J and K to place the section tail and complete the section line. 10 With the view selected. NOTE If necessary. 8 In the Views dialog box. under Sections (Building Sections). 7 On the View tab of the Design Bar. double click Section 1. Create a callout view. 13 Adjust the length of the title line by dragging the right end control until it fits under the view. specify 3/16" = 1' .

as shown. under Sections (Building Sections). and drag the view onto the sheet. click Callout of section 1. under Graphics.15 On the View Toolbar. and position it approximately as shown. 21 With the view selected. 18 Select the drag bar attached to the callout balloon.0" for View Scale. Creating New Views to Add to Sheets | 283 . specify 3/4" = 1'. 23 Drag the title line under the elevation view. 20 In the Project Browser. 16 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 22 In the Element Properties dialog box. 17 Draw a box around the column of Garage Level 1. 24 Adjust the length of the title line by dragging the right end control until it fits under the view. click Callout. 19 In the Project Browser. and zoom in on the lower floors of the structure. click . and click Properties. double-click S-2 Section Views. under Sheets (all). and click OK. right-click.

Creating a Detail Library on page 284. Save a group of views to the library 1 In the Project Browser. expand Sheets (all). Creating a Drafting View Detail Library In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog.NOTE If necessary. and open Imperial\i_RST_Save_Detail.TYPICAL DETAILS. 26 Proceed to the next lesson. you can select the view title separately and move it to a new position. 25 Click File menu ➤ Save. Instead of having to draw these details for every project. 284 | Chapter 7 Creating Drawings .1 . click Training Files. Creating a Detail Library In this lesson. and double-click S. you will learn how to save both the individual views and complete detail sheets as a new detail library and then import these details into a different project. you learn how to create a detail library of components that can be imported into different projects. you begin by opening a project that contains common drafting view details. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt.

TYPICAL DETAILS. Creating a Drafting View Detail Library | 285 . 4 In the Save As dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Locate a common drive that can be accessed by all team members. Enter Detail Library for the folder name. select Drawing Sheet: S. 3 In the Save Views dialog.Notice there are 3 typical detail views on this sheet.1 . 2 Click File menu ➤ Save to Library ➤ Save Views. Click the icon to the right of Save In to create a new Folder. Open the new folder. and click OK.

Click Save. Click OK. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Save in. 6 In the Save Views dialog. ■ ■ 7 In the Save As dialog. 8 Click File menu ➤ Close. NOTE When you save your file. Select both Footing Section views. Only the drafting views will be displayed. 286 | Chapter 7 Creating Drawings . however. For File name. clear Drawing Sheet: S. Under Views. Click Save. do the following: ■ ■ In the list of views.1 . when you insert these views into a new project. select Show drafting views only. enter Footing Section. enter Typical Column Beam and Girder Details.■ ■ Under File name. 9 Proceed to the next exercise. Revit Structure will save views that contain 3D objects. Importing Details from the Library on page 287.TYPICAL DETAILS. navigate to the Detail Library folder created in step 4. Save individual views to the library 5 Click File menu ➤ Save to Library ➤ Save Views. only the 2D elements will be inserted.

1 . select the Detail Library folder you created in the previous exercise. Insert drawing sheet from the library 1 Click File menu ➤ Insert from File ➤ Views. Creating a Drafting View Detail Library on page 284 before proceeding. Importing Details from the Library | 287 . Because you are importing element types that may already exist in the project. 3 In the Insert Views dialog: ■ ■ Select Drawing Sheet: S. close the warning dialog that appears.rvt. 4 Once the drawing sheet opens. you learn how import details from the newly created library. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.Importing Details from the Library In this exercise. Click OK. Click Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. click Training Files. 2 In the Open dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Look in. and open Imperial\i_RST_Insert_Detail. Click OK.rvt. Select the file TYPICAL COLUMN BEAM AND GIRDER DETAILS.TYPICAL DETAILS. a duplicate types dialog displays.

5 In the Project Browser. select the folder Detail Library you created in the previous exercise.rvt.TYPICAL DETAILS. Insert separate footing sections from the library 6 Click File menu ➤ Insert from File ➤ Views. 8 In the Insert Views dialog: ■ Under Views. select Drafting View: FOOTING SECTION. 7 In the Open dialog. expand Sheets (all). Click Open. 288 | Chapter 7 Creating Drawings . Select the file FOOTING SECTION. and double-click S. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For Look in.1 .

Because you are importing element types that may already exist in the project. a duplicate types dialog appears. Importing Details from the Library | 289 .■ Click OK. Click OK.

Select the file Footing Sections. select the folder Detail Library you created in the previous exercise.rvt. 290 | Chapter 7 Creating Drawings . 10 In the Open dialog: ■ ■ For Look in.9 Click File menu ➤ Insert from File ➤ Views.

Click OK. Because you are importing element types that may already exist in the project. a duplicate types dialog appears. Importing Details from the Library | 291 .■ Click Open. Click OK. select Drafting View: Footing Section 2. 11 In the Insert Views dialog: ■ ■ Under Views.

Using Legends on page 292. annotation legends are often referred to as symbol legends. you add the completed symbol legend to a sheet for the construction documents.12 Click File menu ➤ Close. Using Legends Legends provide a way to display a list of the various structural components and annotations used in a project. The two most common types of legends produced for construction documents are annotation legends and building component legends. 292 | Chapter 7 Creating Drawings . Legends list and identify components such as weld symbols and rebar tags. Creating a Symbol Legend In this exercise. concrete schedule. component legends are often called schedules (beam schedule. You have created a library of common drafting details that can be shared by each member of the structural team. you create a legend view and add symbols and text to it. On construction documents. using a text type you create by duplicating an existing text type and modifying the type properties. 13 Proceed to the next lesson. Finally. On construction documents. You have also imported both individual detail views as well as the entire detail sheet into an existing project. and so on). Annotation legends are made up of components such as section markers which are paired with text that identifies them.

i_RST_Drawings-in progress. and click OK.Spacer: Spacer Weld Symbol-w-Preparation: Melt Thru Creating a Symbol Legend | 293 .NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. 4 In the Rename View dialog box. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Section Head . click Symbol. and click Rename. enter Symbol Legend for Name. expand Legends. 3 Right-click Legend 1. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise.rvt. 2 In the Project Browser. 6 Add the following symbols to the legend view. Add symbols to the legend 5 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Create a legend view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Legend.Filled Span Direction Fixed: 1/2” Rebar Tag Weld Symbol: Both Weld Symbol . selecting each from the Type Selector and placing it in the drawing area as shown.

10 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click OK twice. click Text. 9 On the Options bar. click Duplicate. On the Design Bar. 294 | Chapter 7 Creating Drawings . enter 1/8" text for Name. 8 In the Type Selector.Create a text type 7 Because the text size for the symbol legend is not available in the Type Selector. click . 14 Enter Level Marker (Level Name/Elevation) or the text note. you create a text type with the necessary size. and click OK. You do this by duplicating an existing text type and modifying the type properties. verify that Text: 1/8" text is selected. 11 In the Type Properties dialog box. Add text to the legend 13 In the Type Selector. click Edit/New. 12 Under Text. select Text: 1/4" Arial text. enter 1/8" for Text Size. and click to the right of the first symbol to specify the text start point.

Spacer Weld Symbol .Melt thru Place the symbol legend on a sheet 16 In the Project Browser. click Symbol Legend.Plans and Elevations to open it in the drawing area. enter the following text for the remaining symbols in the legend: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Span Direction Fixed: 1/2” Rebar Tag (Tag#) Weld Symbol Weld Symbol . Creating a Symbol Legend | 295 . 18 On the Design Bar. expand Sheets (all). and click to place it. 17 In the Project Browser. drag it to the lower-right corner of the sheet. click Modify to end the command. and double-click S-1 .15 Working from the top down.

The symbol legend is added to the sheet. 19 Click File menu ➤ Close. 20 You can save the open file if you wish. In the next tutorial, a new training file is supplied. 21 Proceed to the next tutorial, Scheduling on page 297.

296 | Chapter 7 Creating Drawings

Scheduling

8

In this tutorial, you learn how to create a customized schedule of structural framing elements in your Revit Structure 2009 projects.

Scheduling Beam Quantities
In this lesson, you learn how to create a beam schedule for the structural model as shown below. When you schedule structural components in Revit Structure, you can list each component as a separate line item (an instance schedule), or you can group components of the same type into a single line item (a type schedule).

Creating a Structural Framing Schedule
In this exercise, you learn how to create a structural framing concrete beam schedule. Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_RST_Schedules_Framing.rvt.

Create the schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active, right-click in the Design Bar, and click View. 2 In the New Schedule dialog, under Category, select Structural Framing, and click OK. Choose which fields to include in the beam schedule 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click the Fields tab.

297

4 Under Available fields, select Mark, and click Add. The Mark field is moved under Scheduled fields. 5 Using the same process, add the following fields to the schedule:
■ ■ ■

Comments Reference Level Family and Type

NOTE The width and depth parameters will be added to the schedule in the next exercise, Creating Shared Parameters. 6 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click Add Parameter. 7 In the Parameter Properties dialog, do the following:
■ ■ ■

Under Parameter Data, enter REBAR for Name. Under Type of Parameter, select Text. Click OK.

NOTE Rebar is now a project parameter that can also be found in the properties of all structural framing components including beams. 8 Under Scheduled fields, order the fields as shown by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down.

9 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click OK. A schedule is created that includes all structural framing elements in the project.

298 | Chapter 8 Scheduling

10 Click File menu ➤ Close. To save changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name, or close the exercise file without saving changes. The next exercise uses a new training file. 11 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating Shared Parameters on page 299.

Creating Shared Parameters
In this exercise you learn how to use shared parameters to define additional elements that are usually not included in the beam schedule when it is created within the project template. Shared parameters can be added to any family, regardless of category, and are defined and stored in an external file, ensuring consistency across families and projects. Their values may also be aggregated and reported within Revit Structure multi-category schedules. An example of the use of shared parameters is the need to add width and depth information in a concrete beam schedule. This requires assigning the existing width and depth parameters originally defined as family parameters to shared parameters in the beam family. The following exercise demonstrates the solution for this situation and covers the process of setting up shared parameters and adding them to a family. Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_RST_Schedules.rvt.

Editing the family parameters 1 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Ground Level. NOTE Some beams have been added to this view to better demonstrate the scheduling tool. 2 Select one of the concrete beams as shown.

Creating Shared Parameters | 299

3 On the Options Bar, click Edit Family. 4 Click Yes when prompted about opening the beam for editing. NOTE You are now in the Family Editor. The selected beam family is displayed in the drawing area. 5 On the Family design bar, click Family Types. 6 In the Family Types dialog, under Dimensions, select the b parameter, and click Modify.

7 In the Parameter Properties dialog, select Shared Parameter, and click Select. 8 When asked if you want to choose a shared parameter file, click Yes. 9 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog, click Create. 10 In the Save As dialog, specify a location for the file, and enter Project Shared Parameters for name. Click Save. 11 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog, under Groups, click New. 12 In the New Parameter Group dialog, enter Dimensions for name, and click OK. 13 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog, under Parameters, click New. 14 In the Parameter Properties dialog, do the following:
■ ■

Under Name, enter b. Under Type of Parameter, select Length.

300 | Chapter 8 Scheduling

Click OK.

15 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog, under Parameters, click New. 16 In the Parameter Properties dialog, do the following:
■ ■ ■

Under Name, enter h. Under Type of Parameter, select Length. Click OK.

17 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog, click OK. 18 In the Shared Parameter dialog, select the b parameter, and click OK. 19 In the Parameter Properties dialog, click OK. 20 In the Family Types dialog, under Dimensions, select the h parameter, and click Modify. 21 In the Parameter Properties dialog, select Shared Parameter, and click Select. 22 In the Shared Parameter dialog, select the h parameter, and click OK. 23 In the Parameter Properties dialog, click OK. 24 In the Family Types dialog, click OK. NOTE The b and h parameters, which were originally family parameters, are now shared parameters. They will appear in the structural framing schedule field once they are reloaded into the project file. 25 On the Family design bar, click Load into Project. 26 When prompted to overwrite the existing version of the family, click Yes. Remove Family and Type parameter 27 In the Project Browser, under Schedules/Quantities, right-click Structural Framing Schedule, and select Properties. 28 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Fields, click Edit. 29 In the Schedule Properties dialog, under Scheduled fields (in order), select Family and Type, and click Remove. The Family and Type field is removed from the Scheduled fields column. Add depth and width parameters to the beam schedule 30 Under Available Fields, select b (Width) and h (Depth), and click Add. The b and h fields are moved under Scheduled fields. 31 Under Scheduled fields, order the fields as shown by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down.

Creating Shared Parameters | 301

32 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click OK. 33 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK. 34 Click File menu ➤ Close. To save changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name, or close the exercise file without saving changes. The next exercise uses a new training file. 35 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating a Type Schedule on page 302.

Creating a Type Schedule
In this exercise, you learn how to create a type schedule. Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_RST_Schedules_Custom.rvt.

Modify the table elements 1 In the Project Browser, under Schedules/Quantities, double-click Structural Framing Schedule. 2 Modify the schedule headings as follows:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Select Mark, and enter MARK. Select b (Width), and enter W. Select h (Depth), and enter D. Select Comments, and enter REMARKS. Select the title, and enter GROUND LEVEL CONCRETE BEAM SCHEDULE.

NOTE Under the Project Browser, click Schedules/Quantities. Notice that the schedule name has changed. 3 Select headings W and D. 4 On the Options bar, click Group.

302 | Chapter 8 Scheduling

A new blank cell is created above columns W and D. 5 Click the new heading, and enter SIZE.

Select a filter 6 Right-click the open area next to the schedule, and select View Properties. 7 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Filter, click Edit. 8 In the Schedule Properties dialog, do the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Click the Filter tab. Select Reference Level for Filter by. Select Ground Level. Click OK.

9 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK. Notice the schedule is filtered and shows only the structural framing elements of the ground level.

Format units 10 Right-click the open area next to the schedule, and click View Properties. 11 In the Element Properties dialog, under Formatting, click Edit for Value. 12 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click the Formatting tab. 13 Under Fields, click b, and click Field Format. 14 In the Format dialog, do the following:
■ ■ ■

Clear Use project settings. Under Units, select Fractional inches. Under Rounding, select To the nearest 1/2".

Creating a Type Schedule | 303

Click OK.

15 Using the same method, format units for field h. 16 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click OK. 17 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK. Columns W and D now display fractional inches.

Add structural usage parameter to the beam schedule 18 In the Project Browser, under Schedules/Quantities, right-click the Ground Level Concrete Beam Schedule, and select Properties. 19 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Fields, click Edit. 20 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click the Fields tab. 21 Under Available Fields, select Structural Usage, and click Add. The Structural usage is moved under Scheduled fields. 22 Under Scheduled fields, order the fields as shown by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down.

304 | Chapter 8 Scheduling

23 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click OK. 24 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK. The schedule now displays the structural usage of each item.

Sort by Structural Usage 25 Right-click the open area next to the schedule, and select View Properties. 26 In the Element Properties dialog, under Sorting/Grouping, click Edit for Value. 27 In the Schedule Properties dialog ➤ Sorting/Grouping tab, do the following:
■ ■ ■

Under Sort by, select Structural Usage. Select Header. Select Footer.

Creating a Type Schedule | 305

■ ■

Select Blank Line. Click OK.

28 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK. The schedule is updated to provide both a header and footer for each type, sorted by structural usage.

29 Click File menu ➤ Close. To save changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name, or close the exercise file without saving changes. The next exercise uses a new training file. 30 Proceed to the next exercise, Customizing the Type Schedule on page 307.

306 | Chapter 8 Scheduling

Customizing the Type Schedule
In this exercise, you first add mark information to identify each beam type, you then sort the schedule by mark, hide specific columns, and finally, you add rebar information. Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_RST_Schedules_Custom_Type.rvt.

Add mark data 1 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Ground Level. 2 On the Window menu, click Tile. The screen is split into two separate windows, showing both the beam schedule and Ground Level view. NOTE Close any additional views that may be opened. If prompted to save the changes to the beam family, click Yes, and provide a location for the new family file. 3 While pressing CTRL, select multiple joists on the Ground Level window as shown.

4 On the Options bar, click
■ ■

.

5 In the Element Properties dialog, do the following: Under Identity Data, enter B1 for Mark Value. Click OK.

NOTE Ignore the warning regarding elements having duplicate Mark values. The schedule is updated with the joist information.

Customizing the Type Schedule | 307

6 While pressing CTRL, select multiple joists on the Ground Level window as shown.

7 On the Options bar, click
■ ■

.

8 In the Element Properties dialog, do the following: Under Identity Data, enter B2 for Mark Value. Click OK.

NOTE Ignore the warning regarding elements having duplicate Mark values. The schedule is updated with the joist information.

308 | Chapter 8 Scheduling

9 While pressing CTRL, select multiple joists on the Ground Level window as shown.

10 On the Options bar, click
■ ■

.

11 In the Element Properties dialog, do the following: Under Identity Data, enter B3 for Mark Value. Click OK.

NOTE Ignore the warning regarding elements having duplicate Mark values. The schedule is updated with the joist information.

Customizing the Type Schedule | 309

Sort and filter the schedule by mark 12 Maximize the schedule window. 13 Right-click the open area next to the schedule, and select View Properties. 14 In the Element Properties dialog, under Sorting/Grouping, click Edit for Value. 15 In the Schedule Properties dialog, do the following:
■ ■

Clear Footer, Header, Itemize every instance, and Grand totals. Under Sort by, select Mark.

16 In the Schedules Properties dialog, click the Filter tab, and do the following:

Under Filter by, select Mark, then select contains, and enter B.

310 | Chapter 8 Scheduling

Click OK.

17 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK. Notice the schedule is not itemized and does not show each beam, but instead groups all the beams of the same mark in a single row.

Hide/unhide columns 18 Right-click the open area next to the schedule, and click View Properties. 19 In the Element Properties dialog, under Formatting, click Edit for Value. 20 In the Schedule Properties dialog, do the following:
■ ■ ■

Under Fields, select Reference Level. Under Field Formatting, select Hidden field. Click OK.

21 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK. The Reference Level column is now hidden. NOTE To show all hidden columns, right-click the open area next to the schedule, select Unhide All Columns. You can also hide a column by right-clicking the desired column, and selecting Hide Column(s) from the drop-down menu. Rename existing rebar parameter 22 Right-click the open area next to the schedule, and click View Properties. 23 In the Element Properties dialog, under Formatting, click Edit for Value.

Customizing the Type Schedule | 311

click OK. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Fields. Under Type of Parameter. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. enter Top Bars for Name. select Text. enter Bottom Bars. Under Heading. The Rebar field is renamed. click OK. click Add Parameter. under Fields. Rebar will not be added to the model with the data entered in this dialog. 312 | Chapter 8 Scheduling . click OK. The new rebar field is added. 28 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 30 Under Scheduled fields. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. Click OK. 31 In the Schedule Properties dialog. order the fields as shown by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. select REBAR. This parameter provides text information that is added to all beams within the model.24 In the Schedule Properties dialog. and click View Properties. click Edit for Value. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. Click OK. 29 In the Parameter Properties dialog. Add new rebar parameter 26 Right-click the open area next to the schedule.

38 Proceed to the next exercise. click File menu ➤ Save As. 37 Click File menu ➤ Close. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Creating an Instance Schedule | 313 . and under Top Bars. For Joists B2. For Joists B3. under the Fields parameter. and under Top Bars. enter 2-#6A 1-#6B. enter 2-#7A 1-#7B. The schedule is updated with the joist information. enter 2-#5A 1-#5B. select2-#5C. A new blank cell is created above the columns. double-click Ground Level Concrete Beam Schedule. click Group. Creating an Instance Schedule on page 313. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. under Bottom Bars. or close the exercise file without saving changes. under Bottom Bars. you create a formula to calculate the unit cost for each joist instance. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 35 Click the new heading. and click View Properties.Group rebar columns 33 Select both the Bottom Bars and Top Bars headings. 34 On the Options bar. To save changes. and save the exercise file with a unique name.rvt. under Bottom Bars. The next exercise uses a new training file. as well as the total cost of all structural items for the ground level of the structure. click Edit for Value. click Training Files. select 2-#5C. Creating an Instance Schedule In this exercise. enter 2-#5 C. and enter REBAR. under Schedules/Quantities. and under Top Bars. Enter rebar data 36 Enter the following rebar set information for each rebar instance as follows: ■ ■ ■ For Joists B1. Create the formula 1 In the Project Browser. and open Imperial\i_RST_Schedules_Formula. 2 Right-click the open area next to the schedule.

Because cost is a type parameter. 8 Under Joist B1. select Volume. click OK. 5 In the Calculated Value dialog. 6 In the Schedule Properties dialog. and click Add. click OK. Note that the formula will calculate the total cost based on a volume unit of 1 cubic yard. select Cost. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Available Fields. and press ENTER. enter 3 for Cost. Enter Volume*Cost/1'^3 for Formula. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter Total Cost for Name. 314 | Chapter 8 Scheduling . and click Add.4 In the Schedule Properties dialog. the value will be applied to all elements of the same type. Click Calculated Value. The schedule will calculate the total cost for all joists. Select Number for Type. ■ Click OK. Under Available Fields. 7 In the Element Properties dialog.

select Total Cost.NOTE The cost value represents a random value chosen for demonstration purposes only. Under Rounding. enter 1. Under Fields. Under Field Formatting. click Edit for Value. select Calculate totals. and click View Properties. and click View Properties. under Formatting. Under Fields. and press ENTER. Under Units. 16 In the Schedule Properties dialog. Also notice that the Total Cost parameter does not have a unit value assigned. select Currency. Creating an Instance Schedule | 315 . clear Use default settings. click Edit for Value. 10 Right-click the open area next to the schedule. In the Format dialog. under Formatting. The schedule now includes the sum for Total Cost. Format total cost to include currency value 14 Right-click the open area next to the schedule. 12 In the Schedule Properties dialog. select 2 Decimal Places. select $. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the Formatting tab. click OK. 9 Under Joist B2. select Total Cost. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. click Field Format. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. Under Field formatting. Under Unit Symbol.5 for Cost. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the Formatting tab. Click OK.

Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you learn how to create a graphical column schedule for the current project.■ Click OK. and save the exercise file with a unique name. Create the Graphical Column Schedule In this exercise you learn how to create a graphical column schedule. The next lesson uses a new training file.rvt. click Training Files. 316 | Chapter 8 Scheduling . The Total Cost column displays a currency value in Dollars. 17 In the Schedule Properties dialog. click File menu ➤ Save As. click OK. 19 Click File menu ➤ Close. Creating a Graphical Column Schedule In this lesson. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating a Graphical Column Schedule on page 316. 20 Proceed to the next lesson. or close the exercise file without saving changes. click OK. and open Imperial\i_RST_Schedules_Create_GCS. To save changes.

5 In the Element Properties dialog. Garage Level .Create the schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 2 Right-click the column schedule. The schedule is created automatically. and zoom in on the schedule. click . 4 In the Levels Hidden dialog. Create the Graphical Column Schedule | 317 . Notice that the first level on the schedule is Level 2. under Other. and Ground Level. NOTE These levels will not appear on the graphical column schedule. and click OK. click Graphical Column Schedule. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. select Foundation. click OK. click Edit for Hidden Levels.1. 6 On the Toolbar. and select View Properties.

Columns located at off-grid locations 318 | Chapter 8 Scheduling . The schedule also provides the nearest grid intersection and the value for the offset distance between the grid and column.NOTE The graphical column schedule includes columns located at off-grid locations as shown below.

enter 3". click Edit. In the Graphical Column Schedule Properties dialog.Columns displayed in plan view Grouping and formatting off-grid columns 7 Right-click the schedule. Notice that all columns located at off-grid locations are now grouped together under a single column. select Group Similar Locations. and for Grid Appearance. ■ In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. under Vertical Heights. For Column Locations. click OK. Create the Graphical Column Schedule | 319 . 8 In the Element Properties dialog. enter 3". for Below Bottom Level. do the following: ■ ■ Under Graphics. under Horizontal Widths. and select View Properties.

and then select Bold and Italic. double-click Graphical Column Schedule 1. and select View Properties. under Graphics. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. 4 In the Graphical Column Schedule Properties dialog. Change the Schedule Appearance In this exercise. you can include or exclude columns located at off-grid locations. and select View Properties. For Level text. or close the exercise file without saving changes. Change the Schedule Appearance on page 320. clear both Include Off-Grid Columns and Group Similar Locations. do the following: ■ ■ For Title text. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. and save the exercise file with a unique name. Notice the schedule view only displays those columns located at grid intersections. select Courier New from the drop-down list. The next exercise uses a new training file.Include/Exclude columns at off-grid locations In the graphical column schedule view.rvt. 2 Right-click the schedule. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 9 Right-click the schedule. select Arial Black from the drop-down list. and open Imperial\i_RST_Schedules_Customize_GCS. you learn how to add a title to the schedule and how to customize text and graphic appearance. click Edit for Value. click Training Files. 320 | Chapter 8 Scheduling . To save changes. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. under Graphical Column Schedules. under Text Appearance. Customize text 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 11 Click File menu ➤ Close. and then select Bold. click File menu ➤ Save As.

under Identity Data. 7 Click OK. enter Steel Column Schedule for Title. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. Change the Schedule Appearance | 321 . 9 Click OK.5 Click the Grid Appearance tab. 6 Under Horizontal Widths: ■ ■ Enter 2" for Column Locations. Enter 2" for Level Names.

Click Apply. Click OK. 16 Draw a pick box around the entire schedule. click . 13 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Under Orientation. and click OK. 12 Click any column on Level 7 to place the tag. 17 On the Options bar. select Structural Column Tags. click Vertical. 18 In the Filter dialog. select Vertical. 14 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. click Tag ➤ By Category. 322 | Chapter 8 Scheduling . 15 Enter ZF to fit the entire column schedule in the drawing area. and clear Leader. 11 On the Options bar.Tag the columns 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. clear Structural Columns. click Tag All Not Tagged. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category.

click 20 On the Toolbar.19 On the Toolbar. . and move the tags until they are positioned approximately as shown. Split the column schedule 21 Right-click the schedule. and zoom in on one of the column tags. and select View Properties. Change the Schedule Appearance | 323 . click .

and select the titleblock. you create multiple sheets for the graphical column schedule. 23 Click OK. The new sheet is displayed in the Project Browser. expand Sheets (all). and open Imperial\i_RST_Schedules_Multiple_Sheets_GCS.rvt. and save the exercise file with a unique name. click File menu ➤ Save As. 5 On the Options bar. Under Column Locations per Segment.22 In the Element Properties dialog. Creating Multiple Sheets for the Graphical Column Schedule In this exercise. click Sheet. 3 In the Project Browser. click ■ ■ ■ . In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating Multiple Sheets for the Graphical Column Schedule on page 324. The schedule is split into multiple segments with 10 column locations per segment. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. do the following. and click OK. Change the sheet name and number 4 On the Design Bar. click Training Files. Click OK. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal: E1 30x42 Horizontal. enter S-3. 324 | Chapter 8 Scheduling . enter Steel Column Schedule. Under Sheet Number. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. The next exercise uses a new training file. Create a sheet 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. enter 1/4" = 1' . 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. or close the exercise file without saving changes. click Modify. 24 Click File menu ➤ Close. do the following: Under Identity Data ➤ Sheet Name. A titleblock and drawing borders are displayed on the drawing sheet. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. ■ ■ Under View Scale. To save changes.0". enter 10.

15 On the Options bar. Add additional sheets 12 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 9 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet. and click Add View to Sheet. Add the column schedule to the sheet 7 On the View tab of the Design bar. do the following: Under Identity Data ➤ Sheet Name. 13 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. under Extents. 16 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal: E1 30x42 Horizontal. select Steel Column Schedule. click Add View. click ■ ■ ■ . 17 Repeat previous steps to add 2 additional sheets.The sheet name and number are displayed in the titleblock and in the Project Browser. and click to place the view. 10 Select the schedule. enter S-4. 14 On the Design Bar. 8 In the Views dialog. Creating Multiple Sheets for the Graphical Column Schedule | 325 . click OK. select Graphical Column Schedule. and enter S-5 and S-6 for sheet numbers. click Sheet. and on the Options Bar. Place remaining views 18 On the Project Browser. expand Sheets (all). enter 1 for Segments in Viewport. click Modify. Click OK. and select the titleblock. The first segment will be placed on Sheet S-3. and double-click Sheet S-4. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. Enter Steel Column Schedule for name. Under Sheet Number. click .

expand Sheets (all). and open Imperial\i_RST_Schedules_Export_Project_Info. 326 | Chapter 8 Scheduling . under Graphical Column Schedule. you learn how to export project information into a Microsoft® Access 2000 database. 24 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet. click Graphical Column Schedule 1. and click Next. Exporting Project Information with ODBC In this lesson. click Training Files. and drag it onto the sheet. 9 Under Directories. 3 Click New. 22 On the Project Browser. 4 In the Create New Data Source dialog. 12 Click OK in the remaining dialogs.mdb. Export the schedule 1 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ ODBC Database. click Graphical Column Schedule 1.rvt. under Graphical Column Schedule. 8 In the New Database dialog. and click to place the view. select the Microsoft Access driver (*mdb). enter Revit_Project. 27 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet. and then open the database in Microsoft Access. 28 Click File menu ➤ Close. and double-click Sheet S-5 23 On the Project Browser. 21 Position the schedule as necessary. and double-click Sheet S-6. click OK. 6 Click Finish. 7 In the ODBC Microsoft Access Setup dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 25 On the Project Browser. under Graphical Column Schedule. click Create. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. under Database. click OK. click the File Data Source tab. 5 Enter RevitDSN for the name of the DSN. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access on page 326. 2 In the Select Data Source dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 10 When the confirmation message displays. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access In this exercise. click Graphical Column Schedule 1. 11 In the OBDC Microsoft Access Setup dialog. select a location for the database file. under Database Name. expand Sheets (all). and save the exercise file with a unique name. and click to place the view. 26 On the Project Browser. and click OK to create the database. or close the exercise file without saving changes. and drag it onto the sheet. and click Next. and drag it onto the sheet. The next exercise uses a new training file. The process that you use to export the database is similar for any other ODBC-compliant database. 20 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet.19 On the Project Browser. you learn how to export project information to an ODBC (Open DataBase Connectivity) compliant database. To save changes. click File menu ➤ Save As. and click to place the view.

Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access | 327 . or close the exercise file without saving changes. instance tables include a Type ID column containing the ID of the instance’s type. click File menu ➤ Save As. and save the exercise file with a unique name. For example. To save changes. Steel Details on page 329. Elements IDs are also used to establish relationships between elements in different tables. and some instance tables include a Room ID column containing the ID of the room that the instance is in. 14 Proceed to the next tutorial. 13 Click File menu ➤ Close. The next tutorial uses a new training file.Revit Structure creates 2 tables: one that lists all of the element instances in a project. A unique element ID is used to identify exported elements. and one that lists all of the element types in a project (see below). so that each table of elements includes an ID column.

328 .

Steel Details 9 In this tutorial. revise an existing elevation view. and how to create a drafting detail using the tools provided (drafting-detail). click Training Files. revise a callout view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and add these views to a sheet. 329 .rvt. and double-click Level 4. Structural Plans. you learn how to use Revit Structure 2009 to create steel details from the structural model (model-based). and draw a zoom box around the northwest stair opening as shown. 2 Select . You cut a section in plan. and open Imperial\i_RST_DET. expand Views (all). Cutting Sections and Adding Views to Sheets Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Detail drawings describe how particular pieces of the structure go together and are typically created in the middle to later portion of the design process after the general building shape and structural elements have been decided upon. you begin with a framed model as the basis of your details. This tutorial comprises the following model-based steel detail exercises: ■ ■ ■ Welded Brace Connection Bolted Angle Connection Glazing Support Connection Setting Up Section Views on Sheets In this lesson. Prepare the welded brace elevation view 1 In the Project Browser.

8 On the View tab of the Design Bar.0".3 Double-click the elevation bubble to open the elevation view. Click Detail Level ➤ Fine. 5 On the View Control Bar: ■ ■ ■ Click Scale control. and draw a zoom box around grid line intersection 1-E. and drag the controls to resize such that only the Level 4 area is visible. 7 Select . 330 | Chapter 9 Steel Details . under Structural Plans. double-click Level 4. click Section. and select 3/4" =1' . Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. select the elevation crop view. Create the section view 6 In the Project Browser. 4 In the elevation view.

double-click West Elevation. click Modify. and select 1/2" =1' . Click Detail Level ➤ Fine. and drag the view controls so that only Level 4 is visible. 13 On the View Control Bar: ■ ■ ■ Click Scale control. Revise the callout view 14 In the Project Browser. 10 On the Design Bar. Cutting Sections and Adding Views to Sheets | 331 . 12 Select the section crop view. 15 Select . 16 Double-click on the callout head to open the view. Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. and zoom in on the south wall at Level 4. under Elevations (Building Elevation). A callout symbol is located in this view at the south wall.0".9 Draw a section as shown. 11 Double-click the section bubble to open the section view.

19 In the Select a Title block dialog. 20 In the Project Browser. Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.Steel Details. select E1 30x42 Horizontal. and click Rename. and click to place the view. and click Add View to Sheet. and click Add View to Sheet. select Elevation: Elevation 1-a. 22 In the Sheet Title dialog. 29 In the Project Browser. 23 In the Project Browser. Click Detail Level ➤ Fine.0". 31 Move the cursor onto the sheet. right-click S-6 . and click Add View to Sheet. right-click S-6 . and click to place the view. 24 In the Views dialog.Steel Details. 21 Right-click S-6 Unnamed. and click Add View. 27 In the Views dialog. and click OK. and click OK. select Section: Section 1. 30 In the Views dialog. expand Sheets (all).17 On the View Control Bar: ■ ■ ■ Click Scale control. elevation. 28 Move the cursor onto the sheet. and click Add View. and click to place the view. Create a sheet and place the section.Steel Details. right-click S-6 . and click Add View. enter Steel Details for Name. and callout views on the sheet 18 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. select Elevation: Callout of West Elevation. and select 3/4" =1' . 25 Move the cursor onto the sheet. 26 In the Project Browser. 332 | Chapter 9 Steel Details .

and save the model to a location of your choice using the following file name: i_RST_DET-in progress.rvt. i_RST_DET-in progress. and a facade support detail to the model. under Elevations (Interior Elevation). 2 On the Toolbar.rvt. Sketch line work 1 In the Project Browser. click braces meet at Level 4. and draw a zoom box around the midpoint of the beam where the Detailing Steel | 333 . Detailing Steel In this lesson. Creating a Welded Bracing Detail Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise.32 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Detailing Steel on page 333. The first part of the exercise involves adding a plate to the underside of a beam to support the bracing. You will sketch the lines in a model view. . a bolted angle detail. double click Elevation 1-a. you add a welded bracing detail. 33 Proceed to the next lesson.

3 Select the left brace. and enter SM to snap to the midpoint. TIP After establishing the line direction. 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 5 Place the cursor near the bottom flange of the beam. and drag the shape handle (two small triangles at the brace end) to move the brace so it is not touching the beam flange. enter the value. 334 | Chapter 9 Steel Details . 6 Sketch a vertical line down 1' -1 3/8" from the bottom flange as shown. click Detail Lines.

enter 2' 6" for Offset.Next. you create 2 detail lines that are offset from this vertical line. and select Copy. 10 Click to place this line. 14 Place the cursor on the bottom flange of the beam as shown. click Detail Lines. and enter 1' 8" for the Offset value. and click to place the detail line. 7 On the Options Bar. Creating a Welded Bracing Detail | 335 . A line displays that is offset from the highlighted line. click Offset. 8 On the Options Bar. select Numerical. 11 Repeat the same steps to place a vertical line on the opposite side. 12 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click . 9 Place the cursor near the vertical line to highlight it. 13 On the Options Bar.

336 | Chapter 9 Steel Details . 16 Enter 3' 9" for the temporary dimension value as shown. click Modify. and sketch 2 detail lines to connect the horizontal line to the vertical lines as shown. click Detail Lines. 17 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.15 On the Design Bar. and select the horizontal detail line.

25 Drag the leader arrowhead to the position as shown. The weld symbol has 4 numerical parameters that are currently set to 0. and click to place it. and select the weld symbol. 24 On the Options Bar. Creating a Welded Bracing Detail | 337 . click Add a Leader. 21 Select the weld symbol. drag it into the view as shown. Repeat for the right bottom value.18 Select the middle vertical line that you used as a reference line. Repeat for the left bottom value. and enter a period. click Modify. Add weld symbols 19 In the Project Browser. 22 Click the right top weld annotation. 20 Click Modify. 23 On the Design Bar. click the left top weld annotation. expand Families ➤ Annotation Symbols ➤ Weld Symbol ➤ Select Both. and press DELETE to delete this element. and enter 3/8.

26 Use the same technique to add another weld symbol as shown. 27 Right-click the new weld symbol. Click OK. 28 In the Element Properties dialog. 338 | Chapter 9 Steel Details . and click Properties. select Weld All Around. Under Graphics. select Weld Contour-Empty for Top Symbol. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Structural.

36 Proceed to the next exercise. click Text. Then you add some annotations. 32 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 34 Draw a leader to the brace and enter L8x8. TYPICAL for text as shown. click . Creating a Bolted Angle Detail Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. click Text. Creating a Bolted Angle Detail | 339 . click . Creating a Bolted Angle Detail on page 339. i_RST_DET-in progress. 35 Click File menu ➤ Save.rvt. you add 2 angles to the model using an angle family that has been loaded into the project. double-click Section 1. 33 On the Options Bar. under Sections. 1 In the Project Browser. In the first part of the exercise.Label the angles and the plate 29 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 30 On the Options Bar. and enter 3/8" PL for text. 31 Draw a text leader to the plate.

click Detail Lines. select L4x4x5/16. 3 Drag the family onto the grid line in the view as shown. 7 On the Options Bar. under Families ➤ Detail Items ➤ L-Angle-Bolted Connection Section. Add annotations 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.2 In the Project Browser. 6 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 5 Sketch a vertical line through the center of the left set of bolts as shown. click . click Text. 340 | Chapter 9 Steel Details .

8 Enter the text notes as shown. under Elevations (Building Elevation). Creating a Facade Support Detail on page 341. In this exercise. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. . 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the Toolbar.rvt. double-click West Elevation. click Level 4 at Grid 4. Creating a Facade Support Detail Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 9 Click File menu ➤ Save. you add members to support exterior wall glazing. i_RST_DET-in progress. and draw a zoom box around the callout at the intersection on Creating a Facade Support Detail | 341 .

and click to place it. select C5x6. On the right side of the view is an imported symbol that represents a curtain wall. 5 Drag the channel onto the drawing area. and select the left side of the column as shown.7. 342 | Chapter 9 Steel Details . 4 In the Project Browser. 7 Press the SPACEBAR to rotate the channel twice. click . You will attach a channel in section to the outrigger for use as a member of the facade support system. 8 On the Edit toolbar. move it to the position shown.3 Double-click the callout head to open Callout of West Elevation. 6 Click Modify and select the channel. expand Families ➤ Detail Items ➤ C-Channel Section.

select the back of the channel as shown. 10 Continue to use the align tool to align the channel to the bottom of the outrigger as shown. Creating a Facade Support Detail | 343 .9 Next.

11 In the Project Browser. 17 Click File menu ➤ Close. a new training file is supplied. click Text. 15 Press ESC twice to exit the Text tool. expand Families ➤ Detail Items ➤ Bolt-Section. You can save the open file if you wish. 18 Proceed to the next lesson. under Sheets. double-click S-6 Steel Detail to view the results of your work in the sheet view. Add annotations 12 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 13 Click the open area outside of the channel and enter C5x6. Creating a Drafting View Detail on page 344.7. and drag it onto the outrigger and channel as shown. Creating a Drafting View Detail In this lesson. you learn how to create a drafting view detail for a deck span transition using the drafting tools provided in Revit Structure. select the bolt. In the next lesson. 16 In the Project Browser. A325 BOLT. 344 | Chapter 9 Steel Details . 14 Click near the bolt and enter 3/4" DIA.

Under Scale. select Detail Component. and double-click Typical Detail .Side: 14K3. select Detail Component. select 1 1/2" = 1' . 7 On the Design bar.rvt. Align the bottom of the joist seat with the top of the beam as shown. click Modify. 2 In the New Drafting dialog. enter Typical Detail . 11 On the Design bar. expand Drafting Views.Creating a Deck Span Transition Detail Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 5 In the Type Selector. 9 In the Type Selector.Section: W18x35. 8 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Deck Span Transition Detail | 345 .Deck Span Transition. 3 In the Project Browser. click Drafting View.0". select K-Series Bar Joist . In the left pane of the Open dialog. 6 Click the drawing area to place the component. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Name. click Training Files. Create the drafting view 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar.Deck Span Transition. select AISC Wide Flange Shapes . click Modify. Click OK. and open Imperial\i_RST_Deck_Span_Detail. 10 Position the joist on the right side of the beam. Load detail components 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

select Detail Component.12 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 20 Place the tube on the top flange of the steel beam directly next to the end of the joist seat as shown. select Roof Decking-Side: 1. select Detail Component. 15 Move the pointer to the right to begin placing the deck. 17 On the Design bar. click Modify. 346 | Chapter 9 Steel Details . 21 On the Design bar. 19 In the Type Selector. select Repeating Detail. 14 Click the end of the joist. click Modify. 18 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 13 In the Type Selector. select Repeating Detail : Metal Deck. 24 Align the bottom of the decking with the top of the joist and move the deck to the left approximately as shown.Section: HSS2-1/2x2-1/2x. and continue to move the pointer to the right until the deck is drawn as shown. 23 In the Type Selector.5 WR 22. 16 Press the SPACEBAR to rotate the orientation of the deck.125. select AISC Tube Shapes . 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

click Modify. click ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . drag it into the view as shown. and on the Options Bar. Click OK. select Detail Component. and select Symbol Right. and align the top of the joist with the bottom of the deck as shown. and click to place it. select K-Series Bar Joist-Section: 14K3. 26 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Enter 3/16" for Bottom Weld Size. 31 On the Design Bar. Enter 2 @ 12 for Bottom Weld Length. 28 Place the joist to the left of the beam. click Modify. change the following instance parameters: Under Structural. Under Other. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. Add weld symbols 30 In the Project Browser. expand Families ➤ Annotation Symbols ➤ Weld Symbol ➤ select the bottom.25 On the Design bar. clear Symbol Left. select Field Weld. 29 On the Design bar. click Modify. Creating a Deck Span Transition Detail | 347 . 32 Select the weld symbol. 27 In the Type Selector.

41 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Add a Leader. click . 348 | Chapter 9 Steel Details . Add text to the detail view 37 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Text.34 On the Design Bar. 35 On the Options Bar. 36 Drag the leader arrowhead to the position as shown. click Text. 42 Repeat the previous steps to add the remaining text and leader to the detail view as shown. 40 On the Design bar. and select the weld symbol. click Modify. click Modify. 39 Draw a text leader to the steel deck and enter STL DECK SEE PLAN for text. 38 On the Options Bar.

44 Proceed to the next tutorial.43 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and navigate to a folder location of your choice. Creating a Deck Span Transition Detail | 349 . Concrete Reinforcement Modelling on page 351.

350 .

you model reinforcement in a concrete beam. using the Revit Structure rebar shapes library. Reinforcement in a Beam In this exercise.Concrete Reinforcement Modelling 10 In this tutorial. Each exercise shows how specific reinforcement elements are built while demonstrating the modelling capabilities of Revit Structure. 351 . you learn how to model reinforcement using the sketching tools and rebar library provided with Revit Structure. you learn how to use Revit Structure 2009 to model concrete reinforcement from the structural project. This tutorial comprises the following concrete reinforcement modelling exercises: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Reinforcement in a Beam Reinforcement in a Column Area Reinforcement in a Structural Wall Area Reinforcement in a Slab Path Reinforcement in a Slab Sketching Reinforcement in a Footing Sketching Reinforcement in a Structural Wall Concrete Modelling Examples In this lesson.

352 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling .Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Imperial\i_RST_Concrete_Reinf. under Detail Views (Detail). In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. Launch the rebar shape browser 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. The Rebar Shape Browser launches. click Rebar ➤ Place Rebar Parallel. Open detail view 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Beam Detail. 2 On the Toolbar. click .rvt. Some of the rebar line weights were increased in the illustrations for training purposes. and draw a pick box around the section view of the beam located in the center of the drawing area. positioned to the right of the drawing area. NOTE The line weights in your file may differ from the examples shown. The active rebar shape is highlighted and corresponds to the shape specified on the Options bar. This browser provides multiple rebar shape types that can be placed within the specified host.

7 Click the bottom edge of the beam to place the rebar. For training purposes. Place rebar parallel to the beam face 4 In the Type Selector. 6 Hover over the section view. Notice that the rebar shape changes as you select a different beam edge.NOTE You can open or close the Rebar Shape Browser by clicking on the Options Bar. scroll down the list of available shapes. 5 Click in the Rebar Shape Browser. the Rebar Shape Library is already loaded in this training file. select Rebar Bar: #4. The library is located in the Rebar Shapes folder in the Imperial Library. Reinforcement in a Beam | 353 . and select Rebar Shape: S3.

14 Place 2 rebar in the detail view. click Rebar ➤ Place Rebar Perpendicular. approximately as shown. 17 Click in the Rebar Shape Browser. Set rebar spacing 11 Select the rebar shapes that you placed in the previous steps. For Spacing. scroll down the list of available shapes. click Modify. 354 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . Place rebar perpendicular to the beam face 12 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and select Rebar Shape: T9. 13 Click in the Rebar Shape Browser. and on the Options Bar. 16 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 10 On the Design Bar. do the following: ■ ■ For Layout. enter 0’ 6”.8 Click in the Rebar Shape Browser. select Maximum Spacing. click Rebar ➤ Place Rebar Perpendicular. scroll down the list of available shapes. click Modify. 9 Click the top edge of the view to place the rebar. and select Rebar Shape: 01. scroll down the list of available shapes. and select Rebar Shape: 01. 15 On the Design Bar.

and on the Options Bar. select Fixed Number. click Modify. Set rebar spacing 20 Select the single rebar that you just placed. select Rebar Bar: #6. For Layout. 21 On the Design Bar. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For Rebar Size. Reinforcement in a Beam | 355 . enter 4.18 Pace a single rebar at the bottom of the detail view. Set rebar visibility 22 Draw a pick box to select the rebar as shown. click Modify. 19 On the Design Bar. approximately as shown. For Quantity.

and draw a zoom box around the beam as shown 356 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . select both View unobscured and View as solid. click . 24 In the Element Properties dialog. 25 In the Rebar Element View Visibility States dialog. 28 On the View Control Bar. for 3D View. click OK. click Edit for View Visibility States. 30 On the Toolbar. double-click 3D. under 3D Views. select Detail Level: Fine. and click OK.23 On the Options Bar. click . 26 In the Element Properties dialog. View rebar in 3D 27 In the Project Browser. 29 Click or drag the ViewCube to re-orient the view until the south side of the structure is visible. under Graphics.

. click 32 Select the rebar as shown.Notice that the rebar sets are visible. Reinforcement in a Beam | 357 . and draw a zoom box around the end of the beam. Modify the rebar length 31 On the Toolbar.

The next exercise uses a new training file. Reinforcement in a Column on page 359. 34 Click File menu ➤ Close. click File menu ➤ Save As. To save changes.33 Click and drag the rebar shape handles to change the length of the rebar as required. and save the exercise file with a unique name. or close the exercise file without saving changes. 358 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . 35 Proceed to the next exercise.

click Rebar ➤ Place Rebar Parallel. 2 On the Toolbar.rvt. The active rebar shape is highlighted and corresponds to the shape specified on the Options bar. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and draw a pick box around the section view of the column located in the center of the drawing area. Some of the rebar line weights were increased in the illustrations for training purposes. using the Revit Structure rebar shapes library. The Rebar Shape Browser launches. double-click Column Detail.Reinforcement in a Column In this exercise. you model reinforcement in a concrete column. under Detail Views (Detail). Open detail view 1 In the Project Browser. Launch the rebar shape browser 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. This browser provides multiple rebar shape types that can be placed within the specified host. positioned to the right of the drawing area. NOTE The line weights in your file may differ from the examples shown. and open Imperial\i_RST_Concrete_Reinf. click . In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. Reinforcement in a Column | 359 .

NOTE You can open or close the Rebar Shape Browser by clicking on the Options Bar. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For Rebar Size. 6 Hover over the section view. and select Rebar Shape: T1. The library is located in the Rebar Shapes folder in the Imperial Library. Place rebar parallel to the column face 4 In the Type Selector. click Modify. enter 0’ 3”. the Rebar Shape Library is already loaded in this training file. 360 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . Notice that the rebar shape changes as you select a different column edge. 5 Click in the Rebar Shape Browser. select Maximum Spacing. select Rebar Bar: #4. For training purposes. 7 Click the bottom edge of the column to place the rebar as shown. Set rebar spacing 9 Select the rebar that you just placed. For Spacing. For Layout. and on the Options Bar. select Rebar Bar: #4. 8 On the Design Bar. scroll down the list of available shapes.

as shown. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For Rebar Size. select Fixed Number. For Layout. scroll down the list of available shapes. enter 3. 12 Click on the Rebar Shape Browser. click Modify. click Modify. Set rebar spacing 14 Select the single rebar. 15 On the Design Bar. 17 On the Edit toolbar. click Rebar ➤ Place Rebar Perpendicular. Copy the rebar 16 Select the rebar. 13 Click to place a single rebar as shown. select Rebar Bar: #8. and select Rebar Shape: 00. For Quantity. click (Copy).10 On the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. Reinforcement in a Column | 361 . 18 Click the rebar centerline as the copy starting point. Place rebar perpendicular to the column face 11 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

19 Move the cursor to the opposite side of the column to select the copy end point as shown. Set rebar visibility 21 Select the rebar in the detail view as shown. click Modify. 362 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . 20 On the Design Bar.

click OK. 24 In the Rebar Element View Visibility States dialog. double-click 3D. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. under 3D Views. and click OK. select both View unobscured and View as solid. for 3D View. click Edit for View Visibility States. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. select Detail Level: Fine. click . and draw a zoom box around the column as shown Reinforcement in a Column | 363 . View rebar in 3D 26 In the Project Browser. under Graphics. 28 Click or drag the ViewCube to re-orient the view until the south side of the structure is visible. 29 On the Toolbar.22 On the Options Bar. click . 27 On the View Control Bar.

Area Reinforcement in a Structural Wall on page 364. or close the exercise file without saving changes. you model area reinforcement in a structural wall. To save changes. click File menu ➤ Save As. 364 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling .rvt. Area Reinforcement in a Structural Wall In this exercise. 31 Proceed to the next exercise. 30 Click File menu ➤ Close. The next exercise uses a new training file. click Training Files. and save the exercise file with a unique name. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Imperial\i_RST_Area_Reinf_Wall.Notice that the rebar sets are visible. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

0" for Scale.Create a section view 1 In the Project Browser. NOTE The line weights in your file may differ from the examples shown. 4 Add a section line that cuts through the north wall of the structure as shown. click . under Structural Plans. 2 On the Toolbar. Some of the rebar line weights were increased in the illustrations for training purposes. 7 In the section view. select 3/4" = 1' . Area Reinforcement in a Structural Wall | 365 . 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 5 Double-click the section bubble to open the section view. click Section. select the crop view. 6 On the View Control Bar. and drag the controls to resize the view such that only the foundation wall is shown. double-click Garage Level-1. and draw a zoom box around the upper north wall of the structure.

under 3D Views. 9 In the Project Browser. 366 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . double-click 3D.Sketch the area reinforcement 8 Select the foundation wall.

12 On the Design Bar. click (Sketch Area Reinforcement) to enter sketch mode. The foundation wall will be highlighted as shown below.10 Use the ViewCube to rotate the model so the north side of the structure is visible. Area Reinforcement in a Structural Wall | 367 . click Lines. 11 On the Options Bar. and trace the outline of the foundation wall as shown.

Bars will be placed parallel to the major direction near both wall faces. To change the major direction. adjacent to the major bars. 368 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . click Major Direction Edge. and select one of the horizontal lines of the outline. 13 On the Design Bar.NOTE The 2 short lines adjacent to the vertical line of the outline represent the rebar major direction. double-click Section 3. The area reinforcement is automatically applied to the selected foundation wall. click Finish Sketch. 14 In the Project Browser. on the Design Bar. Minor bars will be placed perpendicular (inside position) to the major bars (outside position). under Sections (Building Sections). and is indicated on the 3D view with an X as shown.

Area Reinforcement in a Structural Wall | 369 . Remove the major bars 15 Select the area reinforcement.The area reinforcement for the foundation wall is displayed.

click . under Layers. clear the values for Exterior Major Direction and Interior Major Direction.Notice the graphical controls to toggle the hook orientation appear at the base of the reinforcement. and click OK. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. 370 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . 16 On the Options Bar.

for Value.Notice the rebar for the major span direction of the foundation wall is deleted from the section view. and that the minor bars move out to the clear cover setting for the wall. For Exterior Minor Number of Lines. Reselect Interior Major Direction and Exterior Major Direction. For Interior Major Number of Lines. enter 30. under Layers. Click OK. and click OK. enter 30. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Exterior Major Number of Lines. enter 30. under Construction. enter 30. For Interior Minor Number of Lines. select Fixed Number. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. Area Reinforcement in a Structural Wall | 371 . Change the number of rebar for the exterior and interior layers 18 In the Element Properties dialog.

click Add annotation 24 Right-click in an empty part of the drawing area. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify. 28 Using the drag control. 27 On the Design Bar. 22 On the Options Bar. Change bar type 21 Select the Area Reinforcement. 372 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling .Notice that additional bars are added to the section view. click Tag ➤ By Category. and click OK. and click Zoom to Fit. 20 On the Design Bar. 25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. 26 Click the area reinforcement to place the tag. move the area reinforcement tag approximately as shown. change all Bar Types to #4. under Layers. .

Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Create a section view 1 In the Project Browser. or close the exercise file without saving changes. To save changes. click Training Files. under Structural Plans. and draw a zoom box around the circular foundation on the north side of the structure as shown.rvt.29 Click File menu ➤ Close. Area Reinforcement in a Slab In this exercise. and open Imperial\i_RST_Area_Reinf_Slab. The next exercise uses a new training file. Area Reinforcement in a Slab | 373 . NOTE The line weights in your file may differ from the examples shown. Area Reinforcement in a Slab on page 373. double-click Garage Level-1. Some of the rebar line weights were increased in the illustrations for training purposes. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 2 On the Toolbar. you model area reinforcement in a concrete slab. click . In the left pane of the Open dialog. 30 Proceed to the next exercise. click File menu ➤ Save As.

select the crop view. select 1/4" = 1' .3 On the View tab of the Design Bar.0". select Fine. click Section. 7 In the section view. select Shading w/Edges. 374 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . 5 Double-click the section head to open the section view. 6 On the View Control Bar. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For Scale. 4 Add a section line that cuts through the circular foundation as shown. For Detail Level. and drag the controls to resize the view such that only the concrete slab on Garage Level-1 is shown. For Model Graphics Style.

Sketch the area reinforcement 8 In the Project Browser. under Structural Plans. click . Area Reinforcement in a Slab | 375 . 10 On the Options Bar. 9 Select the concrete slab as shown. draw an area reinforcement box as shown. 11 Using the line tool. double-click Garage Level -1. to enter sketch mode.

12 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. double-click Section 4. 376 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . 13 In the Project Browser. under Sections (Building Sections).

under Layers. Notice the graphical controls to toggle the hook orientation appear at each end of the area reinforcement. 23 Select the rebar tag. and click OK. click Modify. 24 Using the drag control. click Modify.The area reinforcement for the slab is displayed. under Layers. clear Top Major Direction. 19 On the Design Bar. Add annotation 20 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. move the rebar tag approximately as shown. click Tag ➤ By Category. and on the Options Bar. change all Bar Types to #4. click . Change bar type 17 On the Options Bar. Change the area reinforcement properties 14 Select the area reinforcement. select Attached End. and click OK. click . 22 On the Design Bar. 21 Click the area reinforcement to place the tag. 16 In the Element Properties dialog. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. Area Reinforcement in a Slab | 377 . 15 On the Options Bar. Notice the bars in the top major direction are deleted from the section view.

The next exercise uses a new training file. you model path reinforcement in a concrete slab. click Rebar ➤ Sketch Path Reinforcement. double-click Level 3. click File menu ➤ Save As. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. You are now in sketch mode. and save the exercise file with a unique name.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Structural Plans. and draw a zoom box around the slab opening on the north side of the structure as shown. Path Reinforcement in a Slab on page 378. click . To save changes. Sketch the path reinforcement 1 In the Project Browser. Path Reinforcement in a Slab In this exercise. 26 Proceed to the next exercise. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.25 Click File menu ➤ Close. 378 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . 2 On the Toolbar. click Training Files. or close the exercise file without saving changes. 4 Select the slab opening. and open Imperial\i_RST_Path_Reinf.

8 On the Design Bar.5 On the Options Bar. click Finish Sketch. NOTE The lines you sketch for the path reinforcement box cannot intersect and must not form a closed loop. Path Reinforcement in a Slab | 379 . click . 6 Draw a path reinforcement box approximately as shown. Change bar type 9 Select the Path Reinforcement. 7 On the Design Bar. click Modify. The path reinforcement for the slab opening is displayed. and enter 1' 0" for Offset.

380 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . and click OK. For Detail Level. for Primary Bar . click Create a section view . click Modify. select #4. select Fine. 16 On the View Control Bar. 17 In the section view. select 1/4" = 1' .10 On the Options Bar.0". do the following: ■ ■ ■ For Scale. click Section. under Layers. 12 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select the crop view. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. 14 On the Design Bar. For Model Graphics Style. 13 Add a section line that cuts through the slab opening as shown. select Shading w/Edges. and drag the controls to resize the view such that only the edge of the opening in the slab and the path reinforcement on Level 3 is shown.Type. 15 Double-click the section head to open the section view.

NOTE The line weights in your file may differ from the examples shown. Path Reinforcement in a Slab | 381 . Notice the toggle hook orientation icon appears. 23 On the Design Bar. 24 Select the rebar tag. and draw a zoom box around the edge of the slab opening. move the rebar tag approximately as shown. 22 Click the path reinforcement to place the tag. click 19 Select the rebar. select Free End. and on the Options Bar. 20 Click the toggle control to change the rebar hook type as shown. click Tag ➤ By Category. click Modify. . Some of the rebar line weights were increased in the illustrations for training purposes. 25 Using the drag control. Add annotation 21 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Change rebar properties 18 On the Toolbar.

or close the exercise file without saving changes. The next exercise uses a new training file. and save the exercise file with a unique name. double-click Ground Level. click structure. under Structural Plans.26 Click File menu ➤ Close. . click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you use the tools provided with Revit Structure to sketch reinforcement in a concrete footing. click File menu ➤ Save As. 2 On the Toolbar. Sketch Reinforcement in a Footing on page 382. and position the upper drag bar as shown. and open Imperial\i_RST_Footing_Detail. To save changes. draw a pick box. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. NOTE The line weights in your file may differ from the examples shown. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. Some of the rebar line weights were increased in the illustrations for training purposes. Open section view 1 In the Project Browser. Sketch Reinforcement in a Footing In this exercise. and zoom in on the southwest corner of the 3 Click the section line. 382 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling .

Sketch Reinforcement in a Footing | 383 . Add wall keys at the bottom of wall 6 On the Toolbar. The Section 1 view opens. click . and draw a zoom box around the wall footing as shown. 5 Double-click the section bubble.4 Press ESC.

384 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . 10 On the Design Bar. Sketch 3 lines as shown. 7 On the Toolbar.NOTE For training purposes. 8 On the Options Bar. click Finish Sketch. select Boundary between faces. 11 On the Design Bar. and click (Line). select Chain. click (Draw). 9 Select the boundary between the wall and footing. Model Graphics Style is set to Shading w/Edges (on the View Control Bar). click (Edit Cut Profile).

16 Press ESC. click Sketch. click Rebar ➤ Place Rebar Parallel. 20 Select the continuous footing as the host element. 13 On the Options Bar. The Design Bar changes to sketch mode. 17 On the Sketch tab. 19 On the Options Bar. click Sketch. 15 Sketch a straight bar by clicking inside the footing first and then moving the cursor to the right as shown. Sketch rebar parallel to the footing and wall 18 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.Sketch rebar parallel to the footing 12 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 14 Select the continuous footing as the host element. 21 Sketch a rebar by clicking inside the footing first and then moving the cursor into the wall as shown. Sketch Reinforcement in a Footing | 385 . click Rebar ➤ Place Rebar Parallel. click Finish Sketch.

NOTE Be sure to sketch from the footing to the wall. for Hook At Start. under Construction. NOTE Rebar only contributes to the estimated reinforcement volume of its host. This rebar will not be included in rebar estimates of the structural wall. and click Element Properties. 386 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . 26 Click OK.90 deg. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. 23 On the Sketch tab. select Standard . click Finish Sketch. 22 Press ESC. Add hook 24 Right-click the rebar you added in the previous steps.

click wall. Sketch Reinforcement in a Footing | 387 . click Rebar ➤ Place Rebar Perpendicular. and select the center reference plane of the structural 28 Click to place the rebar. select Rebar Bar: #8. 31 Select the end of the straight bar. (Mirror).Mirror the rebar 27 On the Options Bar. 30 In the Type Selector. Place rebar perpendicular 29 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and place the pointer between the hooked and straight bars approximately as shown.

388 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . select Minimum Clear Spacing.Notice the footing cover settings display when placing the rebar. 35 Press the SPACEBAR to change the direction of rebar placement. 33 On the Design Bar. enter 4". 36 On the Options Bar. do the following: ■ ■ For Layout. Place rebar set 34 Select the single rebar. 32 Click to place the first rebar as shown. 38 Drag the shape handles so the rebar set aligns with the end of the horizontal rebar as shown. click Modify. 37 Select the rebar set. For Spacing.

Set rebar cover by element 40 On the Toolbar. click 42 Select the footing. Notice the default rebar cover settings are displayed in the section view as dotted lines. click (Edit Rebar Cover).39 On the Design Bar. Sketch Reinforcement in a Footing | 389 . 41 On the Options Bar. click Modify. (Pick Elements).

. Click OK. enter Exposed/Cast against Earth.43 On the Options Bar. 390 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . click ■ ■ ■ ■ (Edit Cover Settings). enter 0' 2". (Pick Faces). For Setting. click 46 On the Options Bar. Notice that the rebar cover has changed to the new setting. 47 Select the face of the structural wall. 44 On the Rebar Cover Settings dialog. For Description. do the following: Click Add. Set rebar cover by face 45 On the Toolbar.

Click OK. do the following: Under Description. 49 On the Rebar Cover Settings dialog. click Dimension. Sketch Reinforcement in a Footing | 391 . select Exposed/Cast against Earth. Check rebar clear spacing 51 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.48 On the Options Bar. Notice the rebar cover has changed to the new setting. 52 Move the cursor over the first rebar in the footing array as shown. click ■ ■ . 50 Repeat the same process to set the rebar cover on the opposite face of the structural wall.

392 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . NOTE The dimension is placed to check the clear space distance from the concrete face to the rebar array. 55 Click File menu ➤ Close. Delete the dimension after verifying the clearance requirements have been met. click File menu ➤ Save As. The next exercise uses a new training file. 56 Proceed to the next exercise. Sketch Reinforcement in a Structural Wall on page 393. and save the exercise file with a unique name.The vertical snapping plane of the bar is highlighted. and move the cursor to the edge of the footing as shown. To save changes. 53 Click to select this plane. or close the exercise file without saving changes. 54 Click to select this plane and place the dimension.

click Section. 5 On the Design Bar. click Modify. click Training Files. NOTE The line weights in your file may differ from the examples shown. Some of the rebar line weights were increased in the illustrations for training purposes. Create section view 1 In the Project Browser. 6 Click the section line. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. . double-click Garage Level . click structure. and click the outside wall to place the section as shown. draw a pick box. and position the drag bar as shown. under Structural Plans. 2 On the Toolbar. move the cursor down. Sketch Reinforcement in a Structural Wall | 393 . you use the tools provided with Revit Structure to sketch reinforcement in a structural wall. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 Click inside the wall between grid lines B and C.rvt. and zoom in on the southwest corner of the 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and open Imperial\i_RST_Wall_Detail.1.Sketch Reinforcement in a Structural Wall In this exercise.

select the crop view.7 Press ESC. The Section 2 view opens. 10 On the View Control Bar: ■ ■ ■ Click Scale control. and drag the controls to resize the view such that only the foundation wall is shown. 8 Double-click the section bubble. 394 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . Click Detail Level ➤ Fine. Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. and select 3/4" = 1'. 9 In the section view.0".

as shown. Place horizontal rebar 11 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Place rebar set 15 Select the single rebar. 17 On the Options Bar. 16 Press the SPACEBAR. the graphics style is used to display detail in the section view. 12 In the Type Selector. do the following: ■ For Layout. select Maximum Spacing.NOTE For training purposes. Sketch Reinforcement in a Structural Wall | 395 . 13 Place the rebar at the base of the wall approximately as shown. click Modify. 14 On the Design Bar. click Rebar ➤ Place Rebar Perpendicular. until a vertical line appears indicating the direction of placement. select Rebar Bar : #7.

click (Mirror). and zoom in on the Ground Level of the structure. click Modify. 23 Move the cursor to the right until the center line reference plane of the wall appears as shown. 20 On the Design Bar. Mirror the rebar set 21 Select the rebar set. 396 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling .1. click . and drag the rebar shape handle down to Garage Level . draw a zoom box. 19 Select the rebar set. The quantity of rebar adjusts to the extents of the structural wall on the garage level. enter 1' 6". 22 On the Edit toolbar.■ For Spacing. Resize the rebar set 18 On the Toolbar.

click Rebar ➤ Place Rebar Parallel. 26 On the Toolbar.24 Click to place the rebar. and draw a zoom box around the lower half of the wall. click Sketch. 29 Select the concrete wall as the rebar host. Place vertical rebar 25 Right-click in an empty part of the drawing area. Sketch Reinforcement in a Structural Wall | 397 . and click Zoom to Fit. 28 On the Options Bar. 27 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click .

click . 37 Move the cursor over the wall until the center line reference plane appears. 33 Press ESC. Mirror the rebar 35 Click the vertical rebar. 36 On the Edit toolbar.You are now in sketch mode. 34 On the Design Bar. 32 Click to place the rebar. click Finish Sketch. Notice the cursor snaps to the rebar cover.1. 31 Drag the sketch line up towards the top of the wall at Garage Level . 398 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . 30 Click the base of the structural wall to establish the sketch start point.

38 Click to place the rebar. Sketch Reinforcement in a Structural Wall | 399 . Set rebar visibility 39 Select the outside vertical rebar as shown.

40 Press CTRL. and select the outside horizontal rebar as shown. 400 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling .

click OK. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. 45 In the Project Browser. select View unobscured and View as solid. and click OK. 43 In the Rebar Element View Visibility States dialog. under 3D Views. click . under Graphics. click Edit for View Visibility States. double-click 3D. for 3D View. Sketch Reinforcement in a Structural Wall | 401 . 46 Click or drag the ViewCube to re-orient the view until the garage ramp side of the structure is visible.41 On the Options Bar. 42 In the Element Properties dialog.

The rebar automatically extends the entire length of the garage wall. click File menu ➤ Save As.47 On the Toolbar. To save changes. 49 Click File menu ➤ Close. and save the exercise file with a unique name. and draw a zoom box around the garage ramp. enter 1' 6". Notice the rebar is visible. and on the Options Bar. Annotating and Dimensioning on page 403. select Maximum Spacing. For Spacing. do the following: ■ ■ For Layout. Extend the vertical rebar for the garage wall 48 Select the single rebar. or close the exercise file without saving changes. 50 Proceed to the next tutorial. 402 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . click .

click Training Files. linear. you learn how to create permanent dimensions to control and document your designs.rvt. The dimension types include aligned. you learn how to create and modify different types of permanent dimensions that you can add to your drawings. click Dimension. Permanent dimensions must be explicitly created. 4 When the centerline of the wall highlights. move the cursor over the north wall of the proposed North Building. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select it. Dimensioning In this lesson. angular. By default. dimensions are aligned and snap to wall centerlines.Annotating and Dimensioning 11 In this tutorial. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. and double-click Floor. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. The default dimensioning options display on the Options Bar. 403 . radial. Temporary dimensions display automatically when you create and insert components and select existing components. baseline. you learn how to annotate and dimension your Revit Structure 2009 projects. In Revit Structure. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. there are 2 types of dimensions: temporary and permanent. multi-segmented. and open Imperial\i_RST_Dimensioning. Create permanent dimensions 1 In the Project Browser. Creating Dimensions In this exercise. and ordinate. 3 Without making any changes on the Options Bar.

select it. and click to place the dimension.5 Move the cursor toward the south wall and when the centerline of the wall highlights. 404 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . 6 Move the cursor to the left. toward the empty space outside the wall.

select Wall faces for Prefer. 13 On the Options Bar. Creating Dimensions | 405 . 11 Select the dimension. 9 Select the north wall and move it upward. click the lock to unlock it. and press DELETE.The dimension displays in the drawing. click Create a multi-segmented dimension 12 On the Design Bar. indicating that you cannot change the distance between the referenced walls without first unlocking the dimension. (Undo). 14 Select the north and south walls of the North Building. indicating that the dimension can be modified. click Modify. 10 On the Toolbar. click Dimension. and the distance between them does not change because the dimension is constrained. A lock symbol that is unlocked displays next to it. 7 Click the lock. 16 Select the exterior faces of the top and bottom walls of the South Building. 8 On the Design Bar. and click to set the dimension location. select Wall centerlines for Prefer. The lock displays as locked. Notice that the south wall moves with the north wall. 17 Move the cursor to the left of the South Building. 15 On the Options Bar.

Create a radial dimension 18 On the Design Bar. In addition. and draw a zoom box around the curved wall. an equal symbol with a slash through it is displayed. and select Wall centerlines for Prefer. 20 Dimension a curved wall of the North Building: Select the southwest corner wall to display the radial dimension.An unlocked lock symbol displays next to each dimension segment. click Dimension. and click to place the dimension. Move the cursor to the inside of the curved wall. 19 On the Options Bar. 406 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . 21 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. indicating that the dimension segments are not equal in length. click ■ ■ (Create Radial Dimensions).

and verify that Wall faces is selected 28 Dimension the angled wall at the top left of the North Building: Select the inside face of the angled wall below the opening. ■ (Create Angular Dimensions). and place the dimension as shown. click Dimension. 22 On the Design Bar. 25 Dimension the curved wall again: Move your cursor over the inside face of the wall until it highlights. click ■ ■ . ■ Creating Dimensions | 407 . select the dimension line of the radial dimension. and click to place the dimension. and then select the inside face of the vertical wall below it. the default dimension option. click for Prefer. Select the inside face of the wall. Move your cursor to the right to size the dimension arc. 24 On the Options Bar. 26 Adjust the zoom settings so that you can add a dimension to the upper-left portion of the North Building.The dimension is snapped to the wall centerline. Create an angular dimension 27 On the Options Bar. as shown. and press DELETE. 23 On the Design Bar. click Modify. and select Wall faces for Prefer.

Create a baseline dimension 32 On the Toolbar. do the following: ■ ■ Under Graphics. 37 In the Element Properties dialog. 38 Select the reference line for grid 1 to start the dimension string as shown. . and depends on the cursor tracking behavior. Select the interior corner of the bottom left wall join of the room. click Edit/New. Click Apply. click OK. 33 On the Design Bar. You can override the cursor tracking by pressing the SPACEBAR. Notice that the Prefer and Pick options are no longer available on the Options Bar. click (Create Horizontal or Vertical Dimensions). 35 In the Element Properties dialog. and OK. select Baseline. select a point at the interior corner of the top left wall join. The linear dimension tool has a more restricted selection filter so that you can select only points. ■ ■ 31 On the Design Bar. 30 Dimension interior walls in the South Building: ■ In the top room on the left side of the building. 34 On the Options Bar. and zoom in on the footings located just outside the exterior wall of the south building as shown. click . 36 In the Type Properties dialog. click Dimension. click . The dimension is always constrained to either the horizontal or vertical axis. click Modify. 408 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . and click to place the dimension. Move your cursor to the right. for Dimension String Type.Create a linear dimension 29 On the Options Bar.

40 Select the reference lines for grids 4 and 5 to place the remaining dimensions as shown. Notice the multiple dimensions display the distance from the same baseline (grid 1). click . . Create an ordinate dimension 42 Select the baseline dimensions placed in the previous steps. click Edit/New. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. for Dimension String Type. 46 In the Element Properties dialog. 41 On the Design Bar. click OK. 43 On the Options Bar. select Ordinate. Creating Dimensions | 409 . click Modify. do the following: ■ ■ Under Graphics. Click Apply.39 Select the reference line for grids 2 and 3 as shown. 45 In the Type Properties dialog. and OK.

48 In the Dimension Text dialog.A. and save the model to a location of your choice using the following file name: i_RST_Dimensioning-in progress.I. 51 On the Design Bar. Notice the new text appears below the supplemental text. (See Architectural Drawing). and enter S. 52 Click File menu ➤ Save As. enter V. to each additional element (grids 2 through 5). 53 Proceed to the next exercise. Add supplemental text to a permanent dimension 47 Click the value for the ordinate dimension at grid 2.6" Click Apply and OK. Notice the dimension value is replaced with the new text S.M.rvt.F.A. Controlling Witness Line Location on page 411. do the following: ■ ■ Under Dimension value. +/. 50 In the Dimension Text dialog. 49 Click the dimension text placed in the last step. under Text Fields. do the following: ■ ■ For Below. click Modify.Notice the perpendicular dimensions display the distance from the origin point or datum (grid 1).D. click Replace with Text. Click Apply and OK. 410 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning .

For example. Each time you press TAB. and select the exterior face. you may need to override their settings on an instance basis. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. a different wall selection choice highlights. and select the exterior face. 9 Move the cursor to the top horizontal wall of the South Building. i_RST_Dimensioning-in progress. delete. including the wall centerline.rvt Override dimension defaults 1 Delete the multi-segmented vertical dimension that you placed along the left side of the building model in the previous exercise.Controlling Witness Line Location In this exercise. you specify their origin on the Options Bar. 5 Alternate the cursor position over the inner and outer wall face. 3 On the Options Bar. but do not select anything. However. verify that Wall faces is selected for Prefer. 6 Position the cursor over the wall. whereas the witness lines referring to interior walls would be located on the centerline of each wall. select it. because the Prefer wall faces option is selected instead of the Prefer wall centerline option. 8 Move the cursor over the south wall of the North Building. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Notice that only the wall faces highlight when you move the cursor over them. When you place dimensions. 11 Place the dimension as shown. click Dimension. 7 When the exterior face of the wall highlights. and press TAB repeatedly. press TAB until the wall centerline highlights. you learn to add. Controlling Witness Line Location | 411 . and change the origin of dimension witness lines. and select it. 4 Move the cursor over the north wall of the North Building. you may want to locate the 2 outermost witness lines on the exterior face of each wall. for a multi-segmented dimension. in some cases. 10 Move the cursor to the south wall of the South Building.

Edit dimension witness lines 12 On the Design Bar. and control boxes display on each witness line. 13 Select the dimension that you just placed. 412 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . The dimension highlights. click Modify.

14 Click twice on the control box on the witness line that references the south wall of the North Building. The witness line is deleted. 16 Move the cursor to the control box on the witness line that references the north wall of the South Building. 17 Right-click the control box. but do not select it. The witness line moves to interior wall face. Controlling Witness Line Location | 413 . 15 Click the control box again. and click Delete Witness Line. The witness line moves to the wall centerline.

click in the drawing area away from the floor plan. i_RST_Dimensioning-in progress. click Modify. and select the multi-segmented dimension that you modified in the previous exercise. 21 Click File menu ➤ Save. 414 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . IMPORTANT Be careful to right-click the witness line and not the control box on the witness line. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Edit/New. The full dimension string is displayed. Modifying Dimension Properties In this exercise. 2 On the Options Bar.rvt. 19 Select the outside face of the north wall of the South Building. a context menu with different options is displayed. 22 Proceed to the next exercise. Change the type parameters of the floor plan dimensions 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. If you right-click the control box. 20 To end the editing command. and click Edit Witness Lines. you learn to modify the type parameters of dimensions.18 Right-click the dimension line that references the face of the south wall of the North Building. Modifying Dimension Properties on page 414. click . 3 In the Element Properties dialog.

you learn to align components and lock their alignment to better work with them in your drawings. click Training Files. allowing you to lock the alignment of the walls. when sketching walls. A locked alignment is a constraint that is maintained if any of the aligned components are moved or modified. Under Text. Aligning components is similar to dimensioning components with a value of zero. a lock symbol immediately displays. For example. a new training file is provided. In the left pane of the Open dialog. In the next exercise. Working with Alignments and Constraints on page 415. You can save the open file if you wish.4 In the Type Properties dialog. select Right. then Up for Read Convention. This controls which side (of the dimensioning arrow) the text is on. The dimension updates as shown. click Modify. alignments can be made and locked with minimal effort. change the following type parameter values: ■ ■ Under Text. enter 3/16" for the Text Size. Working with Alignments and Constraints In this exercise. and open Imperial\i_RST_Alignment. Working with Alignments and Constraints | 415 . if 2 or more walls are colinear.rvt. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 5 Click OK twice. not the direction it is read. 7 Click File menu ➤ Close. 6 On the Design Bar. As you create components.

Align the 2 uppermost horizontal walls in the floor plan 1 On the Toolbar. The cursor displays 2 arrows at its tip. indicating that the alignment of the 2 walls is now locked. while the second component moves to complete the alignment. click (Align). 3 Click the lock. 416 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . 5 Select the lower center wall to define it as the target fixed wall to which the other walls will align. and select Wall centerlines for Prefer. The symbol changes to a closed lock. The shorter horizontal wall on the left moves to align with the upper horizontal wall. When you align 2 components. indicating that the Align command is active. indicating the 2 walls are not constrained to each other. 2 Align the walls: ■ ■ Select the exterior face of the uppermost horizontal wall. The lock symbol displays as unlocked. Select the exterior face of the shorter horizontal wall on the left. select Multiple Alignment. Align the 3 short horizontal walls 4 On the Options Bar. the first component that you select is the target and remains fixed in position. 6 Select the short wall to the left.

and drag it downward. 11 On the Toolbar. 8 Select the short horizontal wall on the right. 12 Click the right wall. Do not lock this segment of the alignment. 9 On the Design Bar. click Modify.7 Click the lock to lock the alignment of the walls. 10 Select the middle horizontal wall. and then click the lock to align the wall with the middle wall. but the wall on the right does not because the alignment between the 2 walls is not constrained (locked). Working with Alignments and Constraints | 417 . The wall on the left moves with the middle wall when you drag it. click (Undo) once to undo the move.

418 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning .Move the walls to verify the alignment. 16 Select the window on the far left in the lower wall. click (Align). 14 On the Options Bar. clear Multiple Alignment. 15 Select the window in the upper horizontal wall on the left side of the floor plan. Align the windows on the floor plan 13 On the Toolbar.

and align the windows. 18 Select the far right window in the top wall. click . 19 To view the constraint. Working with Alignments and Constraints | 419 . as shown. click Modify. and select the dimension between the second window and the right wall. 20 Click the lock to unlock it. A lock is displayed. 17 Select the far right window in the bottom wall. 22 Align the remaining windows. on the Design Bar. indicating the constraint.The 2 windows align. The second window does not align because it is already constrained by a locked dimension. 21 On the Toolbar.

420 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . i_RST_Alignment-in progress. 24 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt. and save the model to a location of your choice using the following file name: i_RST_Alignment-in progress. You want to dimension the wall so that the width of each opening displays in the dimension string. you learn how to automatically dimension a linear wall with openings (windows) by selecting the wall. 1 View the south wall.23 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and notice that it includes 5 openings. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Creating Automatic Linear Wall Dimensions on page 420.rvt. instead of selecting the wall and all the openings as dimension references. Creating Automatic Linear Wall Dimensions In this exercise.

8 On the Design Bar. 4 In the Auto Dimension Options dialog. Click Options. Training File ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Working with Spot Dimensions In this exercise. select Entire Walls. click Dimension. 3 On the Options Bar. The 2 vertical walls highlight. indicating the start and end of the dimension string.2 On the Design Bar. For Prefer. Working with Spot Dimensions | 421 . the windows). and click to add the dimension. These options ensure that the wall dimension includes the openings (in this case. you learn how to use the spot dimension feature of Revit Structure. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. 6 Select the south wall. You can save the open file if you wish. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. In the next exercise. click Modify. a new training file is provided. For Pick. Working with Spot Dimensions on page 421. verify that Wall centerlines is selected. 7 Move your cursor below the south wall. click (Create Aligned Dimensions). 5 Click OK. select Openings and Widths. 9 Click File menu ➤ Close. and that the window widths are referenced in the overall dimension string.

select Leader. and double-click New Roof. click Spot Dimension ➤ Spot Elevation. select Spot Elevations: No Symbol (Relative). Click to place the spot dimension. and draw a zoom box around the upper view as shown.rvt. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Move the cursor up and to the left. select Current Level.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. and for Relative Base. 5 On the Options Bar. click . 422 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . Notice that the value of the spot elevation is displayed as the cursor is moved. Click to create the second leader point. expand Structural Plans. 4 In the Type Selector. and open Imperial\i_RST_Spot_Dimensions_Tapered_Roof. 6 Place the spot dimension as follows: ■ Move the cursor along the edge of the tapered roof. click Training Files. Click the center of the tapered insulation to create the first leader point as shown. Move the cursor to the left. Add spot dimensions to the tapered roof 1 In the Project Browser. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 2 On the Options Bar.

. select Leader. 7 On the Options Bar. Click to create the second leader point. and for Relative Base. click Modify. select Current Level. Move the cursor to the right. click Spot Dimension ➤ Spot Elevation. 11 Place the spot dimension as follows: ■ Click the corner of the slab (grid location A1) to create the first leader point as shown. Click to place the spot dimension. select Spot Elevations: No Symbol (Relative). Working with Spot Dimensions | 423 . ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Move the cursor up and to the right. Drag the leader to the right to place the dimension. 9 In the Type Selector. 10 On the Options Bar. and draw a zoom box around the structural columns as shown. click 8 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.■ On the Design Bar.

14 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 17 Place the spot elevation as follows: ■ ■ ■ Click the upper-right corner of the footing. 13 On the Options Bar. select Leader. and double-click Foundation. Move the cursor up and to the right. select Spot Elevations: No Symbol (Relative). expand Structural Plans. 15 In the Type Selector.■ On the Design Bar. click Modify. and Current Level for Relative Base. click Spot Dimension ➤ Spot Elevation. Click to create the second leader point. 424 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . and draw a zoom box around a footing as shown. 16 On the Options Bar. Add a spot dimension to the footing 12 In the Project Browser. click .

click Modify. click Modify. 21 On the Design Bar. ■ Click OK.■ ■ Move the cursor to the right. 19 On the Options Bar. enter TOF=. do the following: Under Text. click ■ . ■ On the Design Bar. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. Notice that the elevation at the top of the footing is displayed. Click to create the third leader point. Working with Spot Dimensions | 425 . Change the spot dimension properties 18 Select the spot dimension. for Single/Upper Value Prefix.

for Detail Level. click OK. 27 On the Design Bar. click Modify. Click the center of the sloped beam to create the first leader point as shown. 24 In the Element Properties dialog.Change the text orientation 22 Select the spot dimension. 30 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select In-line with Leader. click Edit/New. click . For Text Location. 26 In the Element Properties dialog. and double-click South Elevation. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Bold. Add spot coordinates to a sloped beam 28 In the Project Browser. Click Apply. and then OK. 23 On the Options Bar. select Medium. under Text. 29 On the View Control Bar. 31 Place the spot coordinate as follows: ■ Move the cursor along the edge of the sloped beam. click Spot Dimension ➤ Spot Coordinate. Notice that the value of the spot coordinate displays as the cursor moves. 25 In the Type Properties dialog. ■ 426 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . expand Elevations (Building Elevation).

Click to place the spot coordinate. 36 In the Element Properties dialog. On the Design Bar. and then OK. 37 On the Design Bar. 34 In the Element Properties dialog. 35 In the Type Properties dialog. enter EL. For Elevation Indicator. click Modify. Change the spot coordinate orientation 32 Select the spot coordinate. click OK. click . For Text Location. click Modify. select In-line with Leader. Notice that the elevation indicator displays below the existing coordinates. click Edit/New.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Move the cursor up and to the right. Click to create the second leader point. Working with Spot Dimensions | 427 . do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Bold. Click Apply. Move the cursor to the right. under Text. 33 On the Options Bar.

click Training Files.rvt. 39 Proceed to the next lesson. You also learn how to create a custom mark in place of an existing beam tag. a new training file is provided. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. You learn how to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Tag beams in a plan view Tag a beam system Tag beams by category Create a custom type mark in place of the beam tag Create a custom beam tag. You can save the open file if you wish. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Tagging Beams In this exercise. expand Structural Plans. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Annotating on page 428. Annotating In this lesson. and double-click Level 2. you learn how to use the beam annotation tool to tag all beams in a plan view.38 Click File menu ➤ Close. Tag all beams in plan view 1 In the Project Browser. In the next lesson. 428 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . and add an end reaction annotation to specific beams in the structure. you learn how to use some of the annotation features included in Revit Structure. click Beam Annotations. and open Imperial\i_RST_Annotations.

6 In the Beam Annotations dialog. select All beams in current plan view. Click Settings. Add an end-reaction value to specific beams 4 Select multiple beams located inside one of the bays as shown. the tags that were placed in the previous steps have been removed from this view. do the following: ■ ■ Under Placement.The Beam Annotations dialog opens. do the following: ■ Under Placement. In the Placement Settings dialog. and click OK. click Beam Annotations. ■ ■ Tagging Beams | 429 . 3 In the Beam Annotations dialog. Notice that a beam tag has been added to the top-middle location on all beams within the plan view. 5 On the Design Bar. NOTE For training purposes. Click OK. and click Remove existing beam tags and spot elevations. enter 1". select All selected beams in current plan view. for Horizontal End Offset.

click the Level beams in plan tab. click OK. click Structural Framing Tag. under Select Element to Place. select Structural Framing Tag-w-End Reactions : Standard. ■ ■ In the Beam Annotations dialog. ■ Under Annotation location and type. under Analysis Results. ■ ■ In the Select Annotation Type dialog.This dimension sets the annotation offset distance measured from the beam start location as indicated in the dialog. 8 In the Element Properties dialog.Live. enter 10.0 kip for End Reaction . The end reaction value is added to the selected beams. and click OK. Click . to specify the top-end annotation type as shown. click . Enter the reaction force 7 On the Options Bar. Under Structural Framing Tag. and click OK. 430 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning .

and then OK. enter W18. click Edit/New. 16 In the Element Properties dialog. 11 Right-click the open area above the model. and on the Options Bar. . Create a custom type mark tag 10 Enter ZF (Zoom to Fit). click Modify. . click Edit/New. click 18 In the Element Properties dialog. click OK. Tagging Beams | 431 . enter W14. and then OK. under Type Mark. click Apply. click Apply. 13 Click one of the W18X40 beams. 15 In the Type Properties dialog. under Type Mark. and on the Options Bar. and click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. 19 In the Type Properties dialog. click 14 In the Element Properties dialog. 12 Draw a zoom box that surrounds the upper beams between grids C and D as shown.9 On the Design Bar. 17 Click one of the W14X22 beams.

click Edit. 22 Click the structural label. under Label. When prompted to open the Structural Framing Tag for editing. click Edit Family.by Type Mark for File name. 24 In the Edit Label dialog. and on the Options bar. select the active file. 29 In the Load into Projects dialog. Apply the new type mark tag to all beams 30 In the plan view. Click Save. Enter Structural Framing Tag . 26 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. for Value. (Add 25 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. click . under Category Parameters. click Load into Projects. The new beam tag is applied to the selected beams. select Type Mark. 27 In the Save As dialog. click the W18X40 beam tag.20 In the Element Properties dialog. 31 In the Type Selector. and. while pressing CTRL. select the W14X22 beam tag. select Structural Framing Tag . click OK. 28 On the Family Design Bar. click OK. click Yes. click parameter(s) to a label). do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select a folder location. You are now in the Family Editor. and on the Options Bar. Edit the beam tag family 21 Click one of the W18X40 beam tags. 432 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . and click OK.by Type Mark: Standard.

Tagging Beams | 433 . 34 In the Filter dialog. do the following: Click Check None to clear all items.32 Enter ZF. click ■ ■ (Filter). 33 On the Options bar. and draw a pick box around the entire model as shown. Select Structural Framing Tags.

by Type Mark: Standard. 434 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . or close the exercise file without saving your changes. click File menu ➤ Save As. Tag the beam system 37 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. The new beam tag is applied to all beams.■ Click OK. 36 To save your changes. 35 In the Type Selector. and save the exercise file with a unique name. select Structural Framing Tag . and draw a zoom box around the beam system as shown.

38 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Yes. You can save the open file if you wish. 2 Click one of the W14X22 beam tags. 40 Click File ➤ Close. Open the beam tag family 1 In the Project Browser. click Beam System Tag. and on the Options Bar. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you learn how to create a custom beam tag that includes multiple categories and then apply the tag to different beam types.rvt. click Edit Family. click Edit Label. You are now in the Family Editor. In the left pane of the Open dialog. the existing beam tags have been removed for the following steps. In the next exercise a new training file is provided. and double-click Level 2. expand Structural Plans. Creating a Custom Beam Tag In this exercise. and open Imperial\i_RST_Custom_beam_tag. click Training Files. Creating a Custom Beam Tag | 435 . and notice the tag for the specific beam system displays. Move the cursor over the beams in the drawing area. and on the Options Bar.NOTE For training purposes. 41 Proceed to the next exercise. When prompted to open the Structural Framing Tag for editing. Creating a Custom Beam Tag on page 435. 3 Click the structural label. 39 Click any beam within the beam system to place the tag.

select Camber Size. do the following: ■ ■ Click the Annotation Categories tab. 436 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . under Graphics. enter ) (right parenthesis). for Sample Value. for Sample Value. enter C=1/2". add the following Label Parameters: ■ ■ Select parameter 1. select 3. for Vertical Align. (Add parameter). enter ] (close bracket). Under Visibility.Add multiple categories to the beam label 4 In the Edit Label dialog. ■ 6 In the Edit Label dialog. enter [ (open bracket). Select parameter 3. . select Reference Planes. add the following categories: ■ Under Category Parameters. ■ 5 In the Edit Label dialog. and for Suffix. enter ( (left parenthesis). enter S1. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. click OK. for Sample Value. and click The new category is added to the label as parameter 3. select Number of studs. and click OK. click . Under Category Parameters. for Prefix. for Spaces. and select Break. 11 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 10 Press VV (Visibility/Graphic Overrides). enter W14X22. Align the beam tag 7 Click the drag control for the label until the text is positioned on two lines as shown. Select parameter 2. select Top. and click The new category is added to the label as parameter 2. for Prefix. 8 On the Options Bar. and for Suffix.

Notice that each beam tag now specifies a different camber setting based on the beam type. and click Yes. click Override parameter values of existing types. and double-click Level 2. expand Schedules/Quantities. 15 On the Design Bar. 14 Click Modify. and the camber size for each beam type in the structure. Creating a Custom Beam Tag | 437 . Notice the Structural Framing Schedule includes the number of studs parameter. In the Reload Family dialog. 12 Select the text on the beam label. expand Structural Plans. and double-click Structural Framing Schedule.■ Click OK. click Load into Project. View the framing schedule 16 In the Project Browser. 13 Press the UP ARROW or DOWN ARROW to move the text until the beam type is positioned just below the horizontal reference plane as shown. View the properties for beam type S2 17 In the Project Browser.

438 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . click ■ . Worksets on page 439. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. Click OK. 22 Proceed to the next tutorial. do the following: Under Structural. 19 On the Options Bar. notice that the Camber Size value reflects the parameters entered in the framing schedule. ■ 21 Click File ➤ Save As. and save the completed project in a folder location of your preference.18 Click one of the W18x40 beams.

however. you learn how to use Worksharing to divide a project into worksets so multiple users can access the project. If you need to modify an element that belongs to a workset that someone else is actively working on. engineers commonly work in teams with each person assigned to a specific functional task.Worksets 12 On many building projects. Enable Worksharing 1 Click File menu ➤ Worksets.) is called a workset. you learn how to work as an individual with the central and local project files. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you can borrow that element without requiring the workset owner to relinquish control of the entire workset. Only one user can edit each workset at a given time. and to have all the elements coordinated by Revit Structure. In Revit Structure 2009. They can also update their local files at any time in order to see the changes other team members have published. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Using Worksharing. Using Worksharing in a Project In this lesson. and they can publish work to a central file whenever they choose. to allow visibility control and ownership for each assigned element. This prevents possible conflicts within the project. You subdivide the project into worksets and save the project as the central file. team members adding and changing elements in worksets can save their work to a local file on the network to their own hard drive. you enable Worksharing within an existing project. All other team members can view this workset. beams. and open Imperial\i_RST_Worksets. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets In this exercise. slabs. etc. This involves simultaneously working on and saving different portions of the project. they cannot make changes to it. This includes how to plan and execute the use of worksets in a project in order to maximize project and team performance.rvt. You can enable Worksharing for any project. this collection of building elements (such as roofs. You then learn how to work within a Worksharing-enabled project with multiple users and how to borrow particular elements from other users. In this tutorial. In the next exercise. You begin by enabling Worksharing within a project and setting up the initial workset environment. 439 .

In this case. enter Beams and Columns. click New. and User1 is displayed as the present owner. You cannot change your user name with an unsaved Worksharing-enabled project open. do the following: ■ ■ For new workset name. Creating new worksets 6 In the Worksets dialog. The project is subdivided in such a way as to reflect the tasks of each user. one team member is assigned to the slabs.2 Click OK to accept the default workset names. and Views. For training purposes. a small number of team members are working on the structural model. Project Standards. 440 | Chapter 12 Worksets . a fifth is assigned to the elevator shafts. a third is assigned all beams and columns. a fourth is assigned the foundation and garage ramp. select: ■ ■ ■ Families Project Standards Views 4 Scroll down the list of workset names. the user name was changed in the Options dialog (accessible from the Settings menu). Only User-Created worksets should display. 5 Under Show. and notice all are editable by you. TIP The initial owner name is assigned by the operating system of your computer. The Worksets dialog is displayed. For training purposes. Therefore. under Show. and all team members must have access to all linked or imported DWG or RVT files. Notice that all worksets are open and editable by you. 7 In the New Workset dialog. clear Families. Verify that Visible by default in all views is selected. 3 In the Worksets dialog. a second user is assigned the roof. imagine 5 users including yourself. In this simple training project. you must create worksets that allow each team member to work independently.

click New. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For new workset name. 13 In the New Workset dialog. enter Elevator Shafts. ■ 12 In the Worksets dialog. click New. click New. 9 In the New Workset dialog. enter Foundation. do the following: ■ ■ For new workset name. Verify that Visible by default in all views is selected. Click OK. 11 In the New Workset dialog. 8 In the Worksets dialog. Verify that Visible by default in all views is selected. Click OK. The foundation should only be visible in specific views. This improves performance because fewer components need to be generated in each view. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 441 . 10 In the Worksets dialog. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For new workset name. Click OK.■ Click OK. enter Slabs. Clear Visible by default in all views.

Clear Visible by default in all views. ■ 18 In the Worksets dialog. Clear Visible by default in all views. The garage ramp should only be visible in specific views. Again. Verify that Visible by default in all views is selected. 442 | Chapter 12 Worksets . click New. this improves performance.14 In the Worksets dialog. click New. Click OK. The roof should only be visible in specific views. Again. Click OK. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For new workset name. click New. enter Garage Ramp. 17 In the New Workset dialog. 19 In the New Workset dialog. Click OK. enter Roof. enter Linked or imported DWG or RVT files. this improves performance. 15 In the New Workset dialog. do the following: ■ ■ For new workset name. do the following: ■ ■ For new workset name. ■ 16 In the Worksets dialog.

23 Click Save. 27 On the right side of the dialog. NOTE Continue using the central file for the following steps. 22 In the Save As dialog. Check in the worksets 24 Click File menu ➤ Worksets. click Non Editable.You have created the required worksets for each team member working on this project. select: ■ ■ ■ ■ User-Created Families Project Standards Views 26 Select all the worksets by pressing CTRL+A. click OK Create the central file 21 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 20 In the Worksets dialog. This is imperative if you and another user intend to complete the multi-user exercise later in this tutorial. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 443 . under Show. for file name. but be sure not to save the file in the training files location. Navigate to a location on a network drive that all team members have access to. this can be accomplished by saving the central file to your hard drive and changing your user name before accessing the project. The next step is to create the central file. you must relinquish workset editability so that other users can have access to the worksets they need. The central file is created automatically the first time you save the project after enabling worksets. 25 In the Worksets dialog. Now that you have created the central file. If you do not have access to a network and still want to complete that exercise.Central. enter Worksets Project .

In the Worksets dialog. click OK. 28 In the Worksets dialog. navigate to a folder on your local computer. and click OK. 34 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 30 In the Save to Central dialog. Create a local file 32 Click File menu ➤ Open. Assigning Worksets on page 445. click File menu ➤ Close. Navigate to the location of the central file Worksets Project . under Comments.Central on the network drive. 29 Click File menu ➤ Save to Central. and click Open. notice that your name has been removed as the owner of the worksets and also notice that all worksets are not available for editing. enter Initial Central File Setup. 36 Enter Worksets Project_Local-User 1 for File name. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. 31 After the file is saved. and click Save. 33 Select the file. 444 | Chapter 12 Worksets . 35 In the Save As dialog.

4 On the Options Bar. Assigning Worksets | 445 . you enabled Worksharing on a project. for Workset. 2 Click Cancel. 6 Click OK. 1 Click File menu ➤ Worksets. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. you assign the structural columns workset to User1. Assigning Worksets In this exercise. and created a local file. NOTE Continue using the local file Worksets Project_Local-User 1 for the following exercise. select Beams and Columns. click . 3 Click one of the structural columns as shown. checked in all worksets. 8 Click File menu ➤ Worksets. notice that all worksets are available for editing. You then created the central file.In this exercise. In the Worksets dialog. This project is now ready for individuals to access it and check out their required worksets. 7 Click the highlighted column to deselect it. and created new worksets to accommodate each team member.

click Check None. 9 Click Cancel. under Borrowers for Workset1. 446 | Chapter 12 Worksets .The Worksets dialog. 12 In the Filter dialog. Assign the structural columns 10 Draw a pick box around the entire model to select all elements. notice that User1 is listed. 13 Select Structural Columns. click . 11 On the Options Bar. and click OK.

The puzzle-piece icons disappear. 14 Right-click one of the columns. 15 On the Options Bar.All structural columns in the model are highlighted. 16 In the Element Properties dialog. but the columns remain highlighted. and click Make Elements Editable. click . select Beams and Columns. Assigning Worksets | 447 . and a workset puzzle-piece icon displays next to each column indicating it can be changed to editable. for Workset.

448 | Chapter 12 Worksets . 1 Click File menu ➤ Open.17 Click OK. under After save relinguish editable. clear Borrowed Elements. you make the entire workset editable and assign individual elements to specific users. and click OK. The columns and beams elements are now assigned for Workset1. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. 18 Click File menu ➤ Save to Central. 2 Click Open. Making the Entire Workset Editable on page 448. 19 In the Save to Central dialog. 3 Click File menu ➤ Worksets. to save the local file. Making the Entire Workset Editable In this exercise. Navigate to the location of the central file Worsksets Project-Central on the network drive.

8 In the Filter dialog. User1 is now listed as the Owner of Workset1. Making the Entire Workset Editable | 449 .In the Worksets dialog. and click the Editable on the right-side of the dialog. click Check None. 5 Click OK. notice User1 is listed under Borrowers for Beams and Columns. select Workset1. 7 On the Options Bar. and select Floors. Assign the floor workset 6 Draw a pick box around the entire model to select all elements. click . 4 In the Worksets dialog.

12 Click OK. The slabs are now assigned for Workset1. 450 | Chapter 12 Worksets . click .9 Click OK. select Slabs. 10 On the Options Bar. for Workset. All floors are highlighted. 11 In the Element Properties dialog.

19 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. for Workset. click the Worksets tab. 18 Enter VV. 14 On the Options Bar. 16 Click OK. foundation. Turn visibility on/off 17 Click elsewhere in the drawing area to deselect the roof. The roof is now assigned for Workset1. Making the Entire Workset Editable | 451 . and the garage ramp. assign the remaining worksets for the elevator shafts. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. select Roof.Assign the roof workset 13 Select the roof as shown. click . This is the keyboard shortcut for Visibility/Graphic override. Using the steps described in the previous procedure.

and Slabs. Roof. clear the box next to the desired element. and then click Apply and OK. click the Worksets tab. 22 Enter VV. 23 Check Beams and Columns. Save to central file 24 Click File menu ➤ Save to Central. The elements are now visible in the view.20 Clear Beams and Columns. To turn off additional elements. Roof. and Slabs. and on the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. and then click Apply and OK. 21 The elements are now hidden from the view. 452 | Chapter 12 Worksets .

4 Click the General Tab and. The user who has not yet created a local file for the chosen central file is User 2. select: ■ ■ User-created Worksets Borrowed Elements 26 After the file is saved. consider that person to be User 1. and reset the User name to your computer login name. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file named Worksets project-Central. each user must check out worksets. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). Each modifies the structural model within their local file and publishes it back to the central file where the other user can see the changes. If both users have completed the previous worksets exercises and created central files on the network. 28 Click OK. click File menu ➤ Save to save a local copy. two users work on the structural model residing in the central file you created and saved in a previous exercise. Using Worksets with Multiple Users In this exercise. instructions are staggered. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. one user has already created a local file. Throughout the remainder of this exercise. and check out worksets 6 Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. and refer explicitly to User 1 and User 2. and click OK. two users access the central file through a network connection. 27 Under Comment. Throughout the process. Regardless of which central file you choose to use. select one of those central files to be used in this exercise. and proceed to Create a local copy. and reload the latest changes. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 453 . please do so before continuing. User 2: Create a local file. make elements editable. 2 Start a new Revit Structure session by double-clicking the Revit Structure icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. Using Worksets with Multiple Users on page 453. The next series of steps create a local file for User 2. If you have not yet completed these exercises. return to the Settings dialog. Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. For training purposes. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. For training purposes. This exercise requires the completion of the previous workset exercises and access to the resulting local and central files. under User name. enter Reassigning elements to their own worksets. click Options. Use a second Revit Structure session to mimic User 2 1 Minimize the current Revit Structure window. specifically sequenced. enter User 2. Create a local copy 5 In this exercise. 3 On the Settings menu. skip the following section.25 In the Save to Central dialog. This is a system setting. In the following section of this exercise. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Structure and setting the user name to User 2.

18 Click File menu ➤ Worksets. and click OK. In addition. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. it becomes the active workset. under Open Worksets. You now have a local copy of the project. select all the User-Created worksets. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User 2. and click Save. 24 Select any column on the foundation level as shown in the following illustration. 454 | Chapter 12 Worksets . 20 Click OK to return to the Worksets dialog. select the central file and. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. and double-click 3D-Atrium. A warning is displayed informing you that you cannot check out this workset because it is already checked out by another user. 11 In the Save As dialog. 12 In the File Save Options dialog. If it is not open. 23 In the Project Browser. 8 Click Open. You are now the owner of that workset. User 1: Check out worksets. and select Yes for Editable. Notice that you own this workset and the active workset is now Beams and Columns. 22 Click OK. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. 21 Select the Beams and Columns workset. 19 Try to change the Editable status for Foundation to Yes. 15 Select the Foundation workset. and publish changes 17 User 1 should still have the local file open. Notice that the Foundation workset is checked out by User 2. modify the structural model. If you only have one workset checked out. and move it. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. and click OK. open it now. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 9 In the Opening Worksets dialog. and select Yes for Editable. This file is for your use only. click Options. expand 3D Views. select Specify. verify that Make this the Central location after save is not selected. 14 Click File menu ➤ Worksets. 16 Click OK.7 In the Open dialog. 13 Navigate to your preferred location on the hard drive.

Notice that the changes made by User 1 do not immediately display in the local file of User 2. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 455 . select the option to save the local file after the central file is saved.A warning is displayed informing you that a conflict exists. 25 Click anywhere in the empty drawing area to ignore the warning. and double-click 3D-Atrium. and move it. That is because changes made to the central file display in local files only when the worksets are explicitly updated. 30 Using the following illustration as a guide. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save to Central. User 2: Modify the building model and publish changes 29 In the Project Browser. expand 3D Views. 28 Click OK. 27 In the Save to Central dialog. select a footing.

User 1: Reload latest worksets. double-click Roof. the visibility of the workset is not turned on even though it is checked out and is the active workset. 33 Click File menu ➤ Worksets. 38 On the Design Bar. 34 Select Roof. This is because when the Roof workset was created. 37 In the Design Bar. 40 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. and sketch a new roof between any four beams. and click OK. However. select Yes for Editable. the Visible by default option was not selected. 41 Notice that the roof you added previously now displays. click Modify. 39 On the View menu. click Visibility/Graphics. click Slab. A message displays informing you that the component you are trying to place is not visible in that view. any elements added to the structure are automatically assigned to the active workset.31 Click File menu ➤ Save to Central. and check out additional worksets 32 Click File menu ➤ Reload Latest. under Structural Plans. 456 | Chapter 12 Worksets . select Roof to turn on its visibility. The changes User 2 made are apparent. You should turn on the visibility before adding a roof. Click Yes. and click OK. Even though the Roof workset is active. 35 On the Project Browser. Because you now have more than one workset checked out. Therefore. you are asked if you want to make the Roof workset the active workset. click the Worksets tab. you still have complete access to the elements belonging to the Beams and Columns worksets. 36 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Pick Supports.

you need to set up your central and local files. In this exercise. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users In this exercise. select them. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. and these problems are rectified. NOTE When you open the training file for this tutorial. you may receive a message informing you that the central file has been relocated. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users on page 457. Each user checked out worksets. At the appropriate point in this exercise. you learn how to borrow elements from worksets that other users are actively working on. In subsequent steps. Click OK to this message and subsequent messages. Check out worksets. This exercise requires two users and. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. leave this file open in its current state. You learn how to make borrowing requests and how to grant them. This exercise also requires two users and you can skip the first sections of the exercise and proceed directly to the section. As each of you work. 43 In the Save to Central dialog. you must borrow elements that belong to worksets that the other user has checked out. 2 In the Worksets dialog. Only one user needs to open the training file and save the central file to a network location. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 457 . and click Open. If you intend to complete the final portion of this tutorial by proceeding to the Element Borrowing exercise. throughout this training. If you have not completed the previous workset exercises. Each user must have network access to the central file. These messages are a result of the central file being relocated (to your PC). leave this file open in its current state. User 1: Check out worksets 1 Click File menu ➤ Worksets. There are specific instructions for each user. If you intend to complete the final exercise of this tutorial. select the option to save the local file after the central file is saved. two users are working on the same project with separate local files. 44 Click OK. if any User-Created worksets are not open. two users worked on the same structure using worksets. you save the training file as a central file. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Structure and setting the user name to User 2. In the final exercise of this tutorial. modified the structure and published their changes back to the central file. Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file.42 Click File menu ➤ Save to Central.

select Foundation. 6 In the Worksets dialog. you should inform User 1 that you are waiting for permission to edit a borrowed element. After you submit the request. and select Yes for Editable. select the Beams and Columns workset. expand 3D Views. A warning message informs you that you must obtain permission from User 1. 9 On the Options Bar. 11 Move the footing. a message informs you that you are waiting for permission from User 1. Leave this dialog open until User 1 grants permission. 12 Click Place Request to ask User 1 for permission to move the footing. User 2: Borrow an element from User 1 8 In the Project Browser. A symbol appears letting you know that it belongs to a workset you do not own. User 1: Grant User 2 permission to borrow element 13 When User 2 contacts you and informs you that a borrowing request is pending your authorization. and click OK. You are now the owner of that workset. and double-click 3D-Atrium. 458 | Chapter 12 Worksets . and click OK. 10 Using the following illustration as a guide. 7 Under Active Workset. and select Yes for Editable. select a footing. verify that Editable Only is cleared. 4 Under Active Workset. You are now the owner of that workset. User 2: Check out worksets 5 Click File menu ➤ Worksets. click File menu ➤ Editing Requests. select Beams and Columns.3 Select the Foundation workset. At this point. This allows you to select elements that belong to worksets that you do not own.

15 Click Grant. A message informs you that your request has been granted. 18 Click OK.14 In the Editing Requests dialog. you requested permission to edit the element. 22 Proceed to the next tutorial. Project Coordination on page 461. User 2: Check for editability grant 17 In the Check Editability Grants dialog. User 1 and 2: Save to Central. In this multi-user exercise. 16 Click Close. select the request submitted by User 2. and notice the footing is in the new location. and click OK. to Local. click Check Now. 20 In the Save to Central dialog. ■ ■ ■ User-created Worksets Borrowed Elements (User 2 only) Save the local file after “Save to Central” completes successfully 21 Click File menu ➤ Close. select the following. and the other user granted it. and close 19 Click File menu ➤ Save to Central. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 459 . In this case. you learned how to borrow elements from another workset even though that workset was actively being edited by another user.

460 .

In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\i_RST_Coordination. depending on the impact to the design. reviews each change individually. an interference check is run on the model to correct the placement of any architectural elements (door. or postponed. This task is accomplished using the copy monitor feature that was activated when the project was started. Click OK to open the file. and the copy monitor feature was activated. the copy monitor feature automatically notifies you of the changes. the structural engineer imports the modified Revit Architecture model. you begin by opening the Revit Structure file that contains the modified Revit Architecture file. levels. the architect’s file was imported into Revit Structure. 461 . all changes are documented using the Revit Structure revision system feature. floors. which can be accepted.Project Coordination 13 You have received the latest model from the architect and changes have been made to the design. and determines the impact of each modification on the structure. and columns for any future modifications. Once each change has been reviewed. you run an interference check to verify that the changes do not interfere with structural elements of the model. Coordination Review In this lesson.rvt NOTE Because some of the changes from the architect involve elements that are monitored by the copy monitor feature of Revit Structure. When the modified file is brought back into Revit Structure. click Training Files. In the tutorial. walls. Finally. Opening the Modified Revit Architecture file Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. This feature enabled the engineer to monitor the project grids. Finally. a warning is displayed. In this tutorial. Starting a New Project on page 149. rejected. or window) that might interfere with elements in the Revit Structure 2009 model.

and then click OK. 462 | Chapter 13 Project Coordination . select Coordination for Discipline. click Apply. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility Graphics. and draw a zoom box around the upper-left corner of the building at grid line B. double-click Level 3. and click OK. 4 Select the linked file i_RBD_After. 8 On the View Toolbar. 5 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. 7 Enter ZF. under Graphics. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. 3 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. under Structural Plans. This is the keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit. Selecting this discipline allows the architectural walls to be visible.rvt.1 In the Project Browser. The modified Revit Architecture file will now be visible along with the Revit Structure file. Click . select the Revit Links tab. and notice the duplicate grid lines and the relocation of the stairway. click .

Click between grid lines A and B until the Revit Links box is displayed. The Revit Architecture file is highlighted. click Opening the Modified Revit Architecture file | 463 . On the View Control Bar. and draw a zoom box around the lower levels of the elevator shaft 11 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. and draw a zoom box around the elevator shaft. Click to select the linked file. 12 In the Structural Plan: Level 3 window: ■ ■ ■ Select . click as shown. Close all additional views that may have been opened accidentally. . click the Model Graphics Style control.9 Click or drag the ViewCube to re-orient the view until the elevator shaft is visible as shown. . 10 On the Toolbar. 13 On the Options Bar. and click Wireframe. and the Coordination Review icon displays on the Options Bar. The Level 3 Plan view and the 3D view are displayed in separate windows.

The selected floor from the structural model is highlighted in the 3D window. 16 In the Coordination Review dialog. press SHIFT. ■ Click the first message under Monitor Floor Sketches. Click the message Floor: Floor: 6" Concrete. Display the review message for any individual floor by expanding Sketches are Different. ■ 464 | Chapter 13 Project Coordination . or changed in some way from the architect’s file. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Expand New/Unresolved ➤ Floors ➤ expand Monitor Floor Sketches. and click Show. and a custom message that pertains to each New/Unresolved category. Review change to Floor Sketch 15 Position the Coordination Review dialog so the 3D window is visible.The Coordination Review lists all messages that require some type of action. The structural engineer should address each message individually and take some form of action to resolve the conflict. In the Action column. and click Apply. 14 Click the 3D Views: 3D window to deselect the plan view. select the remaining messages. Notice each floor is highlighted on the 3D view. Reject. Actions include: Postpone. These messages identify elements that were deleted. select Copy Sketch to Floor: 6" Concrete. moved. Accept Difference. and then click Show.

and draw a zoom box around the elevator shaft in the plan view. Grid B from the architect’s model is highlighted on the Level 3 window. do the following: ■ ■ Expand New/Unresolved ➤ Grids ➤ Maintain relative position of Grids ➤ Grid moved.The concrete floor sketches for all levels of the structure will be adjusted to accommodate the architect’s floor sketch change.rvt: Grids: Grid:B. select Modify Grid B. and click Show. click . Review location of elevator walls 19 On the Toolbar. ■ For Action. The grid line is adjusted to accommodate the architect’s change. Opening the Modified Revit Architecture file | 465 . Click the message i_RBD_After. and click Apply. Review location of grid B 17 Position the Coordination Review dialog so the plan view is visible. 18 In the Coordination Review dialog.

expand Maintain wall position. and select the remaining messages. and click Apply. press SHIFT. Click the first message under Wall centerlines are different. Select one of the messages and notice the wall is highlighted on the Structural Plan: Level 3 plan view. select Modify Wall Basic Wall: Generic 8" Masonry. do the following: ■ Under New/Unresolved ➤ Walls. There are 4 changes involving the elevator shaft walls. For Action. ■ ■ 466 | Chapter 13 Project Coordination .20 In the Coordination Review dialog.

and OK. and save the model to a location of your choice using the following file name: i_RST_Coordination-in progress.8" Masonry. click Apply. Select Postpone for Action.The elevator walls on the structural model will be adjusted to accommodate the architect’s change. 22 In the Coordination Review dialog. Click the message Walls: Basic Wall: Foundation . enter Need to discuss with architect. 23 Click File menu ➤ Save As. ■ ■ In the Edit Comment dialog. Click the Add Comment field. enter Need to discuss with architect. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Expand New/Unresolved ➤ Walls ➤ Monitor Wall Sketches ➤ Sketch is missing. In the Edit Comment dialog. Review wall modifications 21 Position the Coordination Review dialog so the lower floors of the 3D View are visible. Click OK. Select Postpone for Action. The structural engineer will discuss this change with the architect before proceeding.12" Concrete. Opening the Modified Revit Architecture file | 467 . Click the Add Comment field. Click the message Walls: Basic Wall: Generic . ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click OK.rvt. In the Coordination Review dialog.

2 On the right-side of the Interference Check dialog. and the second is a structural brace that interferes with a door opening in the stairway.rvt 1 Click Tools menu ➤ Interference Check ➤ Run Check. The first is the possible interference between the stairs and a relocated structural column. 468 | Chapter 13 Project Coordination . The default table compares elements within the same project. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. you use the interference tool in Revit Structure to check on 2 potential problems with the stairway. i_RST_Coordination-in progress.24 Proceed to the next exercise. Interference Check In this exercise.rvt for Categories from. select i_RBD_After. The next step is to select the architect’s file so it can be checked against the structural project. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. Interference Check on page 468.

Run interference check on columns and stairs 3 In the list for the current project. and Stairs for the Revit Architecture project. Interference Check | 469 . select Structural Columns.Notice the categories for the architect’s file differ from the current Revit Structure project.

470 | Chapter 13 Project Coordination .4 Click OK. 5 In the Interference Report dialog. do the following: ■ Under Structural Columns. A report is generated showing all instances of interference between columns in the structural project and the upper-left stairway in the Revit Architecture project. expand the message for Level 3 Stairs as shown.

■ Select i_RBD_After. The report provides detail on the interference and should be used to discuss the problem with the architect. select a folder location on your local computer. Click Export to generate an interference report. Notice the column of the structural model is highlighted on the Structural Plan: Level 3 window.html). Stair Check. Click Save.rvt: Stairs: Stair: 7" max riser 11" tread. enter Columns vs. Under File name. Under Save as type. Notice the stairway of the architect’s model is highlighted on the Structural Plan: Level 3 window Select Structural Columns: W-Wide Flange Column: W10X33. ■ ■ Export the Column interference report 6 In the Export dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Save in.There are 7 instances of interference between structural columns and the upper-left stairway. and that it interferes with the stairway. Each representing a different level. Interference Check | 471 . select Revit Interference Report (*.

10 Select Structural Framing ➤ Vertical Bracing for Current Project. click Close.rvt for Categories from. 9 In the Interference Check dialog. 472 | Chapter 13 Project Coordination .7 In the Interference Report dialog. and Doors for the Revit Architecture project. Run interference check on vertical bracing 8 Click Tools menu ➤ Interference Check ➤ Run Check. There is 1 instance of interference between structural bracing and the door for the upper-left stairway. 11 Click OK. select i_RBD_After.

■ Click Export to generate an interference report. Door opening. Notice the door from the architect’s model is highlighted on both the 3D View and Structural Plan view windows. also the brace interferes with the opening. Select Structural Framing: L-Angle: L4X4X3/4 ■ .rvt: Doors: Door Single. Interference Check | 473 . do the following: ■ ■ Under Structural Framing ➤ expand Doors. Under File name. Select i_RBD_After. Notice the brace from the structural model is highlighted on both the 3D view and Structural Plan view windows. select Revit Interference Report (*. select a folder location on your local computer. Under Save as type.html).12 In the Interference Report dialog. enter Brace vs. Export the Brace and Door interference report 13 In the Export dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Save in.

verify that By Sheet is selected for Numbering Method. Using Revision Tracking on page 474. the revision is locked and issued to the field. Setting Up a Revision Table Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 474 | Chapter 13 Project Coordination . 14 Click File menu ➤ Save and save the file in a folder of your preference. all tags and schedules display the numeral 1. yet as concise as possible. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence of revisions in the Revisions dialog. and can then display the revisions in schedules that appear in the title block of each project sheet. 4 Click on the value for Description. In general. If you select By Project. 6 Verify that Visible is selected. and you can draw revision clouds around elements in your project that have changed. and enter Moved Grid B west by 2'. a new training file is provided. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 15 In the Interference Report dialog. Using Revision Tracking Revit Structure provides tools that enable you to track revisions to your project. click Revisions. 5 Verify that Issued is cleared. click Training Files. 16 Proceed to the next lesson. Specify a revision numbering method 1 On the Settings menu. and open Imperial\i_RST_Revision. Add a revision for grid B 3 Click on the value for Release Date. 2 In the Revisions dialog. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence in which they are added to a sheet. When you use this option. You can create a sequence of revisions. and enter 2/15/06. This is the date the revisions were identified. if the active revision is number 1. For example. You can use revision tags to notate the revision clouds.rvt.■ Click Save. When Issued is selected. revision descriptions should be comprehensive. click Close. In the next lesson. The report provides detail on the interference and should be used to discuss the problem with the architect.

Add a revision cloud for grid B 1 In the Project Browser. 5 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment. Sketching Revision Clouds | 475 . and OK. 7 Click Apply. You can draw multiple revision clouds for each revision. You can sketch revision clouds in all views except 3D model views. including revision number and revision date.If Visible is not selected. click Revision Cloud. allowing you to edit the model directly from the sheet. and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud.Level 3 Framing Plan. click near grid line B. and select Activate View. Each cloud is visible only in the view in which it is sketched. Sketching Revision Clouds on page 475. you can add a revision cloud to the 3D view once it is placed on a sheet. However. 4 In the drawing area. which are inherited from the revision table you created for the project. Revit Structure is now in sketch mode. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Sketching Revision Clouds In this exercise. The Activate View command activates a viewport on the sheet. any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it. under Sheets (all). 3 Right-click the view on the sheet. In most instances. 6 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. Revision clouds have read-only properties. you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued.1 . you indicate the changes made by the architect graphically with a revision cloud. double-click S.

rvt. click Add: New. the revision for grid line B should be issued to the field to prevent any changes to the revision cloud. the remaining revisions for the project are documented. 3 Click on the value for Release Date. 4 Click on the value for Description. A new row is added below the existing row in the revision table. click Revisions. the revision is locked and issued to the field. When Issued is selected. 2 In the Revisions dialog. and enter Moved Stair exit 2' west. revision descriptions should be comprehensive.rvt. In general. and save the model to a location of your choice using the following file name: i_RST_Revision-in progress.7 On the Design Bar. i_RST_Revision-in progress. NOTE At this point. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. and enter 2/20/06. The revision cloud is displayed around the modified grid line. In this tutorial. click Finish Sketch. 476 | Chapter 13 Project Coordination . 6 Verify that Visible is selected. the revisions to the project will be issued after all the revision clouds have been drawn. Add Remaining Revisions on page 476. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. Add Remaining Revisions In this exercise. 5 Verify that Issued is cleared. 8 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 9 Proceed to the next exercise. yet as concise as possible. Add a revision for the elevator stairs 1 On the Settings menu. This is the date the revisions were sent out for review.

click Revision Cloud. In most instances. The revision cloud is displayed around the modified stairs. click Finish Sketch. and enter Research brace. and enter 2/21/06.If Visible is not selected. Revit Structure is now in sketch mode. This is the date the revisions were sent out for review. 8 In the drawing area. and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud. Add Remaining Revisions | 477 . you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued. 9 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment. You can change the appearance of the cloud from the Settings menu. any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it. click Add: New. Add a revision for the brace interference 12 In the Revisions dialog. 14 Click on the value for Description. A new row is added below the existing row in the revision table. 10 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed. click above the elevator shaft. 13 Click on the value for Release Date. Add a revision cloud for the elevator stairs 7 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 11 On the Design Bar.

478 | Chapter 13 Project Coordination . yet as concise as possible. When Issued is selected. 16 Verify that Visible is selected. allowing you to edit the model directly from the sheet.In general. any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it. 15 Verify that Issued is cleared. Revit Structure is now in sketch mode. and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud. In most instances. and select Activate View. If Visible is not selected. 18 Right-click the center view on the sheet. click Revision Cloud. 19 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 20 In the drawing area. 21 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment. The Activate View command activates a viewport on the sheet. under Sheets (all). the revision is locked and issued to the field. click above the brace.2 . revision descriptions should be comprehensive. 22 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed.Stair Shafts Sections. you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued. Add a revision cloud for the brace interference 17 In the Project Browser. double-click S.

27 Verify that Issued is cleared. Add Remaining Revisions | 479 .23 On the Design Bar. This is the date the revisions were sent out for review. 25 Click on the value for Release Date. and enter 2/22/06. click Finish Sketch. 28 Verify that Visible is selected. The revision cloud is displayed around the brace. 26 Click on the value for Description. click Add: New. You can change the appearance of the cloud from the Settings menu. In general. A new row is added below the existing row in the revision table. Add a revision for the door interference 24 In the Revisions dialog. revision descriptions should be comprehensive. yet as concise as possible. and enter Research door. the revision is locked and issued to the field. When Issued is selected.

35 On the Design Bar. any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it. The tag number that is displayed in the drawing is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table in a previous exercise. 32 In the drawing area. you apply a revision tag to the revision cloud in the current drawing.Stair Shafts Sections. 34 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed. 30 Right-click the right view on the sheet. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. Tagging Revision Clouds on page 480. allowing you to edit the model directly from the sheet. double-click S. click Revision Cloud. and select Activate View. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise.2 . click above the door.If Visible is not selected. 480 | Chapter 13 Project Coordination . In most instances. You can change the appearance of the cloud from the Settings menu. under Sheets (all). you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued. Add a revision cloud for the door interference 29 In the Project Browser. The revision cloud is displayed around the door. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. click Finish Sketch.rvt. Revit Structure is now in sketch mode. 33 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment. 31 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. The Activate View command activates a viewport on the sheet. 36 Click File menu ➤ Save. Tagging Revision Clouds In this exercise. i_RST_Revision-in progress. and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud.

Place a revision tag 1 In the Project Browser. Because you chose to number by sheet. 2 Right-click the view on the sheet. 9 Proceed to the next exercise. The number is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table. i_RST_Revision-in progress.1 . and because the revision is the first in the project. clear Leader. 8 Click File menu ➤ Save. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.Level 3 Framing Plan. 6 Click to place the tag. position the cursor just outside the revision cloud for grid line B.rvt. and select Activate View. and then issue the revisions to create a record. Working with Revisions on page 481. click Tag ➤ Tag By Category. If the cursor is just inside the cloud. The Activate View command activates a viewport on the sheet. 4 On the Options Bar. The tag displays the revision number of the cloud. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. 7 Repeat steps 2 through 5 to add revision tags for all remaining revision clouds. under Sheets (all). and lock it from further changes. you first view the revisions that were created in the previous exercise. double-click S. 5 In the drawing area. Working with Revisions In this exercise. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. Working with Revisions | 481 . allowing you to edit the model directly from the sheet. the cloud is tagged as number 1. the tag is displayed inside the cloud.

2 Select .2 . under Sheets (all). nor can you edit the sketch of the existing clouds. 6 Select Issued for each revision entry.Stair Shafts Sections. you can no longer modify it. Issue a revision 5 After you make the necessary changes to the project and add the revised views to a sheet. On the Settings menu. and draw a zoom box around the title block as shown. double-click S. you prevent further changes to the revision. and draw a zoom box around the title block as shown. 4 Select .1 . 3 In the Project Browser. double-click S. You do this by issuing the revision. NOTE After you issue a revision. under Sheets (all). and click OK.Level 3 Framing Plan. click Revisions. 482 | Chapter 13 Project Coordination . You cannot add revision clouds to the revision in the drawing area.View the revisions 1 In the Project Browser.

Click Yes when prompted to save the drawing. Structural Analytical Modelling on page 485. 8 Proceed to the next tutorial.7 Click File menu ➤ Close. Working with Revisions | 483 .

484 .

interaction with steel detailers and fabricators and also the analytical model that can be consumed by multiple 3rd party analysis software. You can also apply an existing view’s view properties using the Apply View Template command.Structural Analytical Modelling 14 In this tutorial. quantity take off. loads and load combinations. you can apply that same template to a 3D view. Views and View Templates are not linked. The physical model that is used for documentation. To update a view. Though the View Range property applies only to plan views. When working with the analytical model. Revit Structure View Templates provide initial conditions for a view. the analytical model is created automatically based on engineering rules and logical relationships between the structural objects. Revit Structure applies only the properties applicable to both. Applying the Analytical Model to the Design Process Revit Structure combines 2 models. The view inherits view properties such as View Scale. You can save the View Template from one type of view and apply those same properties to any other geometric view. you can reapply the modified template. component properties. NOTE Reapplying a view template overrides previous view property modifications and View templates can only be applied to geometric views. the View Template saves and applies only common properties. The analytical model consists of structural components. Because each view in Revit Structure consists of different properties. if you save a template from a plan view. you learn some basic concepts of the Revit Structure 2009 analytical model and how to prepare the model to be analyzed by a third party analysis software. View Templates help standardize the look of all views. the template is still applied to the 3D view. 485 . You can apply a template to an existing or new view. geometry. For example. All views created with that template are not automatically updated. and the visibility settings of categories and subcategories. Discipline. As you create objects and the physical model. material properties. Detail level.

you learn how to check member supports. and open Imperial\i_RST_SAM_Analytical_Checks. Apply the view template 1 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. Analytical checks should be run at different phases of the project and the model adjusted accordingly. 2 In the Select View Template dialog.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The Structural Analytical Normal view template will present structural components in this new analytical plan view with both the analytical model and the physical model displayed as shown. click Training Files.Analytical Checks In this exercise. and run an analytical consistency check on the analytical model shown below. select Structural Analytical Normal or Structural Analytical Stick. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 486 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . The Structural Analytical Stick view template will present structural components in this new analytical plan with only the analytical model displayed as shown.

applying either the stick or normal analytical view template to the view will cause loads to be displayed. to view each warning. wall. 2 In the Structural Settings dialog. Check member supports 3 Click Tools menu ➤ Analytical Model ➤ Check Member Supports. Notice that the structural element is highlighted on the model as each warning is selected. under the Analytical Model Settings tab. This tutorial will run both the Member Supports Check and Analytical/Physical Model Consistency Check for all elements selected from the Settings menu ➤ Structural Settings dialog.NOTE If the visibility of loads is tuned off in the view. Review support warnings 6 Click Tools menu ➤ Review Warnings. Verify analytical settings 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Structural Settings. Revit Structure checks for instances where a structural element (column) is missing a foundation support (slab. A Warning dialog appears notifying you that there are structural elements that may not be supported properly. 4 In the Warning dialog click . Analytical Checks | 487 . 5 Close the Warning dialog. or isolated). select the Analytical Model Settings tab.

488 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . Click OK in the Viewing Tips dialog.7 In the Warning dialog: ■ ■ Expand Structural Element may not be supported ➤ Warning 1. Click Structural Columns: W-Wide Flange-Column: W10X33 ■ ■ Click Show.

9 In the Warning dialog: ■ ■ Expand Circular Support Chain Detected ➤ First Warning Click Structural Framing: W-Wide Flange-Column: W18X40 ■ Click Show. Review circular reference warnings 8 Click Tools menu ➤ Review Warnings. Analytical Checks | 489 . Notice the column is not supported by an isolated footing.The unsupported element is highlighted and displayed in the drawing area.

10 In the Warning dialog. E-3. under Structural Plans. Correct member supports 11 In the Project Browser. 14 On the Design bar. Notice the highlighted beam requires an adjacent beam for support on one end. D-4. 16 Correct the placement of the structural beams as shown. click Foundation ➤ Isolated. Notice that there are missing isolated footings at specific grid locations. D-2. H-3. and H-4. double-click Level 2. 12 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Correct circular reference 15 In the Project Browser. 490 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . double-click Ground Level. 13 Place an isolated footing at each of the following grid locations: E-1.■ Click OK in the Viewing Tips dialog. click Modify. click Close. under Structural Plans.

This indicates the specific element has a physical length but no analytical length. 6 In the Warning dialog: ■ ■ Expand Zero-length Analytical Model Detected ➤ first Warning. 4 Close the Warning dialog. Revit Structure checks for consistency between the analytical and physical models.Run a consistency check 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Warning dialog. and double-click 3D. Click Structural Columns: W-Wide Flange-Column: W10X49 Analytical Checks | 491 . Review warnings 5 Click Tools menu ➤ Review Warnings. A Warning dialog appears notifying you that there are model elements that have a zero-length. Notice that the structural element is highlighted on the model as each warning is selected. expand 3D Views. click to view each warning. 2 Click Tools menu ➤ Analytical Model ➤ Analytical / Physical Model Consistency Check.

7 In the Warning dialog. click . 492 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . Click OK in the Viewing Tips dialog. notice that Ground Level is selected as the value for Top Vertical Projection. 8 Select the column that was previously highlighted. click Close. The Zero-length element is highlighted and displayed in the drawing area. In the Element Properties dialog.■ ■ Click Show. under Analytical Model. and on the Options Bar.

Analytical Checks | 493 .9 In the Element Properties dialog. click OK. Correct zero-length elements 10 Enter ZF (Zoom To Fit). 11 Click or drag the ViewCube to re-orient the view until the south side of the structure is visible as shown. and select the 3 columns identified in the warning dialog as shown. 12 Press CTRL.

The following illustration shows the Structural Settings dialog with the Load Cases tab selected. In the next exercise. select Top of Column. You can save the open file if you wish. click . click OK.13 On the Options Bar. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. This indicates the zero-length warnings have been fixed. for Top Vertical Projection. a new training file is provided. 18 Proceed to the next exercise. 494 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . Load Cases In the Structural Settings dialog. Load Cases on page 494. you edit and add load cases. 14 Under Analytical Model. 16 Click Tools menu ➤ Analytical Model ➤ Analytical / Physical Model Consistency Check. 17 Click File menu ➤ Close. The Warning dialog does not appear.

edit. 5 Under Category. The selected load case is copied in the table. or delete load cases. A new load case is added to the bottom of the table. 2 Click Add.rvt. NOTE The Case Number column of the table is read-only. Revit Structure provides a default number. In this table. you learn how to add new load cases. Add a Load Case 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Structural Settings. Revit Structure provides several default load case types that you can use to generate loads in the model. Add a load nature 1 Click in the Load Natures table. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files. Load Cases | 495 .The first table is the Load Cases table. select the Load Cases tab. 2 In the Structural Settings dialog. then click Duplicate. you add. 3 Click Add. and open Imperial\i_RST_SAM3. you add or delete load natures. NOTE You can also create a new load case with the Duplicate command. and the Add button changes to Duplicate. The second table is the Load Natures table. A new load nature record is added to the bottom of the table. 4 Click in the name cell of the new load case. In this exercise. In this table. Select an existing load case record in the table. select Dead Loads. and rename it to Roof Hung. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

In this exercise. perpendicular to the host’s work plane. Loads are placed perpendicular to the view’s current work plane. Hosts include slabs and beams. 5 Click File menu ➤ Save As. using the project coordinate system. A host for a load has its own work plane. Use the project file that you saves at the end of that exercise. and loads can be placed by default. and save the model to a location of your choice using the following filename: i_RST_SAM3-in progress.Analytical. 4 Click OK to close the Structural Settings dialog.rvt Change the coordinate system orientation 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click View 1 . and enter an appropriate name. expand Views (all).3 Click in the cell of the new load nature. Then you create load combinations for use by analysis and design software. The orientation of the project coordination is as illustrated: A view has a work plane that can be used for object placement. 496 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . i_RST_SAM3-in progress. 6 Proceed to the next exercise. expand 3D Views. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise.rvt. live loads. Revit Structure has several coordinate systems for loads: ■ ■ ■ project coordinate system current work plane host work plane The project coordinate system displays in the view when you click Loads on the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Adding Loads to the Model on page 496. and wind loads to the model. Adding Loads to the Model Loads are added to the model using a coordinate system. NOTE The new load nature is now available under the Nature column of the Load Cases table. you will be adding dead loads.

under Analytical Model. and click OK. 4 Select . click (Area Load). click Loads. click the Model Graphics Style control. 9 Click the garage sloped slab. 5 On the Options Bar. 8 On the Options Bar.2 On the View Control Bar. draw a zoom box around the garage sloped slab and select it. TIP Be sure to click the Area Load with Host option. . select 6 In the Element Properties dialog. 3 Click or drag the ViewCube to rotate the model so the garage sloped slab is visible. Adding Loads to the Model | 497 . Use the tooltips to be sure you click the correct option. 7 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and click Hidden Line. select Top of Slab for Vertical Projection.

2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. expand Structural Plans. The load coordinates are now parallel to the project. and double-click Level 2-Analytical. . and on the Options Bar. 498 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . expand Views (all). under Structural Analysis. 10 On the Design Bar. Notice the coordinate system indicates the load is perpendicular to the host (ramp). Add an area load at level 2 using slab as host 1 In the Project Browser. click (Area Load).The load is placed on the garage sloped slab. click Modify. click Loads. 11 Select the load. click 13 Click OK. 3 On the Options Bar. select Project for Orient to.

0300 ksf for the Fz 1 parameter. 7 Right-click on the load you placed.TIP Be sure to click the Area Load with Host option. Adding Loads to the Model | 499 . and click Element Properties. and click OK. select Area Load: Area Load 1. 5 Select the Level 2 slab perimeter as shown. click Modify to exit the Loads tool. double-click Level 2-Analytical. 6 On the Design Bar. click Loads. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. under Structural Plans. Use the Tooltips to be sure you click the correct option. 4 In the Type Selector. Add wind load at Level 2 9 In the Project Browser. enter -0. 10 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

0400 kip/ft for Fx 1 500 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . 14 Right-click on the Line Load 1. click (Line Load). and click Element Properties. 13 On the Design Bar. as shown. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. 16 In the Type Properties dialog. Watch the Status Bar to be sure you are highlighting Line Load 1. click Duplicate. click Edit/New. do the following: ■ ■ Enter 0 kip/ft for Fz 1 Enter 0.11 On the Options Bar. Use the Tooltips to be sure you click the correct option. click Modify. TIP Be sure to click the Line Load option. TIP You may need to press TAB to highlight the line load. enter Wind Load. 12 Sketch a line load from one corner of the slab to the other.

expand 3D Views. and double-click View 1 .■ Select WIND1(3) for Load Case. draw a zoom box around the beams on the east side of the structure as shown. and click OK.Analytical. 21 Select . and click Hidden Line. 19 On the View Control Bar. double-click Level 2 . under Structural Plans. Adding Loads to the Model | 501 . 20 In the Project Browser. click the Model Graphics Style control. expand Views (all). 18 In the Project Browser.Analytical in order to view the added loads.

23 Draw a temporary grid as shown. 502 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . click Grid.22 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

and press DELETE. click Modify.This grid is drawn for reference only. 27 Select the temporary grid. The elevation view opens. and will be deleted in a later step. 29 Select . 25 Place the framing elevation symbol so that it will snap to the temporary grid approximately as shown. 26 On the Design bar. click Framing Elevation. Adding Loads to the Model | 503 . draw a zoom box around the lower floors of the structure as shown. 24 On the View tab of the Design bar. 28 Double-click the new elevation bubble.

Use the Tooltips to be sure you click the correct option. click . as shown. click (Line Load). The load projection plane is now oriented to the workplane of the temporary grid line plane to which the framing elevation was pointing. 34 Select the load. click Loads. 31 On the Options Bar.30 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 32 On Level 2. TIP Be sure to click the Line Load option. 504 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . You will see the load is oriented to project orientation. under Structural Analysis. and click OK. 33 Drawing the load from one corner of the flange to the other. 35 In the Element Properties dialog. and on the Options Bar. select Workplane for Orient to. select the edge of the flange as the starting point for the load.

click Structural Settings.36 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Load Combination In this exercise. click the Load Combinations tab. i_RST_SAM3-in progress. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. 9 Under Factor. enter 1. and save the model to a location of your choice using the following filename: i_RST_SAM3-in progress.6.rvt Add a DL + LL combination 1 On the Settings menu.rvt. 8 Click Add. 2 In the Structural Settings dialog. select LL1. select DL1. You edit and add load combinations in the Structural Settings dialog. Load Combination on page 505. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. enter 1. 5 Click on the Edit Selected Formula table. 6 Under Factor. Notice that the Formula field under Load Combination changed automatically to show the new factor. 3 Click Add in the Load Combination section. 10 Under Case or Combination. enter DL+LL. Load Combination | 505 . 4 Under Name.4. and click Add. you add a load combination to your model for use by the analysis and design software. 7 Under Case or Combination. Use the project file that you saves at the end of that exercise.

and enter 1. 13 Click on the Edit Selected Formula table. select LL1.3. 17 Under Factor. Add a WIND1 combination with a factor 19 Click Add in the Edit Selected Formula table. Add a LL1 combination with a factor 16 Click Add. 20 Under Factor. 22 Click on the Load Combination table.5. 15 Under Case or Combination. 14 Under Factor. 23 Select Row 2. 25 Under State. 506 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . select DL1. 18 Under Case or Combination. 21 Under Case or Combination. select Ultimate. enter DL+LL+WIND. enter 0. 24 Under Type. and click Add.2. enter 1. 12 Under Name. select Envelope.Add a DL + LL + wind combination with a factor 11 Click on the Load Combination table. select WIND1. and click Add.

Transfer Project Standards In this exercise. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise.26 In the Structural Settings dialog. 27 Click File menu ➤ Save. Use the project file that you saves at the end of that exercise. 28 Proceed to the next exercise. Transfer Project Standards | 507 . select the file that contains the load table. 2 Click File menu ➤ Transfer Project Standards. and select Load Types. Transfer Project Standards on page 507. click OK. Scroll down the list of items. Click Check None. you transfer the load combination table to a new or existing project. ■ ■ ■ Under Copy from.rvt Importing load types and combinations from a previous project 1 Open an existing Revit Structure project or create a new project. 3 In the Select Items to Copy dialog. i_RST_SAM3-in progress.

4 In the Duplicate Types dialog. 5 Click Settings menu ➤ Structural Settings. click Overwrite. click the Load Combinations tab. 6 On the Structural Settings dialog.■ Click OK. 508 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling .

i_RST_SAM3-in progress. you document the analysis by adding an annotation.rvt Add annotation 1 In the Project Browser. 7 Click File menu ➤ Save. Documenting the Analytical Model | 509 . Documenting the Analytical Model on page 509. and double-click Level 2 Analytical. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. and creating an analytical schedule. click Tag ➤ By Category. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.The load combinations are displayed. 3 Click the Wind Load to place the tag. Use the project file that you saves at the end of that exercise. Documenting the Analytical Model In this exercise. expand Structural Plans. expand Views (all). 8 Proceed to the next exercise.

510 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . 5 On the Design Bar. 6 Click on the drag control for the wind load tag and position approximately as shown. click Modify.4 Click the Area Load to place the tag.

right-click on the Design Bar. select Line Loads and click OK. Define the fields 9 In the Schedule Properties dialog. under Category. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. click the Fields tab. and click View. click Schedule/Quantities. 11 Using the same process. The Fx 1 field is moved under Scheduled fields. add the following fields to the schedule: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Fx 2 Fy 1 Fy 2 Fz 1 Fz 2 Nature 12 Under Scheduled fields. 8 In the New Schedule dialog. select Fx 1 and click Add. 10 Under Available fields.Create a load schedule 7 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Documenting the Analytical Model | 511 . order the fields as shown in the following illustration by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down.

13 Click OK. In addition. Revit Structure provides a reset tool to reset analytical models back to their original location relative to the corresponding physical model. under Structural Plans. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. Examples of Analytical Adjustment and Reset in the Model on page 512. 14 Click File menu ➤ Save. i_RST_SAM3-in progress. Examples of Analytical Adjustment and Reset in the Model There are some structural configurations that are not suitable for direct integration with structural analysis and design software.3.rvt Align the analytical beam 1 In the Project Browser. For this reason. the geometry of the analytical model may be adjusted in relation to those elements that it joins. 512 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . A schedule is created that includes the analytical elements in the project. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. double-click Ground Level . Manual adjustment is required before a structural model is input into the analysis and design software.Analytical. 2 Zoom into the column at grid line F . Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise.

4 Press TAB. 5 Press TAB.3 Click Tools menu ➤ Analytical Model ➤ Adjust Analytical Model. and select the endpoint of the analytical line of the beam. and select the corner endpoint of the analytical plane of the slab. Examples of Analytical Adjustment and Reset in the Model | 513 .

■ Creating beams The corresponding beam to slab projection planes are matched. In the next exercise. Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model on page 514. For example. Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model The analytical model that is generated in Revit Structure has discrepancies that are not suitable for direct integration with structural analysis and design software. 6 Click File menu ➤ Close.The analytical model lines and planes are now connected at the same location for analysis purposes. NOTE The auto-detect feature automatically adjusts the analytical model when creating the following structural elements within a project. setting both planes to level 2 as shown: ■ Creating columns Places the analytical model of columns and walls in the same plane as shown: ■ Creating slabs and walls 514 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . 7 Proceed to the next exercise. You can save the open file if you wish. a new training file is provided. Revit Structure provides the capability to automatically adjust the analytical model to reduce or eliminate these discrepancies for newly created elements as well as the ability to disassociate or reassociate the auto-detect parameter for existing elements.

the top or bottom plane of the wall’s analytical model will coincide with the slab analytical model as shown: If a wall has a portion that extends beyond the roof (commonly known as parapets). Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model | 515 . despite any variation in wall thicknesses or projection plane location as shown: If a wall and slab are joined. it can be excluded in the wall’s analytical model to exclude loads that extend above a level with framing members.Aligns the vertical and horizontal analytical projection plane of walls.

This exercise applies the auto-detect feature within the tolerances specified in this dialog. 2 In the Structural Settings dialog. select the Analytical Model Settings tab. and open Imperial\i_RST_SAM_Auto_Detect.rvt. Auto-detect tolerances 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Structural Settings. the exterior of the wall can be defined as the analytical projection plane. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 516 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . or it can be trimmed back the analytical/physical model of the slab as shown: NOTE The following adjustments to the analytical model are applied to an existing project to better demonstrate the auto-detect feature. and the auto-detect tolerances for both horizontal and vertical planes. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. They include distances for the analytical-to-physical model and analytical adjustments. click Training Files. 3 Click OK.If the analytical edge of slab coincides with the beam or wall analytical model.

5 Move the cursor over the top of the beam as shown. 4 On the Toolbar. and draw a zoom box around one of the beams. Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model | 517 . double-click Level 2. click as shown. 2 On the Toolbar.Adjust the beam to slab vertical offset 1 In the Project Browser ➤ Structural Plans. . click . and draw a zoom box around the lower-left corner of the structure 3 Double-click the section bubble to open the section view.

represents the vertical projection plane of the beam analytical model. 6 Click the beam. a single beam is selected 7 In the Element Properties dialog. and on the Option Bar. The vertical projection plane of the analytical model automatically moves to the top of the slab. for Vertical Projection.The dot located at the top of the beam. click . click . select Top of Slab. NOTE The properties for all beams of the same type should be changed. for Vertical Projection. and then click OK. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. For demo purposes. under Analytical Model. 518 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . select Auto-detect. 8 Click the slab. and then click OK. and on the Option Bar. under Analytical Model.

13 Draw a zoom box around the column as shown. Notice the green line representing the analytical model of the concrete wall is not aligned with the blue dot representing the analytical model of the column. click . and draw a zoom box around the column at grid location A3. Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model | 519 . 11 On the Toolbar. and click Zoom in Region.Analytical. right-click. represents the vertical projection plane of the analytical model. double-click Level 2 . 12 In an empty part of the drawing area. Adjust the column to wall horizontal offset 10 In the Project Browser ➤ Structural Plans. The dot located at the top of the slab.The vertical projection plane of the analytical model automatically moves to the top of the slab.

and then click OK. select Auto-detect. Adjust the vertical alignment of different wall types 17 In the Project Browser ➤ Structural Plans. under Analytical Model. for Horizontal Projection. and on the Option Bar. aligns with the horizontal projection plane of the wall. click (Join Geometry). 16 On the Tools toolbar. click . The geometry of the column and wall are now joined. and then select the column. select the wall. 520 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . 18 On the Toolbar. double-click Level 2. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. click .14 Click the column. The horizontal projection plane for the column. and draw a zoom box around the elevator shaft located on the lower-right side of the structure as shown.

Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model | 521 .19 Double-click the section bubble to open the section view.

and then click OK.Notice the solid green lines are not aligned. 21 Press TAB. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. The dotted green line represents reference plane 1. for Horizontal Projection. Check the Status Bar to verify you are selecting the chain of walls and not a single wall. and select Chain of Walls or Lines. click . select Auto-detect. These lines represent the vertical projection plane of the upper and lower wall analytical model. under Analytical Model. 22 On the Option Bar. 20 Move the cursor over the lower wall. 522 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling .

and click Zoom in Region. and then click OK. 26 Click the upper wall. click . under Analytical Model. right-click. select Plane 1. 24 In an empty part of the drawing area. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model | 523 . and on the Option Bar. for Horizontal Projection.The vertical projection plane for the lower wall is now aligned with the vertical projection plane of the upper wall. 25 Draw a zoom box around the center of the upper and lower walls as shown.

524 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . and click Zoom in Region. Adjust the vertical alignment of a wall and slab 28 In the Project Browser ➤ Sections (Building Section).The vertical projection plane for both the upper and lower walls are now aligned with vertical projection plane 1. double-click Section 3. right-click. 29 In an empty part of the drawing area. 30 Draw a zoom box around the intersection of the beam and column.

and then click OK. and on the Option Bar. click .The brown line represents the analytical model of the slab. under Analytical Model. The vertical projection plane for the lower wall is now aligned with the horizontal projection plane of the slab. and then click OK. select Bottom of Slab. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. click . Notice the green line extends to the top of the beam. for Top Vertical Projection. and the green line represents the analytical model of the wall. for Vertical Projection. select Auto-detect. 31 Click the lower wall. and on the Option Bar. Adjust the horizontal alignment of the slab to wall 33 Click the slab. under Analytical Model. Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model | 525 . 34 In the Element Properties dialog.

The horizontal projection plane for the slab (brown line) is now aligned with the vertical projection plane of the wall (green line). and then click OK.Analytical. 35 Click the slab. 38 On the Option Bar. click . for Analytical Slab Edge. and on the Option Bar. click . 42 Click the lower wall. In the Revit dialog. select Exterior Face. double-click Section 3. 37 Select the left sketch line of the slab as shown. select Auto-detect. 41 In the Project Browser ➤ Sections (Building Section). for Horizontal Projection. 43 In the Element Properties dialog. select Structural Plan: Level 2 . and then click Open View. You are now in sketch mode and the slab perimeter appears in the drawing area. under Analytical Model. Notice the analytical line of the wall moves with the analytical line of the slab. 39 In the Element Properties dialog. and then click OK. and on the Option Bar. click Finish Sketch. click . under Analytical Model. 36 In the Go to View dialog. click No. 40 On the Design Bar. 526 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling .

and on the Option Bar. and then click OK. Adjust the column to the lower wall analytical projection 44 Click the column. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. select Top of Wall. under Analytical Model. click . and on the Option Bar. click . 47 In the Element Properties dialog.The horizontal projection plane of the slab is now aligned with the exterior face of the wall. under Analytical Model. Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model | 527 . and then click OK. 46 Click the lower wall. select Auto-Detect Horizontal Projection. for Top Vertical Projection.

Both windows will be visible in the drawing area. 528 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . double-click Level 3 . and draw a zoom box around the beam located in the upper-left corner of both views as shown.The vertical projection plane of the column (blue line) is now aligned with the exterior face of the wall (green line). click . Close any additional open windows. 50 In the Project Browser ➤ Structural Plans. Adjust the horizontal alignment of a beam 48 In the Project Browser ➤ Structural Plans. 49 Enter ZF.Analytical. 51 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. double-click Level 3. 52 On the Toolbar.

for Horizontal Projection. select Auto-Detect. under Analytical Model. . and then click OK. Check the Status Bar to make sure you are selecting the shape handle and not the beam. Extend each end of the beam as shown. 55 In the Level 3 window. ■ Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model | 529 . Press TAB.53 Click the beam. click Notice the beam is highlighted in both open views. do the following: ■ ■ Move the cursor over the beam. and select the beam shape handle. 54 In the Element Properties dialog. and on the Option Bar.

You can save the open file if you wish.Notice the beam in the analytical view remains unchanged. 56 Click File menu ➤ Close. a new training file is provided. 57 Proceed to the next exercise. 530 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . In the next exercise. Boundary Conditions on page 531.

click Training Files. and for State. right-click. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Boundary Conditions. 7 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. clear Structural Foundation. 2 Enter ZF. right-click. and open Imperial\i_RST_SAM_Boundary_Conditions. 3 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 10 Draw a zoom box around the base of one of the columns.Analytical. 6 Draw a zoom box around the columns located on the lower-left side of the structure as shown.Boundary Conditions In this exercise. 5 In an empty part of the drawing area. and click Zoom in Region. and click Zoom in Region. Boundary Conditions | 531 . under Visibility. Add a point boundary condition to the base of a column 1 In the Project Browser ➤ 3D Views. double-click View 1 . and then click OK. select Fixed. you add a boundary condition to your model for use by the analysis and design software. 8 On the Options Bar. 9 In an empty part of the drawing area. click Apply. click (Point Boundary Condition). 11 Click the end of the blue line (representing the analytical model of the beam) to place the point boundary condition.rvt. 4 In the Visibility/Graphic dialog.

click . and select the other symbol. and then click OK. 13 Click one of the boundary condition symbols. select Pinned.12 Repeat this technique to add a fixed boundary condition to the next closest beam as shown. under Structural Analysis. press CTRL. 14 On the Option Bar. for State. 532 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . 15 In the Element Properties dialog.

20 On the Options Bar. click (Line Boundary Condition). Add a line boundary condition to the footing 16 Enter ZF.Notice the boundary condition now displays a pinned state symbol. click Boundary Conditions. Boundary Conditions | 533 . and for State. click . 19 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 18 On the Toolbar. and draw a zoom box around the foundation. 17 Click or drag the ViewCube to rotate the view until the foundation wall is displayed as shown. select Pinned. 21 Click the green line (representing the analytical model of the foundation) to place the line boundary condition.

sections. All views. are imported back into Revit Structure. In addition. NOTE The External Tools menu is only available once an approved 3rd party analysis software application has been installed. In the next exercise. 2 Proceed to the next tutorial. Preparing the Analytical Model to be Calculated in Third Party Analysis Software on page 534. a new training file is provided. via an Application Programming Interface (API). 534 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . member relocation. some internal analysis software parameters are imported into Revit Structure. If you choose to have the API open the software and run your model. including structural plans. or member addition.22 Click File menu ➤ Close. You can save the open file if you wish. 23 Proceed to the next exercise. elevations. and detail sheets are updated according to changes that you import into Revit Structure. Exporting Revit Structure Files on page 535. For more information. that you confirm in the analysis software. Size changes to your model and geometric modifications to your model involving member deletion. Export the model to analysis software 1 Click Tools menu ➤ External Tools ➤ Send Model. The application programming interface (API) starts. click Help ➤ Structural Analysis Partners. Preparing the Analytical Model to be Calculated in Third Party Analysis Software Revit Structure links to an analysis and design software. You can open the analysis software or write to an export file for later use. the API also returns you to your Revit Structure model and updates it.

Exporting the 3D Model to AutoCAD Architecture 2007 Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. You can export a 2D view (plan. you learn how to export your project into both 2D and 3D formats for improved coordination with architects and engineers. or you can export a 3D view directly into AutoCAD Architecture. you export sheets from the project and import them into AutoCAD 2007 or AutoCAD Architecture 2007 as 2D images. Finally. Export CAD formats 1 In the Project Browser. which is imported into AutoCAD 2007.). sheet. 535 . maintains the properties of all structural elements as true AutoCAD Architecture objects. click Training Files. or schedule into AutoCAD. etc. and double-click 3D . Exporting CAD Formats In this lesson.Atrium. elevation. expand 3D Views. You then select a 2D structural plan view and export the file as a DWG format. you begin by exporting a 3D view of the structural model as a DWG format and importing the file into AutoCAD Architecture 2007.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. In this tutorial. and open Imperial\i_RST_Export. Revit Structure.Exporting Revit Structure Files 15 Your Revit Structure 2009 project can be exported into several different AutoCAD formats. You can also export the project drawing sheets and import them as 2D images. section.

Under File naming. select Export as AutoCAD Architecture and AutoCAD MEP Options. NOTE You can only export the 3D model in a 3D view.2 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ CAD Formats. The existing file name is automatically shortened. 536 | Chapter 15 Exporting Revit Structure Files . ■ ■ Click Options. do the following: ■ Under Solids (3D views only). Under Save as type. 4 In the Export Options dialog. select AutoCAD 2007 DWG Files (*. do the following: ■ ■ Under Save in. select a folder on your local computer. 3 In the Export dialog. click Short.dwg).

■ ■ Under Prefer. 8 Navigate to the file location. select AutoCAD Architecture objects. Click OK. Exporting the 3D Model to AutoCAD Architecture 2007 | 537 . NOTE Revit Structure cannot export to earlier releases of AutoCAD Architecture. 5 On the Export dialog. click Save. 7 Click File menu ➤ Open. View the 3D file in AutoCAD Architecture 2007 6 Open AutoCAD Architecture 2007. and click Open.

10 Minimize the AutoCAD Architecture program. the Revit Structure model appears as shown. and notice it is a true AutoCAD Architecture structural element. 9 Select a beam as shown. beams. click File menu ➤ Save As. and braces are converted to the corresponding type of AutoCAD Architecture structural member. and save the model to a location of your choice using the following filename: i_RST_Export-in progress.rvt. Revit Structure columns. 11 In Revit Structure. Exporting a 2D view to AutoCAD on page 539 538 | Chapter 15 Exporting Revit Structure Files . 12 Proceed to the next exercise.When the file is opened in AutoCAD Architecture 2007.

Exporting a 2D view to AutoCAD Training File ■ Continue to use the training file that was saved in the previous exercise. select AutoCAD 2007 DWG Files (*. 2 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ CAD Formats. click Long (Specify prefix for all exports).rvt. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Save in. expand Structural Plans. i_RST_Export-in progress. Click Save. select a folder on your local computer. 1 In the Project Browser. Under Save as type. Exporting a 2D view to AutoCAD | 539 . Under File name. 3 In the Export dialog. clear the existing name and enter Framing Plan Level 2. Under File naming. and double-click Level 2.dwg).

i_RST_Export-in progress. 540 | Chapter 15 Exporting Revit Structure Files . 9 Proceed to the next exercise. On the View’s export mode dialog. click Hidden Line Removal. 6 Navigate to the file location. Exporting Sheets on page 540 Exporting Sheets Training File ■ Continue to use the training file that was saved in the previous exercise. click File menu ➤ Save. and click Open. a warning dialog appears. 5 Click File menu ➤ Open. View the 2D file 4 Maximize the AutoCAD 2007 or AutoCAD Architecture 2007 program. When the file is opened in AutoCAD 2007 or AutoCAD Architecture 2007. NOTE Revit Structure cannot export to earlier releases of AutoCAD Architecture. the Revit Structure exported Level 3 Plan appears.rvt. 7 Minimize the AutoCAD or AutoCAD Architecture program.If the view was set to wireframe. 8 In Revit Structure.

and click OK. you can flatten xrefs by selecting the Export each view or sheet as a single file option as shown. 3 In the View/Sheet Set dialog. select a folder on your local computer. do the following: ■ ■ Under Show. 2 In the Export dialog. NOTE If you are exporting to a DWG file.Export sheets 1 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ CAD Formats. Exporting Sheets | 541 . clear Views. click Save. Under Export Range. do the following: ■ ■ Under Save in. Select each sheet. click Selected views/sheets ➤ Select. Click No when asked if you want to save the settings for use in a future Revit session. This option is automatically selected for DXF files and not available for DGN or SAT files. 4 On the Export dialog.

and click Open. If you wish to save the changes. NOTE Revit Structure cannot export to earlier releases of AutoCAD Architecture. 5 Close the Revit Structure file. navigate to a folder of your preference and rename the file.If the view was set to wireframe. click Hidden Line Removal. 8 Navigate to the location of the files saved in the previous exercise. 7 Click File menu ➤ Open. On the View’s export mode dialog. View the Revit Structure sheets in AutoCAD 2007 or AutoCAD Architecture 2007 6 Maximize the AutoCAD or AutoCAD Architecture program. a warning dialog appears. 542 | Chapter 15 Exporting Revit Structure Files .

Exporting Sheets | 543 . they appear as shown.When the sheets are opened in AutoCAD or AutoCAD Architecture.

544 .

rfa extension. Introduction to Families Most families are created in the Family Editor and saved as separate files with an .About Families and the Family Editor 16 All elements in Revit Structure 2009 are “family based. All different types that you create are stored with the master family file. or other parameter variables as designed by the family creator. The different file types become much easier to manage. you create a family within predefined templates that contain the intelligent objects required to create the particular family type. For example. and roofs are examples of these types of families. There are. In addition. You also learn about the Family Editor. such as a curved beam. This keeps everything coordinated and saves you the time and effort of manually keeping components and schedules up to date. because there is only one file to track. they are still related and come from a single source. however. Using the Family Editor. Walls. thus the term family. Some family types are pre-defined within Revit Structure and cannot be created or modified outside of the project environment. the types would all be saved as one file which can then be loaded into any project. shape.” The term family describes a powerful concept used throughout Revit Structure to help you manage your data and make changes easily. exceptions to this rule. In this lesson. Changes to a family type definition ripple through the project and are automatically reflected in every instance of that family or type within the project. each with a different size. you learn about the three types of families and how they are used within a project and how they are created. You provide the information necessary to describe uniquely the family geometry. if you create a family called wide beams that includes types with several sizes. 545 . you learn about the various types of families and the Family Editor. Each family element can have multiple types defined within it. there is another type of family that allows you to create any shape or form required for a particular project and have Revit Structure recognize it as a particular component type. material set. Using Families and the Family Editor One of the many advantages of using Revit Structure is the ability to create your own families of components without having to learn a complex programming language. and when and how to use it. In this tutorial. Even though various types within a family can look different.

has wall types that define interior. The following dialog box shows how you can select a specific family template to start your family design project. floors. You can duplicate and modify existing system families.Revit Structure has three types of families: ■ ■ ■ System Standard Component In-place System Families System families are pre-defined within Revit Structure and comprise principle building components such as walls. while many more are stored in component libraries. NOTE You can use “Transfer Project Standards” to copy system families from one project to another. The following illustration shows different types within the basic walls family. generic. You can either duplicate and modify an existing component family or create a component family based on a variety of family templates. but you cannot create new system families. Host-based families have components that require hosts. and beam. for example. and partition wall styles. You work with the Family Editor to create and modify components. foundation. Family templates are either host-based or standalone. The basic walls system family. and roofs. Standard Component Families Standard component families are loaded by default in project templates. 546 | Chapter 16 About Families and the Family Editor . exterior. Standalone families include columns. Family templates assist you in creating and manipulating component families.

custom step footing. In-place Families In-place families are either model or annotation components in a particular project. for example. The following illustration shows an in-place step footing. Introduction to Families | 547 . transfer them from one project to another. You have a choice of categories when you create in-place families. and the category that you use determines the appearance and display control of the component within the project. and also a standalone pile cap family component. so they are useful for objects unique to that project. You create in-place families only within the current project.rfa extension. The following illustration shows host-based openings in a wall. You can load them into projects.Standard component families can exist outside of the project environment and have an . and save them from a project file to your library if needed.

Add a family to a project 1 Open or start a project. 3 Navigate to the library or location of the family. how to access it. Families are listed in the Project Browser under their respective component category. To add a family to your project. Families store all of the necessary geometry to display the two-dimensional (2D) and three-dimensional (3D) versions of particular objects. as well as the level of detail associated with that view. 4 Select the family file name and click Open. In the final exercise. elevation. if you change the original family. Load Family command on the File menu. or 3D. you learned about the different types of Revit Structure families and when to use them. you learn about the Family Editor. Family element visibility can be dependent of your viewing direction. You do not have to carry the original family file along with the project. 2 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family. After the family has been loaded in the project. reload the family in the project to see the updated family. such as plan. Introduction to the Family Editor You can use the Family Editor to create both real-life building components and graphical/annotation components. In this section. and when to use it. you can drag it into the document window. In this exercise. you learn when to use the Family Editor. and the general procedure for creating a standard component family. or you can load it using the Load From Library. 548 | Chapter 16 About Families and the Family Editor . However. how to access it. it is saved with the project.

try to find the component that most closely resembles it.rfa extension and it opens Revit Structure in the Family Editor. There is a logical thought process to follow: 1 Is there a component of this type already loaded into this project? If so. and click Open. 2 Define subcategories for the family to aid in controlling visibility of the object. you will need a specific component for your design. you can click File ➤ Open. 6 Flex the new model to verify correct component behavior. 5 Add label dimensions to create type or instance parameters. General procedure for creating a standard component family 1 Select the appropriate family template.When to use the Family Editor During the design process. With Revit Structure open. If you find a close match. you can double-click any file with an . 3 Next. click File ➤ New ➤ Family. 4 If you cannot find the component you require. 3 Lay out reference planes to aid in drawing component geometry. How to use the Family Editor You can access the Family Editor in several ways. 7 Specify 2D and 3D geometry display characteristics with subcategory and entity visibility settings. To start a new family. 9 Save the newly defined family. When the family opens. and then load it into the project. It will be apparent because the only Design Bar tab available is Family. You can have a project open and the Family Editor open simultaneously. navigate to a family file. 2 If there is not a component family loaded in the project. create a component family using one of the family templates as a starting point. In this case. and click Open. Introduction to the Family Editor | 549 . if you have exhausted your external resources. it opens within the Family Editor. it will be available within the Type Selector. 4 Add dimensions to specify parametric component geometry. select the appropriate template. 5 Finally. open it in the Family Editor. 8 Define family type variations by specifying different parameters. presume it is a bay window that you require. Within the Windows® environment. consider checking the Web library and other Web resources. you can search the component library loaded on your local hard drive. such as newsgroups. modify it as needed. and then load it into a new project and see how it performs. It is far easier to modify an existing component within the Family Editor than to create it from scratch. Also consider any internal family libraries that exist on the network.

550 .

Modifications to the existing families are saved as a family (. you learn how to create specific Revit Structure 2009 Families. 551 . a custom titleblock.rft file). Creating a Custom Metal Deck Family In this exercise. not within the Family template (. and an in-place family for a step-footing. you create it within the project file. you modify the profile for a non-composite metal deck family by adding a dovetail rib.Creating Components in the Family Editor 17 In this tutorial. a reinforcement layout with overlapping rebar. Using the installed templates. non-composite metal deck family by adding a dovetail rib to the deck profile. In the first exercise. In the second exercise. you customize 2 different families with the Revit Structure family editor. When you create an in-place family. a custom castellated beam. you create a custom opening in a castellated beam family. you create the following families: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ a custom metal deck profile. This allows you to create the family in the context of the current project. Creating Custom Families In this lesson. you create a custom.rft) template for use in other projects.

4 On the Annotations Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. and click Zoom to Fit. and then click OK. Delete the same parameter on the opposite side of the profile.rfa. select 1 1/2" = 1' 0" for scale. 552 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor .Open the metal deck family profile 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 6 On the View Control Bar. 8 Delete additional vertical reference planes until the view appears as shown. and press DELETE. click Training Files. do the following: ■ ■ Under Visibility. Click Apply. 5 In an empty part of the drawing area. click Dimensions and Reference Planes. 3 Click View menu ➤ Visibility Graphics. right-click. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\Form Deck_Non Composite. Delete vertical reference planes 7 Select parameter wr as shown.

11 Place a dimension for the angle as follows: Click the horizontal reference plane. Click the angle. click Modify. Move the cursor inside the profile.Modify the angular reference plane 9 On the Design Bar. Creating a Custom Metal Deck Family | 553 . click Dimension. 10 On the Options Bar. and click to place the dimension as shown. 12 On the Design Bar. click ■ ■ ■ (Create Angular Dimensions).

enter 66. right-click.13 Select the angled reference plane. 16 On the View Control Bar. Repeat this technique to add a dimension for the angle on the opposite side of the profile. 17 Click the top and bottom dimensions. and click Zoom to Fit. and press ENTER. 14 Select the angular dimension and click the lock symbol to lock the angle to the horizontal reference plane. 554 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 15 In an empty part of the drawing area. select 6" = 1' 0" for scale. and drag them approximately as shown.

and press DELETE.18 Select the dimension that refers to the width of the profile base. Creating a Custom Metal Deck Family | 555 . Repeat for the dimension on the opposite side. and add a dimension as shown. Place new dimensions 19 On the Design Bar. click Dimension.

and click the EQ symbol to apply equal constraints. 28 Add a dimension from the top of the profile to the dovetail horizontal reference plane as shown. under Other. for Is Reference. 25 Select the reference planes and on the Options Bar. 22 On the Design Bar. and draw a zoom box around the top of the profile. click Dimension. click . 556 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Dimension and constrain the dovetail 27 On the Design Bar. 26 On the Element Properties dialog.20 Add 2 dimensions from the center reference plane to the bottom of each side of the profile as shown. Sketch the dovetail reference planes 21 On the View Toolbar. select Not a Reference. and then click OK. 24 Press ESC. 23 Draw 1 horizontal and 4 vertical reference planes approximately as shown. click . click Ref Plane.

The dimensions displayed in the following steps are provided for reference only and can be customized based on your requirements. Creating a Custom Metal Deck Family | 557 . and click the lock symbol to lock the distance to the horizontal reference plane. and enter 0' 11/32". 30 Select the horizontal reference plane. These dimensions refer to the positioning of the dovetail in relation to the profile center reference plane. and press ENTER. click the dimension. 31 Select the dimension line. 32 Repeat the previous technique to add the remaining dimensions for the dovetail as shown. 33 Click the EQ symbol to constrain the dimensions as shown. 29 Press ESC.

36 Click Modify. Create parameters a and b 40 Select the lower dovetail dimension as shown. 38 Using the split tool. trace the line between the dovetail and the existing element as shown. 35 Sketch the dovetail by snapping to the intersections of the vertical and horizontal reference planes as shown.Sketch the dovetail 34 On the Design Bar. 39 Press ESC. 558 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 37 On the Tools toolbar click (Split). click Lines. and click Delete Inner Segment.

45 In the Parameters Properties dialog. 42 In the Parameters Properties dialog. Creating a Custom Metal Deck Family | 559 . click Label ➤ Add Parameter.41 On the Options Bar. under Parameter Data. enter b for Name. and then click OK. click Label ➤ Add Parameter. 44 On the Options Bar. 43 Select the upper dovetail dimension as shown. under Parameter Data. enter a for Name. and then click OK.

and select wr. Flex the new dovetail profile 50 On the Design Bar. do the following. ■ Under Other. 49 On the Options Bar. select 2" X 6". and OK. 48 Select the dimension as shown. 47 In the Family Types dialog. click Label. enter 0' 4 1/2". 51 In the Family Types dialog. 560 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . do the following: ■ ■ ■ For Name. click Family Types.Define wr parameter 46 On the Design Bar. enter 0' 2". Click Apply. for a. click Family Types. for wr. Under Other.

enter 0' 2". select Structural Analysis-Default. Under Family Types. 58 Click File ➤ Save. enter 0' 5". select Rename. 60 In the New Project dialog. Under Other. Create a new project 59 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. and click OK. Under Other. do the following. Click Apply. Creating a Custom Metal Deck Family | 561 . for Sr. under Structural Plans. 62 In the New Project dialog. and click Save. click Slab. 54 In the left pane of the Save As dialog. click Finish Sketch. enter Form Deck_Non Composite_Dovetail. and click Open. and enter 2" x 5". click (Rectangle). You are now in sketch mode. click Save the new profile 53 Click File ➤ Save As. click the Imperial Library folder. Under Other. Create new parameters 56 On the Design Bar. 57 In the Family Types dialog. 67 Draw a slab in the center of the drawing area. 61 In the Choose Template dialog.rfa. for a. click Family Types. enter 0' 2 1/2". and for File Name. Click Apply.■ ■ Under Other. double-click Level 2. click Browse. Notice that the dovetail adjusts automatically to the new parameters. click OK. 52 On the Toolbar. for b. 63 In the Project Browser.rte. 55 Click Profiles ➤ Structural folder. in the Imperial Templates folder. 65 On the Design Bar. enter 0' 2 1/2". for b. 66 On the Options Bar. click Lines. The slab size should be approximately 55' 0" long by 35' 0" wide. 68 On the Design Bar. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ (Undo). 64 On the Design Bar. and then click OK.

double-click Section 1. For Model Graphic Style. select 1" = 1' 0". For Detail Level. 70 Click above the slab and draw a section line through the slab approximately as shown. 73 On the View Control toolbar. under Sections (Building Sections). select Fine. and in the Type Selector. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For Scale.The slab is created. 71 In the Project Browser. 562 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Section. Create a section view of the slab 69 On the Design Bar. select Floor: 3" LW Concrete on 2" Composite Metal Deck. select Wireframe. 72 Select the slab.

under Sections. Customizing a Castellated Beam | 563 . 76 Select the slab. click Load into Project. Customizing a Castellated Beam In this exercise. select the new metal deck profile file. If it is not. Under Layers. and open the new family file. 75 On the Families Design Bar. The new profile is applied to the slab. 78 In the Type Properties dialog. select the slab project from the available files. click Edit/New. 82 In the Project Browser. 81 In the Element Properties dialog. 80 In the Type Properties dialog. for Deck profile.rvt. and on the Options Bar. double-click Section 1. and open Imperial\i_RST_Custom_Beam. Click OK. 79 In the Edit Assembly dialog. Customizing a Castellated Beam on page 563. click Training Files. click OK. select Layer 3. under Construction. open the file from the saved folder location. The new non-composite metal deck family is loaded into the slab project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Edit for Structure. 83 Proceed to the next exercise. click OK. do the following. If there are multiple files open. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Under Structural Deck Properties. ■ ■ ■ . The file should still be open.Apply the custom family to the metal deck 74 Click the Window menu. you create a custom opening in a castellated beam. click 77 In the Element Properties dialog.

dt1 = Tee depth top beam. and on the Options Bar. . . ■ ■ ■ ■ e1 = Tee length. and draw a zoom box around one of the openings in the 2 Select the beam. click Edit/New. Refer to the following diagram to identify and define the parameters for the beam opening. b = Length of sloped portion. click castellated beam. click 3 In the Element Properties dialog. 564 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 4 Position both dialogs so the opening is visible in the drawing area as shown. e2 = Space between voids (web post length).Modify the beam opening 1 On the Options Bar.

2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating a Custom Reinforcement Layout on page 565. For dt2. Sketch the rebar 3 On the Design Bar. click Training Files. enter 0' 4". For b. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. Click Apply. Notice the opening in the beam changes based on the new parameters. For dt1. and open Imperial\2D Rebar Shape Template. For e2. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. Open the 2-dimensional (2D) rebar family 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. enter 0' 5 1/2". Creating a Custom Reinforcement Layout In this exercise.■ dt2 = Tee depth bottom beam.rft. enter 0' 3". you create a custom reinforcement layout with overlapping rebar. click Rebar Lines. under Construction. Creating a Custom Reinforcement Layout | 565 . enter 0' 3". enter 0' 6". do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For e1. 7 Proceed to the next lesson. click OK. and then click OK.

■ Click and draw a vertical line to create the inside loop.4 On the Options Bar. and draw a horizontal line to create the top surface of the rebar. ■ Click and draw a second horizontal line to create the bottom of the rebar. click ■ (Draw). 566 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . as follows: Click to the right of the vertical reference plane. 5 Draw the overlapping rebar as one continuous line.

■ Click and draw a second vertical line to create the outside loop. Creating a Custom Reinforcement Layout | 567 . click Dimension. click Modify. 6 On the Design Bar. Place dimensions 7 On the Design Bar. ■ Click and draw a horizontal line to complete the rebar sketch. 8 Place dimensions on the rebar sketch as shown.

Create parameter labels 10 Select the upper horizontal rebar dimension as shown. 11 On the Options Bar. select B. 568 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . for Label.Make sure you snap to the reference plane when placing the dimensions. 9 Press ESC. 12 Select the inside vertical rebar dimension as shown.

13 On the Options Bar. 15 On the Options Bar. for Label. Creating a Custom Reinforcement Layout | 569 . for Label. select C. 14 Select the bottom horizontal rebar dimension as shown. 16 Select the outside vertical rebar dimension as shown. select D.

for Label. select C. in the Choose Template dialog. Save the new profile 20 Click File ➤ Save As. click OK. 19 On the Options Bar. enter Square.17 On the Options Bar. 25 In the Imperial Templates folder. 18 Select the inner horizontal rebar dimension as shown. for Label. select Structural Analysis-Default.rte. 26 In the New Project dialog. 22 In the Save As dialog. Create a new project 23 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. 570 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . select B. click Browse. and click Open. 21 Navigate to a folder of your choice. 24 In the New Project dialog. for File name. and click Save.

click (Rectangle). 30 On the Options Bar. 29 On the Design Bar. 32 On the Design Bar.27 In the Project Browser. click Lines. scroll down the list of available shapes. and click OK. You are now in Sketch mode. click Load into Projects.rfa file is open. Load the overlapping rebar into the new project 33 Click the Window menu. The file should still be open. under Structural Plans. click Finish Sketch. open the file from the saved folder location. 35 In the Load into Projects dialog. select the new project. Launch the rebar shape browser 36 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. The Rebar Shape Browser launches. positioned in the right-side of the drawing area. 31 Draw a slab in the center of the drawing area. The slab is created. click Rebar ➤ Place Rebar Parallel. This browser provides multiple rebar shape types that can be placed within the specified host. Sketch a slab 28 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and corresponds to the shape specified on the Options bar. If it is not. 37 Click on the Rebar Shape Browser. The new overlapping rebar family is now loaded into the slab project. and select Rebar Shape: Square. click Slab. 34 On the Families Design Bar. and be certain that the Square. double-click Level 2. NOTE You can launch or close the Rebar Shape Browser by clicking Place rebar parallel to the slab on the Options Bar. The active rebar shape is highlighted. Creating a Custom Reinforcement Layout | 571 .

39 In the Type Selector. for Placement Plane. 572 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Modify rebar layout 43 On the View Control Bar. select Near Cover Reference. Notice that the rebar shape is positioned over the slab.38 On the Options Bar. select Detail Level: Fine. 41 Click to place the rebar. 42 Click ESC. 40 Hover over the section view. select Rebar Bar: #10. 44 Select the rebar.

you create an in-place family in your current project rather than in the Family (. Creating In-Place Families | 573 . 46 On the Design Bar. 47 Proceed to the next lesson. Creating In-Place Families In this lesson.Notice that the rebar shape handles appear. you start with an incomplete foundation wall. Creating In-Place Families on page 573. Because in-place families interact with the structural model according to their assigned family category. 45 Select one of the shape handles and change the position or shape of the rebar as shown.rft) template. click Modify.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. Create new family category 5 In the Project Browser. click Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 1.Creating a Step Footing In-Place Family In this exercise. select Wall Foundation: Bearing Footing . click 3D Views ➤ 3D. 3 In the Type Selector.36" x 12". Place the foundation wall 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. and draw a zoom box around the foundation steps as shown. click Foundation ➤ Wall. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. The footing is placed at the base of the foundation wall. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 574 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . you create a step footing on an existing foundation wall. and open Imperial\i_RST_In-Place-Footing. click . 6 On the Options Bar. 4 Click the foundation wall. click Training Files.

and click OK. click Create. 9 In the Name dialog. Sketch the extrusion 13 Click the corner of the footing to start the extrusion sketch as shown. 8 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog. Make sure the entire footing is selected. enter Structural Foundations 1 for Name. and click OK. 12 Press TAB. and select the bearing footing as shown. and click OK. select Structural Foundations. Creating a Step Footing In-Place Family | 575 . 11 In the Work Plane dialog.7 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. select Pick a plane. 10 On the Design Bar.

click Modify. for Name. enter -3' 0". 22 On the Family Design Bar. under Materials and Finishes. click Finish Sketch. 576 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 24 On the Options Bar. The dimensions have been added for reference purposes only. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. 21 On the Design Bar.14 Using the drawing tools provided with Revit Structure. click Extrusion Properties. 19 In the Materials dialog. Copy extrusion 23 Select the extrusion. click the value for Material. click . 15 On the Options Bar. Change extrusion properties 17 On the Design Bar. select Concrete .Cast-in-Place Concrete. sketch a solid extrusion as shown. click OK. 16 On the Design Bar. and then click OK. and select Multiple. 25 Click the corner of the step foundation and the extrusion as shown. for Depth. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. click Finish Family.

26 Click to place a second copy of the extrusion as shown. 27 Click to place a third copy of the extrusion as shown. Creating a Step Footing In-Place Family | 577 .

click (Join Geometry). and click Multiple Join.28 Press ESC. 31 Select the lower extrusion as shown. 578 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 30 Select the wall foundation as shown. 32 Select the middle extrusion as shown. Join extrusion elements to the footing 29 On the Options Bar.

33 Select the upper extrusion as shown. 35 On the Options Bar. and click Multiple Join. Join extrusion elements to each other 34 On the Design Bar. 37 Select the lower extrusion as shown. click Modify. click (Join Geometry). 36 Select the middle extrusion as shown. Creating a Step Footing In-Place Family | 579 .

580 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click 3D Views ➤ 3D. 39 Press ESC. 40 In the Project Browser.38 Select the upper extrusion as shown.

graphics.rft. The titleblock has linework. you draw all of the linework necessary to create a custom D-size sheet.Creating a Titleblock Family In this lesson.36 x 24. select D . 5 Specify the upper-left corner of the sheet for the first rectangle corner. Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet In this exercise. The default titleblock template consists of 4 border lines. and labels. click Lines. Create a new family based on the default titleblock template 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Titleblock. text. click . You customize the titleblock with a new text style. 2 In the New dialog. and then specify the lower-right corner of the sheet for the second corner of the rectangle. Creating a Titleblock Family | 581 . you create a custom titleblock sheet based on the D-size titleblock template. 4 On the Options Bar. Sketch the inside border 3 On the Design Bar. and click Open. and enter -1/2" for Offset. navigate to the Titleblocks folder. and your project data.

12 Draw a horizontal line 3'' above the lower inside border as shown. click . 582 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor .Add vertical and horizontal lines 6 On the Options Bar. click 9 Enter 0 for Offset. . 11 Draw a horizontal line 3'' below the last horizontal line as shown. and click . 7 Move the cursor over the right inside border line. 8 On the Options Bar. and click to draw a new vertical line. 10 Draw a horizontal line 4'' below the upper inside border as shown. and enter 4 1/2" for Offset.

26 On the Design Bar. 21 Move the cursor over the fifth horizontal line. 15 Zoom in on the lower-right corner of the sheet. 16 On the Design Bar. 19 Move the cursor over the third horizontal line. select the second and third horizontal lines. 18 On the Options Bar. Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet | 583 . click . 24 Move the cursor over the seventh horizontal line. 25 Move the cursor over the eighth horizontal line. and click to draw a new horizontal line 3/4'' above the existing line. select Title Blocks. click Modify. and enter 0' 1/2" for Offset. 23 Move the cursor over the third horizontal line. and click to draw a new horizontal line 1/2'' below the existing line. 22 On the Options Bar. and click to draw a new horizontal line 1/2'' below the existing line. while pressing CTRL. click Lines. 20 Move the cursor over the fourth horizontal line. NOTE The wide line style is not visible until the titleblock is loaded into a new project. and click to draw a new horizontal line 3/4'' above the existing line. click Modify. and. and click to draw a new horizontal line 3/4'' above the existing line. 17 In the Type Selector. 27 Zoom out to view the entire sheet. select Wide Lines. and click to draw a new horizontal line 1/2'' below the existing line. 14 In the Type Selector. enter 3/4" for Offset.13 On the Design Bar.

click Text. enter 3/8" Bold for Name. click Import/Link ➤ Image. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. enter 3/8" for Text Size. 584 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 10 In the Type Properties dialog. Add a company logo 1 On the File menu. and click OK. 4 Zoom in on the logo. 6 On the Options Bar. click .The titleblock linework is now complete. click Edit/New. click Duplicate.jpg. under Text. select Company Logo. 2 In the Open dialog. and click Open. 11 Click OK twice. you add a company logo. Create a new 3/8'' text style 5 On the Design Bar. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. and select Bold. text notes. navigate to Training/Common. 9 In the Name dialog. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock In this exercise. 3 Place the image in the upper-right corner of the sheet as shown. and labels to your titleblock.

Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 585 . select Text: Text Note 1. and select the last text note. click Modify. Press ENTER to add each new line of text.Add company name text 12 Draw a text box under the first horizontal line as shown. Add company address and phone number text 15 In the Type Selector. in the text box. 16 Draw a text box below the initial text. and click outside of the text box to complete the text. 17 On the Design Bar. 14 Click outside of the text box to complete the text. and drag the text note down as shown. and add an address and phone number as shown. 13 Enter Arch Design Inc. 18 Select the drag handle.

586 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and enter the following text: ■ ■ ■ ■ Consultant: Address: Address: Telephone: 22 On the Design Bar.19 Click outside the text box to complete the modification. and phone number text 20 On the Design Bar. select Constrain and Multiple. 25 Click inside the Consultant text group. click Modify. 21 Draw a text box below the second horizontal line. 23 On the Edit toolbar. and select the consultant text note. click . Add consultant name. address. 24 On the Options Bar. click Text.

31 In the Type Properties dialog.26 Move the cursor down 4''. 36 Draw a text box in the lower-right space of the titleblock. enter 3/16" for Name. 34 Click OK twice. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 587 . and enter Sheet Number. 32 In the Name dialog. and click OK. click . click Text. under Text. 29 On the Options Bar. 30 In the Element Properties dialog. Add drawing data text 35 In the Type Selector. click Duplicate. click Edit/New. and click to specify the second copied text note location. select Text: 3/16". and click to specify the first copied text note position. Create a new 3/16'' text style 28 On the Design Bar. 27 Move the cursor down another 4''. enter 3/16" for Text Size. 33 In the Type Properties dialog.

and enter Drawn By:. 43 In the Select Parameter dialog. The label displays a default value wrapped to 2 lines. click Label.37 Draw a text box in the next space up. select Right and Bottom for Text Alignment. 39 Draw a text box in the next space up. and click to specify the label location. 42 Place the cursor at the lower-right corner of the Date field. 41 On the Options Bar. select Project Issue Date. and click OK. and enter Date. and enter Checked By:. 588 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Add drawing data labels 40 On the Design Bar. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. 38 Draw a text box in the next space up. 44 Select the left drag handle on the label.

55 Click OK twice. 46 In the Select Parameter dialog. and click to specify the label location. click Edit/New. select Drawn By. 48 In the Select Parameter dialog. and click OK. click Label. 53 In the Name dialog. click Duplicate. 45 Place the cursor at the lower-right corner of the Drawn By field. 47 Place the cursor at the lower-right corner of the Checked By field. click . 52 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. and click to specify the label location. 54 In the Type Properties dialog. enter 3/8" for Text Size. 51 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 589 .NOTE Move the label if necessary to line up properly with the existing text. select Checked By. Create a new 3/8'' label style 49 On the Design Bar. enter 3/8" Label for Name. under Text. 50 On the Options Bar.

57 Place the cursor at the lower-right corner of the Sheet Number field. and click to specify the label location. 61 In the Select Parameter dialog.Add sheet number and project data labels 56 In the Type Selector. and click to specify the label location. click Center and Middle. 590 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . select Project Number. 62 Select the left drag handle on the label. select Label: 3/8'' Label. select Sheet Number. and click OK. 60 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Date field. 58 In the Select Parameter dialog. and click OK. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. 59 On the Options Bar.

Add Project Path label 74 In the Type Selector. 64 In the Select Parameter dialog. and click to specify the label location. click Duplicate. click Label. and click OK. Click Modify. 70 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. and click to specify the label location. 65 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Project Name field. and then adjust the width of the File Path field so that it is approximately equal to the width of the Sheet Number field. 69 In the Element Properties dialog. Create a 1/16” label style 67 On the Design Bar. and click OK. and click to specify the label location. click Modify. 72 In the Type Properties dialog. and select any labels that may need to be moved. 78 On the Design Bar. select Project Name. click Left and Middle. 76 Place the cursor in the border area below the left side of the Sheet Number field. 75 On the Options Bar.63 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Project Number field. 73 Click OK twice. and click OK. so that they are all aligned. enter 1/16" Label. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 591 . 66 In the Select Parameter dialog. 71 In the Name dialog. select File Path. click . 77 In the Select Parameter dialog. select Client Name. select 1/16” Label. 68 On the Options Bar. click Edit/New. under Text. enter 1/16" for Text Size.

select Training D-Size Titleblock. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and labels are now complete. you add the titleblock that you created to a new project. Load the new titleblock family into a new project 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. select it. The titleblock graphics. click Modify. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. 2 In the New Project dialog. and select the titleblock. Modify titleblock properties 8 On the Design Bar.79 Save the new titleblock family with the name Training D-Size Titleblock. and click OK. 7 Click OK. verify that default.rfa. enter Name for Drawn By. and then click OK. click . under Other. and click Open. 9 On the Options Bar.rte is the Template file and that Project is selected under Create new. 6 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. 11 Zoom in on the lower-right corner of the sheet. 5 In the Open dialog. click Load. 592 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 4 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. navigate to the location of Training D-Size Titleblock. click Sheet.rfa file. Adding the Titleblock to a New Project In this exercise. text.

For Project Number. This completes the Creating a Titleblock Family lesson. For Project Name. enter 2005-01. 14 Click OK. click Project Information. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date. For Client Name. Adding the Titleblock to a New Project | 593 . For Project Status. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. enter In Progress. enter Office Building. enter Jane Smith. 2005.12 On the Settings menu. enter January 1.

594 .

rvt. click Training Files. and open Imperial\i_RST_Add_Truss. Add a roof truss by defining the span in plan view 1 In the Project Browser. bottom chord. you add predefined trusses to multiple locations within an existing project. Revit Structure then creates the structural framing elements as necessary to draw the truss. placing them on the layout lines specified for the selected family. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Working with Trusses In Revit Structure you add a truss to your structure by using the Truss tool. To use the Truss tool. 595 . The lines in the layout determine the placement of the sub-elements that comprise the truss: top chord. double-click Roof. you select the truss family type and then specify the truss start point and endpoint in the drawing.Truss Building 18 In this tutorial. and web members. under Structural Plans. In the left pane of the Open dialog. which creates the truss according to the layout and other parameters specified in whichever truss family type you select. you learn how to use the truss building capabilities of Revit Structure 2009. This lesson comprises the following truss building exercises: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Add multiple trusses to an existing project by specifying the spans Create a custom truss by modifying the brace parameters Change the shape of a truss profile by attaching it to a roof Create a custom truss family using the Family Editor Create a truss using the drafting tools provided with Revit Structure Adding Trusses to a Project In this exercise.

Click OK. Under Dimensions. click Truss. select Top.2 On the View toolbar. 7 Click the column at grid location A1 to select the start point of the truss span. click . 6 In the Element Properties dialog. 9 On the View toolbar. and draw a zoom box around the columns on the upper-left corner of the model as shown. 8 Click the column at grid location A2 to select the endpoint of the truss span. enter 6' 0". for Bearing Chord. for Truss Height. 596 | Chapter 18 Truss Building . click . 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 4 In the Type Selector. click ■ ■ ■ . select Howe Flat Truss: Standard. do the following: Under Structural. 5 On the Options Bar.

12 Using the same method. Close the Warning dialog that indicates the selected flange is pinned. 11 Press DELETE. delete the extra flange at column location A1. Adding Trusses to a Project | 597 . Modify the truss 10 Click the flange located at column location A2 as shown. Notice the extra flange at column locations A1 and A2 that will not be necessary for this span.The truss is placed between the columns.

Copy the single truss 13 In the Project Browser. 16 On the Options bar. 14 Select the truss placed in the previous steps. 15 On the View toolbar. 598 | Chapter 18 Truss Building . 17 Click the column at grid location A1 as shown. under Structural Plans. double-click Roof. click (Copy). select Multiple.

select the remaining trusses. 25 On the View toolbar. Adding Trusses to a Project | 599 . 20 On the View toolbar. 24 While pressing CTRL. click . under Structural Plans. click (Copy). double-click Roof. click Modify. Copy multiple trusses to the opposite end of the structure 22 In the Project Browser.18 Click the columns at grid locations A2 and A3 to place copies of the original truss. 21 Enter ZF (keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit). 19 On the Design Bar. 23 Select the truss placed between grid location A1 and A2.

Add multiple trusses by defining the span in 3D view 30 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Truss. and then click the column at grid location E1 to select the copy endpoint as shown. 27 On the Design Bar. 31 In the Type Selector. click 29 Enter ZF. 28 On the View toolbar.26 Click the column at grid location A1 to select the copy start point. click Modify. select Howe Flat Truss: Standard. . 600 | Chapter 18 Truss Building .

Adding Trusses to a Project | 601 . 33 In the Element Properties dialog. click ■ ■ ■ . 34 Click the column at grid location B1 as shown. 35 Click the top endpoint of the column at grid location B4 to place the truss as shown. for Bearing Chord. Under Dimensions. for Truss Height. select Top. do the following: Under Structural. Click OK.32 On the Options Bar. enter 6' 0".

36 Enter ZF. . click 39 Enter ZF. 37 Using the same method.D4. and D1. 602 | Chapter 18 Truss Building . add trusses between columns C1.C4. 38 On the View toolbar.

click shown . and draw a zoom box around the end of one of the trusses as 41 Select the flange at one end of the truss. Adding Trusses to a Project | 603 .Modify each truss 40 On the View toolbar.

for Structural Framing Type. click Training Files. select HSS-Hollow Structural Section: HSS6X6X. Create a new truss type for the short span 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 6 In the Name dialog. enter Howe Flat Truss . In the left pane of the Open dialog. Click OK. You can save the open file if you wish. In the next exercise. 45 Click File menu ➤ Close. click . ■ ■ ■ 604 | Chapter 18 Truss Building . and click OK. and open Imperial\i_RST_Customize_Truss_Parameters. select HSS-Hollow Structural Section: HSS6X6X.500. click Edit/New.rvt. Customizing Truss Parameters In this exercise. for Angle. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. click Duplicate. 44 Using the same method. do the following: ■ Under Vertical Webs. for Structural Framing Type. Customizing Truss Parameters on page 604. Under Bottom Chords. select Howe Flat Truss: Standard.Short Span. Under Diagonal Webs. 46 Proceed to the next exercise.42 Press DELETE. you create a custom truss for both the short and long spans by modifying the truss type parameters. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. and repeat for the remaining trusses. 2 In the Type Selector. click Truss. a new training file is supplied. 43 Close the Warning dialog that indicates the selected flange is pinned. 4 In the Element Properties dialog.500. 3 On the Options Bar. delete the flange on the opposite end of the same truss. enter 90. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

change the remaining short trusses to the new type. click select the truss as shown. select Howe Flat Truss: Howe Flat Truss .Short Span. 11 In the Type Selector. draw a zoom box around one of the short trusses. . . click OK. Customizing Truss Parameters | 605 . double-click 3D. under 3D Views. 13 On the View toolbar. click 14 Enter ZF. and then NOTE Check the Status Bar to make sure you are selecting the truss and not a chord or web.8 In the Element Properties dialog. 12 Using the same method. The truss changes to the new type. 10 On the View toolbar. Apply the new truss type 9 In the Project Browser.

enter Howe Flat Truss . ■ ■ 22 In the Element Properties dialog. select HSS-Hollow Structural Section: HSS6X6X. and then 606 | Chapter 18 Truss Building . select HSS-Hollow Structural Section: HSS6X6X. 16 In the Type Selector. Under Diagonal Webs. under 3D Views. click Duplicate.Roof Span. 20 In the Name dialog. click OK.500.500. 17 On the Options Bar. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit/New. do the following: ■ Under Vertical Webs. click select the truss as shown. double-click 3D. and click OK. click . draw a zoom box around one of the long trusses. .Create a new truss type for the roof span 15 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Truss. Apply the new truss type 23 In the Project Browser. 19 In the Type Properties dialog. for Structural Framing Type. for Structural Framing Type. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. 24 On the View toolbar. select Howe Flat Truss: Standard. Click OK.

NOTE Check the Status Bar to make sure you are selecting the truss and not a single truss flange. 26 Using the same method. change the remaining long trusses to the new type. click 28 Enter ZF.Roof Span. The truss changes to the new type. 27 On the View toolbar. 25 In the Type Selector. Customizing Truss Parameters | 607 . . select Howe Flat Truss: Howe Flat Truss .

and then select the truss as shown. Select all trusses 1 In the Project Browser. Modifying the Shape of a Truss In this exercise. a new training file is supplied. under 3D Views.29 Click File menu ➤ Close. double-click 3D. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click . You can save the open file if you wish.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you change the shape of a truss profile by attaching it to an existing roof. 2 On the View toolbar. 30 Proceed to the next exercise. Modifying the Shape of a Truss on page 608. and open Imperial\i_RST_Truss_Change_Shape. click Training Files. 608 | Chapter 18 Truss Building . draw a zoom box around a truss on the upper-left corner of the structure. In the next exercise.

Modifying the Shape of a Truss | 609 . click 5 Select the roof as shown. All instances of the truss will be highlighted. Attach the roof 4 On the Options Bar. (Attach/Detach Top Chord).3 Click Edit menu ➤ Select All Instances.

12 Proceed to the next exercise. 9 On the View toolbar. click . 11 Click File menu ➤ Close. Notice the shape of the top chord and structural webs are modified to match the roof profile. 10 On the View Control Bar. 8 On the View Control Bar. Creating a Custom Truss Family on page 611. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element. and diagonal webs of each truss will attach itself to the shape of the roof. vertical webs. 6 On the Design bar. You can save the open file if you wish. click Modify. 610 | Chapter 18 Truss Building . click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. View the custom truss 7 Select the roof. In the next exercise.The top chords. a new training file is supplied. and draw a zoom box around a roof truss as shown.

Creating a Custom Truss Family In this exercise. 5 Sketch 5 vertical reference planes approximately as shown. Creating a Custom Truss Family | 611 . click Ref Plane. and place dimensions to each reference plane as shown. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 6 On the Design Bar. you use the Revit Structure Family Editor to create a custom truss family. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rft located in the Imperial folder.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Open Structural_Trusses. and open Imperial\i_RST_Truss_Custom_Family. click the Training Files icon. click Dimension. Sketch web reference planes 4 On the Design Bar. Open the truss family 1 Click File ➤ New ➤ Family. click Training Files.

612 | Chapter 18 Truss Building .7 Click the EQ symbol to apply equal constraints. place additional vertical reference planes to complete the web pattern as shown. 10 Sketch the truss top chord as shown. click Truss Top Chord. Sketch top and bottom chords 9 On the Design Bar. 8 Using the same method.

14 Click the intersection of the bottom chord and the first vertical reference plane to set the start point of the first truss web as shown. Creating a Custom Truss Family | 613 . Truss Bottom Chord. click Truss Web. 15 Snap to the intersection of the top chord and reference plane as shown. Sketch truss webs 13 On the Design Bar. 12 Sketch the truss bottom chord as shown.11 On the Design Bar.

17 On the Design Bar. add remaining truss webs to complete the pattern as shown. Click OK. and click OK. click Modify. You are now in the project file. Save the new truss family 18 Click File menu ➤ Save As. navigate to a folder of your choice. For File name. Load the truss into the project 20 On the Design Bar. select i_RST_Truss_Custom_Family. click Load into Projects.16 Using the same method. 19 In the Save As dialog.rvt. 21 In the Load into Projects dialog. For Save as type. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Save in. select Family Files (rfa). 614 | Chapter 18 Truss Building . enter Custom_Truss.

23 On the Design Bar. 26 Click the column at grid location A4 to establish the endpoint of the truss as shown. 25 Click the column at grid location A1 to establish the start point of the truss. under Structural Plans. 28 Repeat the same method to place additional trusses as shown. select Custom_Truss. under 3D Views. 27 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 2.Place the custom truss 22 In the Project Browser. 24 In the Type Selector. Creating a Custom Truss Family | 615 . click Truss. double-click 3D.

create column grids. Finally. 3 In the Choose Template dialog. 7 Draw 2 grid lines approximately as shown. 6 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select Structural Analysis-Default. click Grid. You can save the open file if you wish. in the Imperial Templates folder. 2 In the New Project dialog.29 Click File menu ➤ Close. 4 In the New Project dialog. Building a Truss with Drafting Tools In this exercise. Building a Truss with Drafting Tools on page 616. Create a new project 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. a new training file is supplied.rte. click OK. and click Open. double-click Level 2. under Structural Plans. click Browse. In the next exercise. you add braces to form the steel truss. 30 Proceed to the next exercise. 616 | Chapter 18 Truss Building . and a framing elevation. Create grids 5 In the Project Browser. you open a new project and create the top and bottom chords using the beam tool.

Building a Truss with Drafting Tools | 617 . and drag the blue handles beyond each column as shown . 12 Place 2 columns on each grid line spaced approximately 70' 0" apart as shown.a. Place support columns 10 On the Design Bar. double-click Elevation 1 . click Ref Plane. and press ENTER. 11 In the Type Selector.Add framing elevations 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 16 Place a horizontal reference plane above Level 2.) 13 Click the Framing Elevation symbol. 15 On the Design Bar. click Structural Column. 9 Select each grid line. enter 5' 0". under Elevations (Interior Elevation). and place approximately as shown. 17 Click the dimension. (The dimensions are displayed for reference purposes only. click Framing Elevation. Sketch horizontal reference planes 14 In the Project Browser. select W-Wide Flange Column: W10 x 49.

Place multiple reference planes using the array tool 23 Select the reference plane on the left column as shown. click Ref Plane. 19 Click the dimension. 22 Press ESC. Place vertical reference planes 20 On the Design Bar. and enter 15' 0".The dimensions are displayed for reference purposes only. 618 | Chapter 18 Truss Building . 18 Place a second horizontal reference plane above the first. 21 Snap to the center of the left column and draw a vertical reference plane that extends beyond the top horizontal plane as shown.

click . 25 Click the left vertical reference plane to identify the array start point. 27 Enter 7 for array count. The array is complete. 26 Drag the array to the right. Building a Truss with Drafting Tools | 619 .24 On the Tools toolbar. and press ENTER. 29 In the Type Selector. and snap to the center of the right column to identify the array length. select W-Wide Flange: W12 x 26. click Beam. Place top and bottom chords 28 On the Design Bar.

31 Using reference planes as a guide. create the top and bottom chords of the truss by placing beams as shown. select W-Wide Flange: W12 x 26. Fix corner joint 35 On the View toolbar. When placing braces. . Place braces 32 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. When placing beams. 33 In the Type Selector.30 On the Tools toolbar. make sure you snap to the intersections of the reference planes. click truss as shown. 34 Using the vertical reference planes as a guide. create cross-braces by placing braces as shown. select 3D Snapping. click Brace. make sure you snap to the intersections of the reference planes. and draw a zoom box around the upper-right corner of the 620 | Chapter 18 Truss Building .

37 Snap to the outer surface of the brace. Building a Truss with Drafting Tools | 621 . and sketch a vertical ref plane as shown. 38 On the Tools toolbar. then select the edge of the top chord as shown. 39 Select the vertical ref plane. click Ref Plane.36 On the Design Bar. click .

622 | Chapter 18 Truss Building . View the truss 41 In the Project Browser.40 The edge of the top chord will align with the vertical brace as shown. double-click 3D. under 3D Views.

42 Click File menu ➤ Save.The completed truss is displayed. 43 Save the file to a folder location of you choice. You have completed the Truss Builder tutorial. Building a Truss with Drafting Tools | 623 .

624 .

you can have multiple sets of design options. In addition. you can study and modify each design option and present the options to the client. you can have an option set called roofing with multiple subordinate roofing schemes. In this tutorial. Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project You can use design options to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. These schemes can be conceptual or can be detailed engineering designs. you can designate a primary design scheme for each option set. For example. 625 . At any time in the design process. Because all design options coexist in the project with the main model (the main model consists of elements not specifically assigned to a design option). it is common to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. you learn how to create and manage multiple design sets and options within a single building model. and each option set can have multiple schemes. you create multiple design schemes within a single project file. Using design options.Creating Multiple Design Options 19 When working with a building model. After you and the client agree on the final design. you can have an option set for the roof structure with multiple subordinate structural design schemes.

click Design Options ➤ Design Options. you design each of the structural options. Any new elements introduced at that time become part of that option. 2 In the Design Options dialog. each is constructed for interchangeability. the only available command is to create a new option set. TIP In this exercise. therefore. Notice Option Set 1 has been created with a design option: Option 1 (primary). you learn how to manage and organize the design options. the task is to develop two roof schemes for an addition to an existing house. This option will be the first structural scheme consisting of 3"round columns and 2" round bars. In the final exercise of this lesson. These three exercises are designed to be completed sequentially with the second and third exercises dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. There is no limit to the number of option sets you can create. The client is interested in a pergola and sunshade for the roof terrace but is not sure of the specific layout or materials. The first time you open the Design Options dialog within a project. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.In this particular case. you create two roof system design options that work with the structural options. you create a unique in-place family as the structural system. Each option set represents a portion of the building model wherein design alternatives are being considered. Creating the Structural Design Options In this exercise. the roof and structure systems must work together. Create first design option 1 On the Tools menu. and delete the unwanted options from the project. each with multiple design options. you set up multiple design option sets. After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The client has asked you to create various options. After you create a design option. and open Imperial\i_Urban_House. make your final design decision. In the first exercise in this lesson. under Option Set. 626 | Chapter 19 Creating Multiple Design Options . you set up the design option names and add the modeling elements to the structural design option set. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams.rvt. you can edit it. With the second option. click New. click Training Files. In the second exercise.

10 Select the three columns either by dragging a pick box around them or by selecting them individually while holding CTRL. you can continue adding new copies without reselecting the reference point (the first click). click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. make sure you select a point that is easily recognizable. In this case. The left column should be centered at the intersection of the notch and the wall. the second column directly across from it at the intersection of the two walls. and click Close. the midpoint of the lower notch line is selected. 7 In the Type Selector. expand Views (all). The first click specifies the reference point on the element to be copied. and click the EQ symbol to equalize the segments. and double-click ROOF TERRACE. select: ■ ■ ■ . Creating the Structural Design Options | 627 . 6 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar. either add a centered reference plane and snap the column to it. Any new elements introduced to the building model are added to this option. 4 In the Project Browser. and the second click specifies the point on the building model the reference point is copied to. Selecting Constrain limits the movement and helps ensure the post-copy alignment of the columns. click Column. the three columns need to be copied three times to create a 3 x 4 grid of 12 columns. 5 On the View menu. Arrows and the dimension lines have been added for training purposes only. click 12 On the Options Bar. Constrain Copy Multiple The Copy command is a two-click process. expand Floor Plans.3 Select Option 1 (primary). 9 On the Design Bar. add three columns. 14 Click at an identifiable part of the notch construction. By selecting Multiple. 8 Using the following illustration as a guide. 11 On the Edit toolbar. In the following illustration. and zoom in on the upper half of the building model. You should delete the dimension and unconstrain after adding the column. and the third column centered between the two. 13 Zoom in around the left column that is embedded in the notch. Because it is important that you select the same location on the notches you copy to. select Round Column: 03" Diameter. click Edit Selected. TIP To center the middle column. click Modify. or add a dimension string between the columns.

they are difficult to see in this view. 18 On the View toolbar. A copy of the three selected columns is added. 628 | Chapter 19 Creating Multiple Design Options . 17 Zoom out and. click . When you are finished. click Modify on the Design Bar to end the copy process. 16 Zoom in around the notch construction.TIP You can zoom in and out easily during this process using the wheel on your wheel mouse. 15 Zoom out and move downward to the notch just below this one. add a copy of the columns to the next two notches below this one. Because of the size of the columns. and click in the same location as you did for the previous notch. using the same technique.

Zoom in on the upper right column. select Round Bar : 2". In it. click Modify. 21 In the Type Selector. Zoom out and move the cursor over the upper right column. The first click specifies the beam start point. Next. double-click TOP OF CORE. two callouts with thin lines have been added to clarify the location of the start and end points of the beam. under Floor Plans. Adding a beam is a two-click process.Notice the 12 columns that you added. 19 In the Project Browser. 20 On the tab of the Design Bar. 24 Select the Beam you added previously. Creating the Structural Design Options | 629 . you add the beams that span the columns. 22 Add the first beam between the upper left and right columns by using the following steps: ■ ■ ■ Zoom in on the upper-left column. click Beam. You can do this manually or use the Copy command. and click on the center to set the beam endpoint. The second click specifies the end of the beam. 23 On the Design Bar. and click at its center to set the beam start point. The beam needs to be added between the remaining columns. Use the following illustration as a guide.

28 Zoom out. 29 Repeat this step twice more until a beam is added to each set of columns. click 26 On the Options Bar. This is the reference point for the subsequent copies. select: ■ ■ ■ . Constrain Copy Multiple 27 Zoom in around the upper left column that is embedded in the notch. and select the center of the column to add a copy. 30 On the View toolbar.25 On the Edit toolbar. and click the center point. click . zoom into the left column. 630 | Chapter 19 Creating Multiple Design Options . move down to the next set of columns.

click Rename. and click OK. and click OK. 39 Select Option Set 1 and. under Option Set. NOTE Be sure you are creating a new option. and click OK. 37 Select Option 2 and. and click OK. notice that you are still editing Option Set 1: Option 1 (primary). 36 In the Rename dialog. select Option 1 (primary). 44 Select the option set Roofing and. Logically naming the option sets and relative options allows you to more easily manage them. 45 Under Roofing. click Rename. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. name the option Louvers. 34 In the Design Options dialog. under Option. 42 Select Option Set 1 and. click Rename. under Option. 32 In the Design Options dialog. 43 In the Rename dialog. under Option Set. 33 Click Finish Editing. not a new option set. Creating the Structural Design Options | 631 . There should now be two roofing design options. enter Brackets for New. 40 In the Rename dialog. enter Beam for New. enter Structure for New. click Rename. 46 Under Option. under Option. click New. 38 In the Rename dialog. 35 Select Option 1 (primary) and. click New. and click OK. click Rename. enter Roofing for New.Notice that the beams complete the bracket structure for the proposed roof. Organize design option sets and subordinate options 31 On the Tools menu. under Option. click New. 41 Under Option Set.

You have completed the initial setup of the design option sets and their subordinate design option names. notice that Structure: Beam is displayed.47 Under Roofing. 54 Zoom in toward the top of the roof terrace near the stairs. Notice that the columns added to the Brackets design option do not display. under Floor Plans. double-click ROOF TERRACE. 53 In the Project Browser. it will resemble the following illustration. 52 Click Close. Under Now Editing. 50 In the Design Options dialog. select Edit Selected. select Beam. Design the second structural design option 49 In this section of the exercise. under Structure. 632 | Chapter 19 Creating Multiple Design Options . and click OK. When finished. name the option Sunscreen. click Rename. 51 Under Edit. select Option 2. This allows you to more easily manage the project. 48 Under Option. you create the second design option.

click Align. Creating the Structural Design Options | 633 . Using the Align tool requires two clicks. The first click sets the plane that the object will be aligned to. 59 Align the roof beam by clicking the lower edge of the adjacent horizontal wall and then clicking the lower edge of the roof beam. 56 In the Type Selector. Refer to the following illustration. The second click represents the plane that is moved. 58 On the Tools menu. select Roof Beam. click Component.55 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 57 Place a roof beam into the drawing area as shown.

on the Edit toolbar. Clear Group and Associate Enter 4 for number Select 2nd for Move To: Select Constrain Using the Array tool requires two clicks. 64 Click the start point at the alignment of the beam and wall as shown. click 63 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ ■ . 61 On the Design Bar. click Modify. click the padlock that displays to lock the alignment. The first click sets the move start point.60 After aligning the beam. 634 | Chapter 19 Creating Multiple Design Options . 62 Select the beam and. The second click represents the move end point. Click to indicate the end point of the move. 65 Move the cursor down to the next intersection of the lower edge of the horizontal wall and the beam.

Notice the new design option for the structural elements supporting the roof system. You can leave it open and proceed immediately to the next exercise. click Finish Editing. i_Urban_House-in progress.Three more roof beams are placed at the same intersection as the first beam. 70 On the File menu. Creating the Structural Design Options | 635 . which is visible by default. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. 68 In the Design Options dialog. 66 On the View toolbar. name the file. you need this file in its current state. 67 On the Tools menu. click . the 3D view has reverted back to the brackets rather than the structural beams you just created. 69 Click Close. 71 Navigate to your preferred directory. click Save As. Notice that even before you close the dialog.rvt. Design option visibility is covered in more detail later in the tutorial. NOTE If you intend to continue with the next exercise. and click Save. That is because the brackets option is set to primary.

636 | Chapter 19 Creating Multiple Design Options . 4 Under Edit. If you have not completed the first exercise in this tutorial. is a simple fabric roof created using an extrusion. you created a unique in-place family as the structural system. 10 Referring to the following illustration. select Rafter 2 x 10. You should have named it i_Urban_House-in progress.In this exercise. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. and double-click TOP OF CORE. place the rafter 3' 0" inside the wall shown and overlap the horizontal beam 3'. After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options. expand Views (all). each with multiple design options to pick from.rvt. In the next exercise. expand Floor Plans. Under Now Editing. a Louver system. select Louvers (primary). Creating the Roof System Design Options In this exercise. you designed each of the structural options: one for brackets. Roofing: Louvers (primary) should display. 5 Click Close. click Edit Selected. do so now. you design each of the roofing options. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. Both of these options are designed to work in conjunction with each of the structural design options. the other for beams. you create the roof systems that compliment these structural design options. 7 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. This exercise is designed to work in conjunction with the other exercises in this tutorial. With the second option. 6 In the Project Browser. 2 On the Tools menu. All are sequential and dependent on the previous exercise. If you need to add dimensions. 9 Zoom in on the lower half of the building model until you can see the bottom set of columns and the beam traversing the span. The first option. you set up multiple design option sets. click Component. The second roofing system. Create the first roofing design option 1 If you do not have the project file that you saved at the end of the previous exercise open. is constructed of 2" x 10"rafters and 2" x 6" louvers. 8 In the Type Selector. Sunscreen. 3 In the Design Options dialog. delete them after the rafter is in place. The dimensions shown are for training purposes. open it now. under Roofing.

16 On the Options Bar. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. You are creating an array of five rafters that are 3' 3" apart. 13 On the Options Bar. Select Constrain. Select 2nd for Move To. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. 17 Zoom in on the intersection of the lower end of the rafter and the intersecting beam. Enter 5 for Number. under Other. click . click in the center of the intersection to specify the array start point. enter 38' 6" for Length. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 637 . 15 On the Edit menu. The rafter should now span the entire vertical length of the proposed roof system. 12 Select the rafter you added previously. click Array. click Modify. and click OK.11 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

For example.18 Move the cursor horizontally to the right and. and press ENTER. you can enter 3 3. you do not need to type the foot and inch markers. Zoom out to see that the rafter array is created. 638 | Chapter 19 Creating Multiple Design Options . rather than entering 3' 3". TIP When entering a dimension value. enter 3' 3". The space separates feet and inches. when the listening dimension displays.

Select Constrain.Add the louvers to the design option 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click . 28 Move the cursor vertically downward. click Component. 23 On the Options Bar. 21 Place the first horizontal louver in the upper left corner according to the following illustration. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. and press Enter. 27 For the array starting point. when the listening dimension displays. and click Array. Select 2nd for Move To. click the Edit menu. 25 With the louver still selected. under Other. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. Enter 34 for Number. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 639 . and select the louver you just placed. The louver now spans the horizontal plane of the roof system. enter 1’. 26 On the Options Bar. and click OK. 22 On the Design Bar. enter 17' 6 1/2" for Length. 20 In the Type Selector. click Modify. select Louver 2 x 6. and. click in the center of any intersection between the louver and the beam.

click Finish Editing. 31 In the Design Options dialog. The louver roof system still displays in the 3D view because it is the primary option. click . 29 On the View toolbar. 640 | Chapter 19 Creating Multiple Design Options .Zoom out to see that the 34 louvers array 1' 0" apart. 30 On the Tools menu. under Edit. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. The louver roof system is complete.

click . NOTE As you sketch the arcs. 38 You are prompted to verify the roof level and offset. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 641 . you must create a draped canvas sunscreen. and then adjust the dip of the arc until it is 60 degrees. and double-click West. Because an extruded roof has a roof type associated with it. try to get the angle value as close to 60 degrees as possible. select Reference Plane : Roof Extrusion for Name. Notice that the louver roof system no longer displays. 37 In the Work Plane dialog. you only need to sketch a single line or a string of lines to define the shape of the extruded roof. Do not be too concerned if your sketch lines do not exactly connect. This tool allows you to sketch an arc line using three points. Therefore. 35 Zoom in on the upper level where the roof design is taking place. 41 Select the top of the left column. 43 On the Design Bar. 39 On the Design Bar. and the third point defines the arc. select Sunscreen. the sketch should be a series of arcs connected at the ends where they connect to the columns. 40 On the Options Bar. You can adjust the degrees by clicking the blue temporary dimension value immediately after you create the line. 42 Repeat the previous step and create two more arcs between the columns. and then click Close. 36 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. the top of the next column on the right. then you can modify it through the dimension. click Properties. 34 In the Project Browser. In this case. click Edit Selected. click Lines. Click OK. click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion. 33 Under Editing. You will fix this in a later step. expand Elevations.Create sunscreen roof system 32 In the Design Options dialog. The first two points define the ends of the line. under Roofing. The roof extrusion reference plane has been added to the training file specifically for this purpose and is hidden in all views.

51 In the Design Options dialog. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. The arcs should connect. 52 On the File menu.44 In the Element Properties dialog. 45 Click OK. click Save. 48 On the Design Bar. enter -19' 0"for Extrusion End. You can leave it open and proceed immediately to the next exercise. 50 On the Tools menu. In this exercise. The easiest way to accomplish this is to use the Trim tool. a Louver system. 642 | Chapter 19 Creating Multiple Design Options . The roof sketch must be a continuous line. NOTE If you intend to continue with the final exercise. The first option. 46 On the Tools menu. click Finish Editing. under Edit. you designed each of the roofing options. The second roofing system. Under Constraints. The louver roof system is complete. You must make sure the arcs are connected where they connect to the columns. Both of these options are designed to work in conjunction with each of the structural design options. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Sunscreen Fabric for Type. click Finish Sketch. and then click Close. Under Constraints. was a simple fabric roof created using an extrusion. enter 1' 0" for Extrusion Start. You have completed the sunscreen roof system. Sunscreen. you need this file in its current state. 47 Select the left arc and then the center arc. then the center arc. click . 49 On the View toolbar. Select the right arc. was constructed of 2" x 10"rafters and 2" x 6"louvers. click Trim/Extend.

All are sequential and dependent on the previous exercise. right-click the 3D View Primary Option. you explore how to present each of the design options by creating multiple views to display the various combinations. Managing Design Options | 643 . and click Rename. After exploring the combinations. 3 In the Rename View dialog. Repeat this step two more times until you have three copies of the view. click Visibility/Graphics. and click OK. 5 Right-click each of the copies. under 3D Views. click Visibility/Graphics. 7 On the View menu. and click Duplicate. do so now. Because the client wants to see 3D building models of each of the designs. under Views (all). Create new views for each design option 1 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. 2 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Project Browser. tertiary. This ensures that the primaries (currently bracket and louver) are visible. Notice that both option sets are set to automatic. expand 3D Views. under 3D Views. right-click {3D}. 10 In the Project Browser. and delete the discarded design options. under 3D Views. 11 On the View menu. secondary. under Views (all). click the Design Options tab. double-click Secondary Option. 9 Click OK. click the Design Options tab. you must create a named 3D view for the primary. If you have not completed the previous exercises in this tutorial. enter Primary Option. make it part of the building model. 12 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. and last options.Managing Design Options In this exercise. under Views (all). This exercise is designed to work in conjunction with the other exercises in this tutorial. 8 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. double-click Primary Option. under Views (all). you select a design. Rename the three copies as follows: ■ ■ ■ Secondary Option Tertiary Option Last Option 6 In the Project Browser.

specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option. 16 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. under Views (all). specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option. 14 In the Project Browser. click the Design Options tab. 644 | Chapter 19 Creating Multiple Design Options . click the Design Options tab. 18 In the Project Browser. double-click Last Option. 21 Specify Beam for the Structure design option. double-click Tertiary Option. and click OK. 17 Specify Brackets for the Structure design option. under 3D Views.13 Specify Beam for the Structure design option. under Views (all). 15 On the View menu. and click OK. 19 On the View menu. 20 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. under 3D Views. click Visibility/Graphics. click Visibility/Graphics. and click OK.

since you no longer need them. 28 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog. 32 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. the beam option becomes part of the model. The other options were removed along with any dedicated option views. Because the client has selected the design option. the beam and the louver roofing should be selected as primary. This was the client choice for structural. 22 On the Tools menu. click Delete to remove the views that used options. 24 Under Option. In this case.At this point. click Close. An alert is displayed. 23 In the Design Options dialog. click Yes. 30 Under Option Set. under Structure. select Make Primary. the client has reviewed the design options and has decided that the beam system coupled with the louver roofing system is the preferred design. 26 Under Option Set. delete the other design option geometry and any dedicated option views. asking if you are sure you want to delete all elements of secondary options in this option set and remove the option set. Managing Design Options | 645 . but should be accepted as part of the building model. 33 In the Design Options dialog. all isometric views are ready to be placed on a titleblock or exported and e-mailed to the client. click Accept Primary. 31 In the alert dialog. The set is deleted. click Accept Primary to take the louvers into the model. the current primaries are no longer options. In your design options. select Beam. and you get a dialog asking if you want to delete dedicated option views. 29 Select Roofing. click Yes. double-click Primary Option. click Delete. 34 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. 25 Select Structure. 27 In the alert dialog.

and deleted the discarded design options. click Save. you learned how to present each of the design options by creating multiple views to display the various combinations. In this exercise. 35 On the File menu.The beam and louver systems are now part of the building model. After exploring the combinations. 646 | Chapter 19 Creating Multiple Design Options . you selected a design. made it part of the building model.

you share the coordinates so that the linked files remember their location within the host project. In these situations. Comparison of alternatives on a site. performance.Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates 20 Many projects consist of disparate buildings in an overall campus. 647 . and productivity by working in a smaller project file while retaining the ability to place that building model into a larger context. Specific examples when you may want to use model linking and shared coordinates: ■ ■ ■ A campus plan that contains links to several structures. and manage the links throughout the project. A residential development in which a few different prototypes are configured differently in an area. In the final lesson. you can use model linking and shared coordinates to create the campus within one project file while allowing work to proceed on the individual building models in other project files. You position the building models on the site plan. you link several building models within a single project file in which only a site plan has been developed. or of a group of related but semi-independent sub-projects. modify their visibility. In this tutorial. This maximizes efficiency.

One building model is a condominium. you work within a project in which only the site components have been developed. Automatic placement options: ■ Auto . Linking Building Models from Different Project Files In this exercise. Placement options when linking building models When you link a building model in a project. you have the option to manually place the linked building model or allow Revit Structure 2009 to automatically place it. This center changes as the footprint of your model changes. and manage their locations in coordination with their originating project files. NOTE The center of a Revit Structure model is the center of the model geometry.Center to Center: Revit Structure places the center of the imported geometry at the center of the model.Linking Building Models In this lesson. You position the building models on the site. NOTE You must complete the exercises in this lesson in sequence. 648 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . you open a project in which only site components have been developed. modify their visibility. and the other is a townhouse. You link two building models to the project. You link multiple instances of one building model and a single instance of another.

right-click.By Shared Coordinates: When using Model Linking in conjunction with Shared Coordinates. All three files now reside. c_Townhouse. Select c_Site. If you are comfortable doing this using Windows Explorer. NOTE Revit Structure projects have an internal coordinate system.Center: The geometric center of the linked document is at the cursor location. click Close. 6 Repeat the previous five steps for the following files: ■ ■ c_Townhouse c_Condo_Complex 7 Open the Model Linking folder. you need to copy the three training files to a different directory and make them writable. ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder. and open Common\c_Site. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. however. RELATED See the lesson. click Open. you can do so. Otherwise. Save training files to different folder 1 Create a new folder on your hard drive called Model Linking. 8 Clear Read-only. ■ ■ Manual . and click Properties.Origin to Origin: The origin of the imported geometry is placed at the invisible origin of the Revit Structure model. 5 On the File menu.■ Auto . This tutorial requires write permission to all the training files used. NOTE You may need to scroll down in the left pane to see the Training Files folder. c_Condo_Complex.Base Point: Not applicable for linked Revit Structure Files. Link condo complex into site project 9 On the File menu. select the three files. The required files can be found in the Common folder of the Training files: c_Site. in the Model Linking folder that you created. 2 On the File menu. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 649 .rvt. This option is grayed out. ■ Manual placement options: ■ Manual . click Open. with write permission. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models on page 665. click Save As. and save the file there. Manual . navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first step. Auto .Origin: The origin of the linked document is centered on the cursor. click Training Files. Because training files are used in multiple tutorials and are normally installed as read-only. this system is not exposed to the user. this option will place the link at a predefined location. 4 On the File menu. and click OK. use the following steps to copy the training files to a new location.

Origin to Origin. and double-click Level 1. 10 In the Project Browser. These represent the footprint outlines of the three building model sites. click Import/Link ➤ Revit. 12 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder and select c_Condo_Complex. Notice the blue detail lines.■ Click Open. expand Views (all). select Auto . For Positioning. 11 On the File menu. expand Floor Plans. 13 Click Open. The condo complex building model is placed approximately at the center of the site model. 650 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates .

16 For the move start point.Move the condo complex building model 14 Select the linked building model. similar to the behavior of imported DWG objects. click the upper-left corner of the matching blue detail lines above it. The first click specifies the move start point. After you specify the location to move to. the linked file displays within the confines of the blue detail lines. Standard move commands work with linked building models. click the upper-left corner of the linked condo complex building model. The second click specifies the move endpoint. click (Move). 17 For the move endpoint.rvt displays in the Type Selector. After you select it. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 651 . Linked Revit Model: c_Condo_Complex. The linked model moves as one object. 15 On the Edit toolbar. The Move command requires two clicks.

20 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. select Auto . 21 Click Open. and select c_Townhouse. click Import/Link ➤ Revit. 652 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates .18 On the View menu. For Positioning. Rotate the townhouse 22 Zoom in around the townhouse model and select it. Link the townhouse building model 19 On the File menu. The townhouse building model displays above the site model.Origin to Origin.

click to specify the rotation start point. and click to specify the end of the rotation. the townhouse must be rotated 90 degrees clockwise. click (Rotate). when the vertical line displays. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 653 . and then click to specify the end of the rotation. 24 Place the cursor just north of the townhouse and. To rotate an object. 25 Move the cursor 90 degrees clockwise. you first specify the rotation start point.23 On the Edit toolbar. In this case.

654 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . 27 Click the lower-left corner of the townhouse building model as the move start point. Do not be concerned if the detail lines do not match the exact footprint of the townhouse. This townhouse building model needs to be moved inside the blue detail lines in the lower-left corner of the site model. click (Move). Move the townhouse 26 On the Edit toolbar. 28 Select the lower-left corner of the lower-left set of blue detail lines as the move endpoint.The rotated townhouse should resemble the following illustration.

The Copy command works much like the Move command. 31 Select the upper-right corner of the blue detail lines on the right to specify the copy-to point. Copy the townhouse 29 On the Edit toolbar. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 655 . 30 For the starting point. select the upper-right corner of the townhouse. The first click specifies the start point. and the second click specifies the copy-to point.The townhouse is located within its required footprint. click (Copy).

if it does not fit reasonably well within the detail lines. use the Move command to make any adjustments. 32 On the Edit menu. enter Townhouse A. click Rotate. 37 On the View toolbar. 34 On the Options Bar. click . and rotate the townhouse 180 degrees. under Identity data. 36 Use the same technique to name the instance of the Townhouse on the right to Townhouse B. for Name. 33 Click the first instance of the townhouse on the left. NOTE After you rotate the townhouse.A copy of the townhouse displays on the right side of the site project. 656 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . click (Default 3D View). and click OK. 35 In the Element Properties dialog.

you rotated and moved the building models to fit them into their designated positions within the site development. you modify the elevation of the townhouses. In this exercise. you linked two separate Revit Structure 2009 models into a site model.38 On the File menu. click Save. you reposition the townhouses in respect to their elevation. click and hold Orbit. they were placed too low within the site topography. you modify their vertical position so that the townhouses sit correctly on the site. click (SteeringWheels). Repositioning Linked Building Models In this exercise. Repositioning Linked Building Models | 657 . NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial. In the next exercise. 2 On the SteeringWheels. Modify the vertical position of the townhouses 1 On the View toolbar. do so before continuing. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise in this tutorial and the resulting project files. NOTE If this is the first time you are using the SteeringWheels. When you originally linked the files. In this exercise. After linking the files. If you have not completed the previous exercise. you need this project file open and in this view. click Try Me for the Full Nav Large Wheel. and then spin the model until it resembles the following illustration.

8 Select the Level 1 line of the Site project. 6 Zoom in closer on the lower half of the townhouse and notice the ground floor level of the townhouse is 11 feet below Level 1 of the site project.Notice that the townhouse is not at the proper elevation in relationship to the site toposurface. 7 On the Tools toolbar. you use the Align command to reposition the linked model within this project. click (Align). press TAB until Level 1 : Reference displays in the status bar. TIP Place the cursor over the Level 1 line of the Site project. This process ensures that you are aligning to the level marker in the site project and not to the linked condo complex project. and click OK. expand Elevations. 658 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . you first select the plane you want to align to. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. In the steps that follow. when it highlights. If you experience difficulty finding the Level1 : Reference.rvt. the status bar displays the name of the linked file. and double-click South. clear Visibility for the c_Condo_Complex. This is apparent because there is a planter below ground level that was designed to sit on top of the site surface. 5 Place the cursor over the townhouse and notice that. When using the Align command. you align the Ground Floor level to Level 1 of the site plan. Remember to turn on visibility of the Condo Complex after you have completed this task. move the cursor over the Ground Floor level of the Townhouse project. under Views (all). and click to select the line. To do this. you may want to hide the Condo Complex from the view. 4 Zoom in around the townhouse on the left. In this case. and click to select it. Click the Revit Links tab. 3 In the Project Browser. and then select the plane that you want to align.

Notice that the townhouse is now at the proper height within this project. Also notice the option displays for you to lock the alignment. Do not lock the alignment of the linked file. This would over-constrain the model. 9 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click North. 10 Using the same technique learned in the previous steps, align the Ground Floor level of the remaining townhouse to Level 1 of the Site project.

11 Return to the South elevation view. Both townhouses should be at the proper level.

12 On the View toolbar, click 13 On the View toolbar, click

(Default 3D View). (SteeringWheels).

14 On the SteeringWheels, click and hold Orbit, and then spin the model until it resembles the following illustration.

15 On the File menu, click Save.

Repositioning Linked Building Models | 659

NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial, you need this project file open and in this view. In this exercise, you changed the elevation of the townhouses relative to the host project. As you can see, each linked file can have a separate set of levels and relative heights and you can accommodate those differences within the host project. In the next exercise, you modify how the linked files display within the host project.

Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility
In this exercise, you modify the visibility settings of the linked files within the site project. After you link a Revit Structure 2009 project file within another project, you can independently control the visibility settings, detail level, display settings, and the halftone settings for each linked project. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises in this tutorial and the resulting project files. If you have not completed the previous exercise, do so before continuing. Modify visibility settings 1 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click South. 2 On the View menu, click Visibility/Graphics. 3 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog, click the Revit Links tab. 4 Under Visibility, expand c_Townhouse.rvt. Notice that you can change visibility settings of an entire linked file or selected instances of a linked file. NOTE You have three options for controlling visibility settings of a linked file. By host view matches the display to the settings of the current active project view. By linked view matches the display to the settings of the linked project view. Custom allows you to override specific visibility settings for a linked project or an instance of the linked project. When you link a file, the defaults are set to By host view for all options. 5 Under Display Settings for c_Townhouse.rvt, click By Host View. 6 On the Basics tab of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, click Custom. If the Basics page is set to Custom, then the other pages on the RVT Link Display Settings dialog may be set to By host View, By linked view, or Custom. 7 Click the Annotations Categories tab. 8 For Annotation Categories, select <Custom>. 9 Under Visibility, scroll down and clear Levels. 10 Click OK. 11 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog, click OK. Notice the Level lines for both townhouses no longer display.

NOTE Changes to Visibility/Graphics are per view only. The townhouse level lines still display in the remaining elevation views.

660 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates

12 Using the same technique learned in the previous steps, clear the Levels display for c_Condo_Complex.rvt.

Apply halftone 13 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1. 14 On the View menu, click Visibility/Graphics. 15 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog, click the Revit Links tab. 16 Under Visibility, expand c_Townhouse.rvt. Notice the option to halftone individual instances of the townhouse model. 17 Select Halftone for the Townhouse project, and click OK. Halftone displays objects with half their normal darkness. With linked files, you can apply halftone to the entire linked project or individual instances of the model. Using the Custom option, you can also apply halftone to individual categories. Notice both townhouses display in halftone.

Detail levels of a linked file 18 On the View menu, click Visibility/Graphics. 19 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog, click the Revit Links tab. 20 For c_Townhouse.rvt, under Display Settings, click By Host View. 21 In the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, on the Basics tab, select Custom. 22 Click the Model Categories tab. 23 In the Model categories list, select <Custom>. By default, the detail level for the linked townhouse project is set to By Host View. This means that the detail level of the linked file is matched to the detail level of the current active project view. By selecting custom under Model Categories, you can independently set the detail level for each model category for each link on a per view basis. You can click the value for Detail Level, and then set the detail level to coarse, medium, or fine. In this case, no detail level changes are required. 24 Click OK.

Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility | 661

Modify display settings of linked files You can use display settings to control the view range, phase, and phase filter of a specific link. 25 On the Revit Links tab, under Visibility, select c_Townhouse.rvt. Notice that the Custom button displays under Display Settings.

26 Under Display Settings, click Custom for the Townhouse link. 27 In the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, select Floor Plan: Ground Floor for Linked view. By default, the view range of a linked project uses the current view of the host project to define its view range. In most cases, this is preferable. However, there are situations, on a sloped site for instance, where you need to specify a different view range so that all the building model plan views cut at the same height. In this case, the townhouse view range now uses the same view range defined within the Floor Plan: Ground Floor of the original linked file. 28 Select By linked view for View range. Notice the Phase and Phase filter specified are By host view. In this case, the host view specifies New Construction for the Phase and Show All for the phase filter. This means that the phase named New Construction for the linked building model is displayed, with Show All as the phase filter applied to the link. With the Show All filter applied, all new, existing, demolished, and temporary components in that particular phase (New Construction) are displayed. All other components are grayed out. 29 Click OK. 30 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog, click OK. 31 On the File menu, click Save. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial, you need this project file open and in this view. In this exercise, you modified the visibility settings of the townhouse link by turning off the visibility of the level lines and applying halftone in a plan view. You also changed the view range of the townhouse so it would cut through the building model at the same height as the other linked building model. In the next exercise, you manage the linked files.

Managing Linked Building Models
In this exercise, you manage the links within the host project by unloading and reloading the linked projects. After you link a Revit Structure 2009 project into another project, a connection to the linked project continues to exist. If the host file is closed and one of the linked files is modified, those modifications are reloaded into the host project when it is reopened.

662 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates

NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises in this tutorial and the resulting project files. If you have not completed the previous exercise, do so before continuing. Unload and reload links 1 On the File menu, click Manage Links. 2 In the Manage Links dialog, click the Revit tab. Notice the Loaded, Locations Not Saved, and Saved Path fields are read only. They supply information regarding the links. NOTE The Locations Not Saved field is only relevant for links with shared coordinates. In a shared coordinate environment, any changes made to the locations of a linked file are saved within the linked file rather than the host project. As links are moved to new locations in the host project, you can use the Save Locations command to save the new locations to the linked project. You learn more about this in the next lesson, Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models. 3 Under Path Type, notice that you have a choice between Relative and Absolute. The default path type is Relative. In general, you should use a relative path rather than an absolute. If you use a relative path and move the project and linked file together to a new directory, the link is maintained. If you use an absolute path and move the project and linked file to a new location, the link is broken because the host project continues to look for the link in the absolute path specified. The most common scenario for using Absolute is when the linked file is on a network where multiple users need access to it. 4 Under Linked File, select c_Condo_Complex.rvt. The buttons at the bottom of the dialog are now active. 5 Click Unload. NOTE Unloading linked projects may increase performance by reducing the quantity of components that must be opened and drawn. 6 At the confirmation prompt, click Yes. The Loaded option for that linked file is now clear. 7 Click OK. Notice that the condo complex link no longer displays in the host project.

Managing Linked Building Models | 663

TIP In the Manage Links dialog, you can also remove a link completely or reload the link from a different location. Linking building models with Worksharing enabled In some cases, you may need to link projects that have Worksharing enabled. In these cases, you should consider the following:

Selective open of worksets: When linking a Worksharing-enabled building model, you can specify which worksets to open after the link is made. In the Import/Link RVT dialog, click the arrow next to the Open button, and select Specify. This enhances performance by reducing the quantity of components that must be opened and drawn. Changing the linked worksets: While working in a host file with Worksharing-enabled linked files, you may decide that you need to see additional worksets of one of those linked files. To do this, go to the Manage Links dialog and use the Reload From command. You can then specify the additional worksets you need opened. Linking a building model into multiple host projects: Although the same Worksharing-enabled building model can be linked within multiple host projects, the specific worksets opened in each host project must be identical. The user who creates the first link determines the status for all other linked files. Host files with Worksharing enabled: When the host file has Worksharing activated, you must keep in mind which workset the link is placed in. Links consist of two parts: the link symbol and the link instance. When you initially place the link, both the link symbol and the link instance are placed in the active workset. However, link instances can be reassigned to different worksets. In general, you should try to keep all instances of a link on the same workset.

TIP When opening a Worksharing-enabled host file, it is possible to specify which links are loaded when the host file opens. A link is only loaded if the workset that the link instance is assigned to opens. If you choose not to open that workset, the link is not loaded. 8 In the Project Browser, expand Revit Links, right-click c_Condo_Complex.rvt, and click Reload. NOTE Some of the more frequently-used commands from the Manage Links dialog can be accessed by right-clicking the link in the Project Browser. Notice the condo complex building model has been reloaded into its previous location.

9 On the File menu, click Save As.

664 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates

10 In the Save As dialog, navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise, name the file Site_Project, and save it as an RVT file. NOTE If you intend to complete the next lesson, Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models, it is important that this file exist in the same directory as the condo complex and townhouse projects. In this exercise, you managed the linked files by unloading and reloading the townhouse project. In the next lesson, you learn how to share the coordinates between the host and linked projects. If you intend to complete the next lesson now, leave the project file open in its current view.

Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models
In this lesson, you learn how to share coordinates between project files so that you can correctly locate building models with respect to each other. When used in conjunction with model linking, you can keep track of the multiple locations in which a linked building model may reside. When you share coordinates between projects, you are deciding which coordinate system will be used by the two files. In essence, you are establishing a shared origin point. TIP You can also use shared coordinates with linked DWG files. When Revit project views are exported to DWG, project or shared coordinates can be specified in the Export Options dialog. This lesson requires the completion of the lesson Linking Building Models on page 648, and the resulting project files. If you have not completed the previous lesson, do so before continuing.

Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates
In this exercise, you publish the coordinates from a host project file to two different buildings that are linked to that project. The host file consists primarily of site components. When you link a Revit Structure 2009 project into another project (the host project), you can choose to use the coordinates of either the host project or the linked project. In most cases where the host project consists primarily of site components and the linked projects contain the building models, the host project coordinates are used. This ensures all the linked building models define their position with respect to the site data.

Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models | 665

When you are working in the host project, you can publish the coordinates of the linked files. This sends the coordinate information to the linked project so that its internal coordinate system matches the host project. You can also acquire coordinates when working in the host project. In this case, the host file acquires the coordinates of a specified linked file. You may want to do this in a case when the link refers to a DWG that has an established coordinate system that you want the host project to adopt. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous lesson, Linking Building Models on page 648, and the resulting project files. If you have not completed the lesson, do so before continuing. If you have closed the project, open it before continuing. Training File
■ ■ ■

On the File menu, click Open. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. Select Site_Project.rvt and click Open.

Publish coordinates 1 Verify that the floor plan Level 1 is the active view.

2 On the Tools menu, click Shared Coordinates ➤ Publish Coordinates. As indicated in the Status Bar, you must now select a linked project to publish coordinates to. 3 In the drawing area, click the Condo Complex. It is the building model in the upper center of the host project.

666 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates

4 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog, select Location 1, and click OK. On the Status Bar, notice you are still in Publish Coordinates mode and Revit Structure is waiting for you to select another link. 5 On the Design Bar, click Modify to end the Publish Coordinates process. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this lesson, you need this project file open and in this view. You have published the coordinates of the host project to the linked project. Both projects now share a coordinate system and can be linked to one another using this common coordinate system.

Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates
When a Revit Structure 2009 model is linked into a host project, it is placed at a specific location. Until coordinates are shared between the link and the host, this location is not saved outside of the host project. However, if coordinates are published from the host to the linked project, then the location becomes saved in the linked file. This location is defined as being a specified location with respect to the origin of the Host. Linked files using shared coordinates must have at least one defined location, but can have multiple additional locations. An example of a linked file with many locations is a prototype model of a house that is placed on 3 different lots. These three locations can be named Lot A, Lot B, and Lot C. Each of these lots is simply a different position for the same house design. Each of the locations can then be saved within the linked file for reference. This makes it possible to use the same building file to represent identical buildings on a site. In this exercise, you specify and save the two townhouse locations, even though both models originate from one linked file. You also relocate the shared origin of the project. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise within this lesson and the resulting project files. If you have not completed the exercise, do so before continuing. Specify a townhouse location 1 In the drawing area of the floor plan Level 1, move the cursor over the left townhouse and, when the edges highlight, click to select it.

2 On the Options Bar, click

.

Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates | 667

3 In the Element Properties dialog, under Instance Parameters, notice the Shared Location value is Not Shared. 4 Under Value, click Not Shared for Shared Location. Because this is the first time you are setting up the shared coordinates between the host and the linked models, a dialog displays telling you to reconcile the coordinates. This means that you need to choose which coordinate system will be shared by both files. This is a one-time operation. 5 In the Share Coordinates dialog:
■ ■

Select Publish the shared coordinate system. Under Record selected instance as being positioned at location, click Change.

6 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog, click Rename. 7 In the Rename dialog, enter Lot A for New, and click OK. 8 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog, click OK. 9 In the Select Location dialog, click Reconcile. 10 In the Element Properties dialog, notice the Shared Location value is now Lot A, and click OK. Constrain a link to a specific location 11 Select the townhouse building model on the right side of the host project. After a link instance is assigned a shared location, changing the position of that instance can affect the definition of the location that is saved with the linked file. When constraining a link to a location, you have only two choices:
■ ■

Move the instance to an existing location that is not already in use. Record the current position as a location. .

12 On the Options Bar, click

13 In the Element Properties dialog, under Instance Parameters, click Not Shared for Shared Location. In the Choose Location dialog, notice that you do not have an option to acquire or publish coordinates. This is because the coordinates for this linked file have already been shared. It is only necessary to reconcile coordinates once. 14 In the Choose Location dialog, select Move instance to. Notice the OK button is not active. This is because you cannot choose a location where an instance link already exists. You created the Lot A location in previous steps, and the left townhouse resides at that location. 15 In the Choose Location dialog, select the second option, Record current position as. Notice the OK button is still not active. Because Lot A is currently in use, you cannot redefine its location. 16 Click Change. 17 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog, click Duplicate, enter Lot B for Name, and click OK. 18 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog, make sure Lot B is selected, and click OK. 19 In the Select Location dialog, click OK. 20 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK. You now have two different locations for the townhouse building model: Lot A and Lot B. Save locations 21 On the File menu, click Manage Links. 22 In the Manage Links dialog, click the Revit tab, and then select the townhouse project.

668 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates

23 Click Save Locations. 24 In the Save Modified Linked Model dialog, select Save, and click OK. When you create a location, it is not automatically saved within the linked file. To explicitly save a location, you must go to the Manage Links dialog and save the locations there. NOTE If you attempt to close a host file without saving location changes made to linked files, you are prompted to save the locations to the linked files. 25 In the Manage Links dialog, notice the Locations Not Saved option for the townhouse project is no longer selected. 26 Click OK. 27 Select the townhouse on the right in Lot B and drag it a short distance in any direction. When you release the mouse button, a warning displays. You are informed that you have attempted to move a linked file that has been saved to a specific location. You are given the opportunity to save the new location, ignore the warning, or cancel the action. 28 Click Cancel to return the townhouse to Lot B. You can relocate an entire project with respect to all the linked files that are shared with it. When you relocate a project, the active location position is moved, although it may appear that the linked files are moving. By relocating a project, you essentially move the origin of the shared coordinates. Relocate a project 29 On the View menu, click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. 30 On the Tools menu, click Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project. This is a two-click process. The first click specifies the move start point. The second click specifies the move endpoint. 31 Click just north of the site topography and just below the North elevation symbol.

32 Move the cursor horizontally to the left approximately 40' and click to relocate the shared origin.

Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates | 669

Notice the site topography and the linked building models no longer line up, and the linked projects are offset the distance that you moved the origin.

33 On the Edit menu, click Undo to return the origin to its original position. 34 On the File menu, click Save. 35 In the Save Modified Linked Model dialog, select Save, and click OK. 36 On the File menu, click Close. NOTE In the following exercise, you work in one of the linked projects. You cannot work on a host file and one of its linked files simultaneously in the same session of Revit Structure. In this exercise, you created and saved the locations of each townhouse. You have also learned how to relocate the host project with respect to the linked projects.

Working with a Linked Building Model
After a file has been linked into a host and its coordinates are shared, the linked file contains information about its location with respect to the host. When opening the linked file, you can select which of the defined locations is the active location that you would like to work on. Also, if other models were linked into the same host, you could link them in and have them retain their correct position. In this exercise, you work on the townhouse building model and modify its location. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. If you have not completed the exercises, do so before continuing. Training File

On the File menu, click Open.

670 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates

■ ■

Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. Select c_Townhouse and click Open.

Link a project 1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click 1st Floor. This project is currently linked to the Site_Project.rvt file. It is located in Lot A and Lot B within that project file. In addition, the condo complex is linked within the Site_Project.rvt file. 2 On the File menu, click Import/Link ➤ Revit. 3 In the Import/Link RVT dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. Select c_Condo_Complex. For Positioning, select Auto - By Shared Coordinates. Click Open.

Because this building model only has one named location, it is placed automatically within the host project. 4 Zoom out to see the condo complex building model.

The condo complex is positioned relative to the active location of the townhouse building model. The current active location is Lot A. Change the active location 5 On the Settings menu, click Manage Place and Locations. Notice that Lot A is the current active location. 6 Select Lot B, and click Make Current. 7 Click OK. Notice that the condo complex link has repositioned itself as though the townhouse was on Lot B.

Working with a Linked Building Model | 671

NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this lesson, you need this project file open and in this view. In this exercise, you worked within a project that is linked within another project. You loaded a linked file into the townhouse project and then changed the active location to see how the project reacts to the changes. In the next exercise, you manage the shared locations.

Managing Shared Locations
The Manage Place and Locations command allows you to quickly create new location names or rename existing ones. These new locations can be assigned later within a host file. In this exercise, you create a new location, orient a view to true north, and use the Report Shared Coordinates tool. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. If you have not completed the exercises, do so before continuing. Manage locations 1 On the Settings menu, click Manage Place and Locations. 2 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog, click Duplicate. 3 In the Name dialog, enter Lot C, and click OK. 4 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog, click OK. Lot C now exists as a location although it has not been specified as an instance. In the host file, you can select Lot C if necessary. Orient a view to true north 5 On the View menu, click View Properties. 6 In the Element Properties dialog, under Graphics, select True North for Orientation, and click OK. 7 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. Notice that the orientation of the model resembles the site project.

672 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates

Report shared coordinates 8 On the Tools menu, click Shared Coordinates ➤ Report Shared Coordinates. This command allows you to determine the location of elements and points in the model with respect to the shared coordinate origin. 9 Click any component or in any location on the drawing area. On the Options Bar, notice the coordinates display in regards to the direction and distance to the origin. 10 On the File menu, click Close. You can save the file if you wish. In this exercise, you created a new location using the Manage Place and Locations tool. You rotated a view to true north and used the Report Shared Coordinates tool to locate components in regards to the origin.

Scheduling Components of Linked Files
In this exercise, you schedule components of the host file and of all linked files. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. If you have not completed the exercise, do so before continuing. Training File
■ ■ ■

On the File menu, click Open. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. Select Site_Project.rvt and click Open.

Create a door schedule 1 Verify that the floor plan Level 1 is the active view.

Scheduling Components of Linked Files | 673

2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities. 3 In the New Schedule dialog, under Category, select Doors, and click OK. Select the fields to display in the door schedule 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click the Fields tab. 5 Under Available fields, select Count, and click Add. 6 Add the remaining fields in the following order:
■ ■ ■

Family and Type Comments Cost

7 Select Include elements in linked files.

674 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates

expand Schedules/Quantities. you can sort the schedule data and display a single table entry per door type. and a grand total for the number of doors in the project buildings. you created a schedule of doors in the host file and all linked files of a project. 13 On the File menu. clear Itemize every instance. under Other. In this exercise. Sort schedule data 9 In the Project Browser. Scheduling Components of Linked Files | 675 . click Close. and then click OK twice. click Edit for Sorting/Grouping. click Save. 11 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 12 Select Grand totals. select Family and Type for Sort by.8 Click OK. and click Properties. right-click Door Schedule. In order to see a concise listing of all the doors in the campus project. You also sorted the schedule data to produce a consolidated listing of the components. You have completed this tutorial. the schedule lists the total count for each door type. Because you did not itemize every instance of each door type. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. 14 On the File menu.

676 .

complete with schedules. You create and manage 3 project phases. Phase 2 (north): Includes new steelwork. you or the client may want to view the model according to phases. Phases represent distinct time periods over the duration of a project. In the lesson and exercises that follow. You can use phase filters to control the flow of building model information into views and schedules. You then create schedules for the phased steelwork and 3-dimensional views of the phased construction and place them on a drawing sheet for a specific phase. you apply phase-specific room tags to rooms that vary with each phase. beams. a floor slab. and a non load-bearing brick panel wall for a new building to be constructed north of the galleria. you work in a simple building model that requires renovation. Phase 1 (south): Includes new steelwork and footings for the existing building. footings. assign new building model elements such as steelwork (columns. You can create as many phases as necessary and assign building model elements to specific phases. You customize the display of phased work to highlight demolition work. For the client. as well as a covered walkway. you renovate a building to convert it to a shopping mall. and create plan views for each phase. demolish existing construction. braces and footings) to phases. ■ ■ 677 . You create new phases. Also includes demolition of all internal walls for the existing building. you work with a building information model that requires renovation. This allows you to create phase-specific project documentation. assigning building elements to the appropriate phase: ■ Existing: Includes the original brick-clad building with structural walls and non load-bearing internal partitions. In the second exercise. In this tutorial. and then add new building model elements. You create new phases. you can create a visual time line of phase-specific 3D views. the galleria.Project Phasing 21 In any project. Using Phasing In this lesson.

Existing phase Phase 1 (south) 678 | Chapter 21 Project Phasing .

You create a new sheet on which you place the schedules and 2 views of the building model. You create new phases for the project timeline. you begin with all the building elements drawn as new construction. Phasing Your Model | 679 .Phase 2 (north) After you add phases to the project. and modify graphic overrides to highlight demolition work. you create structural schedules for a specific phase of the project. The default structural project template has 2 phases: Existing and New Construction. The finished sheet Phasing Your Model In this exercise. After you assign building elements to phases. use phase filters to control what displays in each phase. you create new phase-specific views. Dataset ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

You can also use the Demolition tool to select building elements for demolition. The Show All filter means that all building model elements (new. expand Views (all). Verify the current phase is New Construction 1 In the Project Browser. Any new elements that you add to this view are assigned the New Construction phase value. This phase assignment is controlled by a Phase setting within the view properties. the current phase linework is displayed as black. As you add new elements to the building model. notice that the Phase Created value is New Construction. Demolition work is represented by a black dashed line. These values let you assign creation and demolition phases in a timeline. In the Element Properties dialog. TIP Available phases and view phase settings can be changed in a project template so they are available for each new project. Every building element has a Phase Created and a Phase Demolished value so you can assign a creation and a demolition phase to new work. and double-click Floor. existing. they are assigned to the New Construction phase by default. For example. A phase view can show work in the current phase and work from previous phases in the project timeline. 4 Click Cancel. and open Common\c_STR_Project_Phasing. click . 2 phases exist by default: Existing and New Construction. demo. 6 On the Options Bar. By default. notice that Show All is selected for Phase Filter and New Construction is selected for Phase.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. then new building elements are assigned to Phase 1. or temporary) are visible in this phase. 5 Select any of the exterior walls. while previous phase linework is displayed as gray. under Phasing. click Training Files. if a view is assigned to a Phase 1 setting. 680 | Chapter 21 Project Phasing . and the Phase Demolished value is None. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. expand Floor Plans. When you create a new structural project. They can also be added or edited in an existing project at any time.rvt.

Add and edit phases 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Phases. and Phase 2 (north). existing earlier phases. and click OK. With the phase Filter set to Show New. 17 In the Element Properties dialog.7 Click Cancel. 11 Enter Phase 1 (south). You do not see a change in the graphics because all the building elements are new to Phase 1 (south). so Phase 1 and Phase 2 occur after the Existing phase. expand 3D Views. click Modify to clear the command. and double-click 3D. or temporary work (created and demolished in same phase). There are now 3 phases in your project: Existing. Assign selected building elements to the Existing phase 15 In the Project Browser. 12 Under Insert. Phase 1 (south). All of the building elements in the project are currently assigned to Phase 1 (south). Now you are seeing only work that is new to Phase 1 (south) of the project. Phasing Your Model | 681 . which means that work assigned to Phase 1 (south). on the Project Phases tab. and enter Phase 2 (north) under Name. is visible in this view. All building objects that were assigned to New Construction are now assigned to Phase 1 (south) because you changed the phase name. 18 Select Show New for Phase Filter. click After. and enter the following text: ■ ■ ■ Existing: Existing building Phase 1 (south): Existing building with new steelwork and demolished walls Phase 2 (north): New building with steelwork and exterior panel wall 14 Click OK. scroll down the list of Instance Parameters until you see the Phasing heading. 10 In the Phasing dialog. The Phase value is Phase 1 (south) and the Phase filter is Show All. 16 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. The phases are on a timeline with later phases lower on the list. as you change selected building elements to the existing phase. click the New Construction field. 13 Click in the Description fields for each phase. demo. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you will see a visual confirmation of the change as the building elements disappear from the view.

The footings are hidden and cannot be selected. 21 On the View Control Bar.19 Click the ViewCube to adjust your view as shown. 682 | Chapter 21 Project Phasing . right-click one of the rectangular footings. 22 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Top. and click Select All Instances. and click Hide Object. 20 In the drawing area. click Hide/Isolate.

and click OK. 30 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. 32 Click OK. select Existing for Phase Created. 29 On the View Control Bar. which are the building elements that comprise the existing building. click . under Phasing. clear Structural Columns and Structural Framing. The building elements that you assigned to the Existing phase are no longer displayed in the drawing. 28 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southeast. 26 On the Options Bar. Phasing Your Model | 683 . under Phasing. 24 On the Options Bar. and click OK. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. select Show All for Phase Filter. and previously you hid the rectangular footings to make sure they couldn’t be selected. 31 In the Element Properties dialog. walls. Only elements new to Phase 1 (south) are displayed. click . as shown. 25 In the Filter dialog. are selected and are displayed in red. This filters out the steelwork. and openings. The continuous footing foundations. click Hide/Isolate.23 Use a crossing window to select the existing building. and click Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate.

it requires separate plan views for the Existing. and click OK. All of the structural elements are still assigned to Phase 1 (south). Because this is a renovation project. click . You see work for Phase 1 (south) and the existing phases. 34 Use a selection window to select the structural elements. 35 On the Options Bar. You have reassigned building elements to 3 phases. the slab. Phase 1 (south) with demolition. select Phase 2 (north) for Phase Created. under Phasing. After you create the views. the building is displayed as shown. 37 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northeast. you modify phase and phase filter properties 684 | Chapter 21 Project Phasing . the walls. 33 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Top. and Phase 2 (north) project phases. You do not see future phases such as Phase 2 (north). and the footings north of the galleria. Because the active phase is Phase 1 (south) and the phase filter is set to Show All. 36 In the Element Properties dialog.Now you can see the Existing phase displayed with gray linework in the view.

enter Phase 1 (south). 44 Repeat the process to create a view named Phase 2 (north) Manage the phases for a view 45 In the Project Browser. select Existing for Phase. 50 In the View Properties dialog. In a phase such as Phase 1. under Floor Plans. under Floor Plans. 48 In the Project Browser. 49 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. in phase 1. Phase 1 (south) occurs after existing construction. you do not want to rename the corresponding views and level. 47 In the Element Properties dialog. under Floor Plans. right-click Existing. select Phase 1 (south) for the Phase value. right-click Floor. new. enter Existing. You are asked if you want to rename corresponding level and views. 40 Click No. and click OK. double-click Existing. right-click Copy of Existing. and click Rename. a graphic override is used to make “older” existing elements use the gray line style. 43 In the Rename View dialog. The line style of the new work. demo. double click Phase 1 (south). and click Duplicate. 42 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. and click OK.to determine which phase is shown and which building elements (existing. under Floor Plans. Because this is a phase-specific view. which will include planned demolition. and click OK. You can see the earlier existing phase because the phase filter is set to Show All. and click OK. it might be desirable to show previous phases or demolition. shows as black. You now have a separate floor plan for the existing building model and for Phase 1. Because of this time relationship. The line style of the walls and openings are displayed as black. Phasing Your Model | 685 . 41 In the Project Browser. under Phasing. click . Demolish the interior walls 51 On the Tools toolbar. under Phasing. The cursor is displayed as a hammer. Create phase-specific plan views 38 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 46 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. This refers to the ceiling plan and the level line visible in any of the elevation views. and temporary) are shown in the same timeline. 39 In the Rename View dialog.

52 Referring to the walls displayed as dashed lines in the following illustration. 54 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. demo. Create a custom phase filter 57 Click Settings menu ➤ Phases. select the interior walls one at a time. Demo Red. Demolished. New. under Phasing. 61 For the Filter Name. click the Phase Filters tab. 59 In the Phasing dialog. In this case. That is because the openings are wall-hosted elements. and Temporary. under Floor Plans. 56 Click OK. 60 Under Filter Name. new or temporary. 63 Click on the Demolished line color and change it from black to red. and select Show All for Phase Filter. 55 In the Element Properties dialog. select Overridden. and enter Demo Red. select Phase 2 (north) for the Phase value. 686 | Chapter 21 Project Phasing . When you demolish the host. double-click Phase 2 (north). Because the Phase value is Phase 1 (south) the walls are demolished in this phase. it is displayed as a dashed line. This new filter uses graphic overrides to set the display of all building model elements. Graphic overrides define the appearance of building model elements according to their phase status: existing. The line style of the current phase is displayed as black and previous phases are displayed as gray. View graphic overrides 62 Click the Graphic Overrides tab. Notice that the openings display as demolished even though you did not specifically demolish them. As you click each wall. click Filter 1. The default phase filters are displayed. you demolish all elements hosted by it. 53 In the Project Browser. you need a filter that takes all of the phases into account with a particular graphic override to highlight the demolished walls in red. however. Existing. 64 Click OK twice. A new phase filter is displayed at the bottom of the Filter Name list. click New. 58 In the Phasing dialog. under Demolished.

Apply the Demo Red graphic overrides to a view 65 Under Floor Plans. The line style of the new work. Because of this time relationship. under Graphics. select Demo Red for Phase Filter to show work that is demolished with the red line color from the graphic overrides. under 3D Views. The override settings for Show All and Demo Red are the same. select Shading for Model Graphics Style. 81 In the Element Properties dialog. 67 In the Element Properties dialog. 75 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. under 3D Views. 73 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. double-click Phase 1 (south). select Shading for Model Graphics Style. Phasing Your Model | 687 . 66 To assign as specific phase filter to a view. Because you changed the override. and Show All for Phase Filter. shows as black. 82 In the Element Properties dialog. 78 Click OK. double-click Phase 1 (south). 79 In the Project Browser. Create phase-specific 3D views 69 In the Project Browser. 71 Name the views Existing. Phase 1 (south) occurs after existing construction. You can see the earlier existing phase because the phase filter is set to Show All. Manage the phases for the 3D views 72 In the Project Browser. 76 Under Graphics. 68 Click OK. Do this 3 times so you have 3 copies. 77 Select Coordination for Discipline. right-click 3D and click Duplicate. the demolished walls are displayed as red. a graphic override is used to make “older” existing elements use the gray line style. which will show both architectural and structural building elements. and the Show All phase filter includes the override for demolition. under Phasing. select Phase 1 (south) for Phase. 83 Select Coordination for Discipline. select Existing for the Phase value. Phase 2 (north). and click OK. under Phasing. under Phasing. Phase 1 (south). and click Rename. under 3D Views. 74 In the Element Properties dialog. double-click Existing. The line style of the walls and openings are displayed as black. This displays both architectural and structural building elements. click View menu ➤ View Properties. 70 Right-click on each of the copies. 80 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. in phase 1.

84 for the Phase 2 (north) view. you can do so at this time or you can continue in this file for the next exercise. and footing schedules for a single phase of a project. assigning Phase 2 (north) as the Phase. You created a custom phase filter with graphic overrides to show demolition work in red. The finished sheet 688 | Chapter 21 Project Phasing .84 Click OK. You finished the exercise by creating 3d phased views suitable for a client presentation. In this exercise. 85 Repeat steps 81 . framing. you create column. 86 If you wish to save this file. Creating Phase-Specific Structural Schedules In this exercise. You create a new sheet on which you place the schedules. as well as 2 views of the building model. you created a building model with 3 distinct phases and created 3 plan views with appropriate phase filters to display each phase.

7 In the New Schedule dialog. Create a structural column schedule for Phase 1 (south) 1 On the View tab of the Design bar. 5 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. Select Length for Then by.Phase 1 for Name. In the left pane of the Open dialog. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category.Phase 1 for Name. and do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Family and Type for Sort By. select the following fields. Select Phase 1 (south) for Phase. click Schedule/Quantities. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. Click OK. click Training Files. select Structural Columns. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. click Schedule/Quantities. Select Grand totals. click the Fields tab.Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 In the New Schedule dialog. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ Count Family and Type Length TIP Press and hold CTRL to make multiple selections under Available Fields. Click OK. Clear Itemize every instance. Enter Columns . Create a structural framing schedule for Phase 1 (south) 6 On the Design Bar. and open Imperial\i_STR_Project_Phasing_Schedules. Enter Framing . Click OK. Creating Phase-Specific Structural Schedules | 689 . select Structural Framing. You can drag a column grid line to adjust the width of a column. Select Phase 1 (south) for Phase. 4 Under Available Fields.

expand Sheets (all). Create a sheet and then add views and schedules 16 In the Project Browser. 14 Under Available Fields. click Schedule/Quantities 12 In the New Schedule dialog.8 In the Schedule Properties dialog. right-click the new sheet. Select Grand totals. Enter Footings . 19 In the Sheet Title dialog.Structural for Name. click OK. you drag the schedules and project views onto the sheet. Clear Itemize every instance. right-click Sheets (all). 9 Under Available Fields. Create a footings schedule for Phase 1 (south) 11 On the Design bar. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ Count Family and Type 15 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab.Phase 1 for Name. Click OK. click the Fields tab. and click Rename. Select Grand totals. 18 In the Project Browser. Use the following illustration as a guide as you complete the steps to create your sheet. Click OK. and do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Family and Type for Sort By. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. select the following fields. Click OK. Select Phase 1 (south) for Phase. 13 In the Schedule Properties dialog. select the following fields. Clear Itemize every instance. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ Count Family and Type 10 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. click the Fields tab. Next. and do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Family and Type for Sort By. 690 | Chapter 21 Project Phasing . select Structural Foundations. enter Phase 1 . 17 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. and click New Sheet.

and click to place them. 22 Expand Schedules. select each schedule one at a time. and move the column controls to adjust column width. Creating Phase-Specific Structural Schedules | 691 . and click to place it. In this exercise. drag each of the 3 schedules onto the sheet. and click to place it. drag Phase 1 (south) onto the sheet. 21 Under 3D views. you created 3 custom structural schedules for a specific project phase and placed them on a sheet. and drag Phase 1 (south) onto the sheet. 23 On the sheet.20 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans.

692 .

Rendering an Exterior View In this lesson. you learn to use the rendering features in Revit Structure 2009 to create rendered interior and exterior views of a building information model. You also learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of a model. you learn how to create an exterior perspective view of a pool house building model and create rendered images for daytime and nighttime lighting. Daytime rendering of the pool house 693 .Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs 22 In this tutorial.

add trees to the building site. you learn how to view and modify the material that is applied to a building component in a building model. In this exercise. you render a region of the building that includes the exterior wall. define a new black anodized aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions of the pool house wall. you: ■ ■ ■ change the render appearance of the wood material applied to the exterior screen wall of the pool house. the pad. 694 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .Nighttime rendering of the pool house You learn to create and apply materials to the building model. You also learn how to create a new material and apply it to a building component. and create the perspective view that you want to render. When you complete these changes. change the material of the pad of the pool house from the default material to concrete. and then render a final exterior view. and the curtain wall to view and verify the material and texture changes. You work with a building model that already has materials applied to it. After you create the perspective view. you specify options that define the model environment. Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model In this exercise.

rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Zoom in to the wall of the house near the pool. View the finish material of the screen wall 1 Verify that the 3D view of the pool house is displayed. click Training Files.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 695 . and open Common\c_Pool_House.

6 In the Edit Assembly dialog. Solid. The Wood . click Replace. and on the Options Bar. 10 On the Render Appearance tab. Solid material is currently a light stained teak. click Edit.3 In the drawing area. 9 In the Materials dialog. satin-finished teak. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. verify that the material for Structure [1] is Wood . (Element You check the construction of the screen walls to determine the material assigned to the wall. 5 Under Construction. click Edit/New. Solid. The design calls for the use of a dark stained. select Wood . select the wooden screen wall. 7 Click OK 3 times.Teak. for Materials. 696 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .Teak. click Properties).Teak. so you can change the render appearance for the material. Change the render appearance of the wood material 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. for Structure.

18 In the Materials dialog. It can be used for visual feedback to see if the setting produces the desired results. 12 On the Render Appearance tab of the Materials dialog. 16 Under Construction. for Finish. and on the Options Bar. select Concrete . click Modify. for Finish. and click OK. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. click Wood Teak Stained Dark Medium Gloss. for the Structure [1] Material value. 22 On the Design Bar. click Edit. select Broom Straight. Change the material of the pad from the default material to concrete 14 In the drawing area. Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 697 .11 In the Render Appearance Library dialog. and click . You change the material assignment to use a concrete with a straight broom finish. The Update Preview option provides a real time rendering of the changes to the material. click <By Category>. 13 Click Update Preview. for Structure. 19 On the Render Appearance tab. select the pad. 17 In the Edit Assembly dialog. 20 Click the Graphics tab. You make modifications to the settings for this material to more closely match the desired finish. which is using a default material. The material assignment for the pad is currently set to By Category. click (Element Properties).Cast-in-Place Concrete. You do not want the medium gloss finish. and review the material patterns. 21 Click OK 4 times. select Satin Varnish. but it is the closest material to what you want. and click Update Preview. and click OK. click Edit/New.

select Metal . Anodized .Aluminum. You create a black anodized aluminum material. the color used for this material in shaded views is an average color defined by the render appearance. for Name.Black. 31 On the Graphics tab of the Materials dialog. By selecting this option. You use an existing material as a template to create the black anodized aluminum material. 26 At the bottom left corner of the Materials dialog. and click OK. select Use Render Appearance for Shading. click (Duplicate). click Replace. click Aluminum Anodized Black. 30 In the Render Appearance Library. and click OK.Define a new material and apply it to the mullions 23 Zoom in to view the curtain wall mullions. and apply it to the mullions of the pool house wall. review the material appearance (color and pattern).Aluminum. and click OK. 698 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 27 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog. enter Metal . 25 In the Materials dialog. 28 On the Graphics tab of the Materials dialog. 24 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. 29 On the Render Appearance tab.

for Curtain Wall Mullions. (Show Rendering Dialog). Anodized .32 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. You change the material used by the curtain wall mullion category. select the Material value.Black. Render a region of the model to view the material changes 37 On the View Control Bar. 38 At the top of the Rendering dialog. 35 Click OK twice. . 33 In the Object Styles dialog. The mullions and frame for the wall are defined as By Category.Aluminum. click 39 Select the rendering crop boundary. 36 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view. select Region. select Metal . Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 699 . and click 34 In the Materials dialog.

and pad). NOTE The smaller the region. 41 Zoom in to the region in order to see the results of the rendering test more clearly. the faster the image renders.40 Adjust the extents of the region by dragging the borders in tight around the areas where the materials changed (pool house screen. mullions. It is a good practice to define a precise render region until you are ready to create the final rendered image. 700 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .

for Scheme. The Rendering Progress dialog displays. after the rendering process completes. 46 Click File menu ➤ Save. select Sunlight from top left. under Display. and save the project as c_Pool_House_in_progress. 45 Close the Rendering dialog. Refer to the Revit Structure Online Help for best practices for optimizing quality and output settings. select Medium. The higher the quality. ■ ■ 43 Click Render. you place trees and shrubs on the building site in order to provide a more realistic context for rendering the project. Under Lighting. 44 To display the building model.rvt. Adding Trees to the Site on page 701. the longer the rendering process will take. for Setting. click Show the model.42 Specify options in the Rendering dialog: ■ Under Quality. Several quality settings are available. providing information on the status and duration of the rendering process. Adding Trees to the Site | 701 . Adding Trees to the Site In this exercise. 47 Proceed to the next exercise. For Sun. select Exterior: Sun only. on the Rendering dialog.

In a later exercise. c_Pool_House_in_progress. and double-click Site. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. when you render an exterior view of the model. NOTE For simplicity. 2 Zoom in so you can easily view the area surrounding the pool house and walkway. Add shrubs and trees to the site 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. 702 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . expand Floor Plans. but any type and size can be used. expand Views (all). Specific types and sizes of trees are referenced in the steps. the RPC model is used in the rendering. imperial components and units are used in this lesson.

as shown. See Loading Families in the Revit Structure 2009 Online Help. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed. select RPC Tree . select RPC Shrub : Yew 2'-4''. near the walkway. click Site Component. and place 2 trees in the project. right-click in the Design Bar. they can be loaded from the Content Library.3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. (Exact placement is not important. Adding Trees to the Site | 703 . 5 Place 4 shrubs to the right of the patio. and click Site. NOTE If planting families are not loaded into a project. 4 In the Type Selector.30'.Deciduous : Red Maple .) 6 In the Type Selector. similar to the locations shown.

13 Click OK twice.Deciduous : Scarlet Oak .18'. 704 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . select RPC Tree . and place a tree to the left of the pool house between the 2 maple trees.25'. and on the Options Bar. for New. select RPC Tree . and click OK.Deciduous : Honey Locust . enter Honey Locust . Create a tree type and add it to the site 8 In the Type Selector. click (Element Properties). 14 Click in the drawing area to the right of the pool house to place the tree. click Edit/New. 11 In the Rename dialog.42'. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. for Height. enter 18'. 10 In the Type Properties dialog.7 In the Type Selector. click Rename. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. You change the size of the existing Honey Locust tree family.

17 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating a Perspective View In this exercise.15 On the Design Bar. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Modify. Creating a Perspective View on page 705. you define the exterior perspective view of the building model that you want to render. Creating a Perspective View | 705 .

Specify the second point in the upper left corner of the pool house to define the target point of the camera. 706 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . ■ Exact placement is not important because you modify the view as required.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.rvt. click Camera. Place a camera in the site view 1 With the Site view open. on the View tab of the Design Bar. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and the camera target point: ■ Specify the first point along the curve of the walkway facing the pool house to position the camera. c_Pool_House_in_progress. The perspective view displays.

right-click 3D View 1. and click Show Camera. the triangle that represents the field of vision can be adjusted. as necessary. and adjust the field of vision.3 Zoom out. Depending on camera placement. The camera can also be moved along the walkway to get the desired perspective view. the back wall of the yard may be cut off. and select the crop boundary. in the Project Browser. With the camera shown. double-click Site. Adjust the back clipping plane so that it is beyond the wall in the yard. Creating a Perspective View | 707 . If the camera is not shown in the view. 4 Adjust the crop boundary to display the entire building and some of the pool in the foreground. as shown. under Floor Plans. Adjust the field of vision and back clipping plane 5 In the Project Browser.

7 In the Rename View dialog. and click Rename. and click OK. 10 Save the file. under 3D Views. 708 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .Day. right-click 3D View 1. 11 Proceed to the next exercise. 8 In the Project Browser. 9 Zoom to fit the perspective view in the window. double-click Exterior . enter Exterior . Creating the Exterior Rendering on page 709.Day to open the view.6 In the Project Browser. and make any final adjustments to the crop boundary to improve image composition.

double-click Exterior . and create lighting groups for a nighttime view of the exterior. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.Day. Creating the Exterior Rendering | 709 . you specify the time and location settings for the rendering. c_Pool_House_in_progress.rvt. and render a daytime view of the exterior. modify render settings. You then duplicate the view.Creating the Exterior Rendering In this exercise. under 3D Views. Display the perspective view 1 In the Project Browser.

for New. for Setting. for Sun. 4 On the Still tab of the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 710 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 7 In the Rendering dialog. click (Show Rendering Dialog). 8 Under Quality. You create a location and time for the rendering. The PNG and TIFF formats place the chosen background on an alpha channel for easier manipulation during photoediting. In this case. see Orienting to True North for Solar Studies. 5 In the Rename dialog. For information on how the rendering/sun relates to the location settings. select Sky: Cloudy.Santa Monica. under Lighting. enter Spring Equinox . the sky will be a procedural sky based on cloud settings and time of day. select Edit/New. 3pm. 3 In the Rendering dialog. export the resulting image in PNG or TIFF format. and click Rename. 6 Click OK twice. under Background. You adjust cloud settings as required. and click Render. select Medium. select Spring Equinox. NOTE If a background image is required.Specify rendering settings for a daytime view 2 On the View Control Bar.

click Show the rendering. select Portable Network Graphics (*. 12 In the Save Image dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. Export the rendered image to an external file 11 In the Rendering dialog. click Show the model. Creating the Exterior Rendering | 711 . After the image is rendered.9 In the Rendering dialog. 13 Close the Rendering dialog. you can switch between the rendered view and the model view as long as the Revit Structure session is open. Click Save. click Export. For Files of type. click Desktop. 10 In the Rendering dialog.png). The image file is saved to the Desktop for later reference.

Day. 19 In the New Light Group dialog. 22 Using the same method. and click Artificial Lights.Night. 16 With the Exterior . press and hold SHIFT. under Lighting. select Exterior: Artificial only. enter Pool Lights. select the first light. click OK. 26 In the Artificial Lights dialog.Night view open. To select a sequential list. To create a similar view using different rendering settings. for Name.120V. 15 Rename the Copy of Exterior . dialog.Day view to Exterior . 27 In the Rendering dialog. You change the rendering settings to create a nighttime rendering of the same view. and click Move to Group. under Ungrouped Lights. enter Pool House Lights.Specify rendering settings for a nighttime view 14 In the Project Browser. click New. click Render. under Group Options.120V to the Pool Lights group. under Ungrouped Lights. (Show Rendering 17 In the Rendering dialog.120V through 35 :Sconce Light . 23 In the Artificial Lights dialog. add 30 :Sconce Light . 20 In the Artificial Lights dialog.Exterior . 25 Using the same method. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. click Dialog).Flat Round : 60W . verify that Pool Lights is selected. for Scheme. 24 In the New Light Group dialog.Flat Round : 60W . 21 In the Light Groups dialog. and click OK. on the View Control Bar. 712 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . under 3D Views. Create lighting groups 18 In the Artificial Lights . add 16 :Light Fixture through 29 :Light Fixture to the Pool House Lights group. under Group Options.120V through 14 :Sconce Light . and click OK. click New. you duplicate the view and change the settings. right-click Exterior . and select the last light. for Name.Night. and click OK.Flat Round : 60W .Flat Round : 60W . highlight 9 :Sconce Light . Lighting groups allow greater control over lighting schemes used in renderings.

but the other settings can be modified as well to control the final rendering. After the image is rendered. 32 Save the file. under Image. Rendering an Interior View on page 713. for Exposure Value. and then switch between the views by clicking Show the rendering. click Adjust Exposure. 33 Proceed to the next lesson. Settings can be changed at any time within the Revit Structure session. Rendering an Interior View In this lesson. 30 In the Rendering dialog. you create a nighttime and a daytime rendering of the interior view of the building model that you worked with in the previous lesson. 29 In the Exposure Control dialog. you change the brightness of the exposure. In this example. 31 Close the Rendering dialog. enter 4. the exposure can be modified to improve the output. Rendering an Interior View | 713 . click Show the model.Adjust the exposure 28 In the Rendering dialog. and click OK.

define the perspective view and rendering settings. you add an RPC person to the interior view that you render in a later exercise. render the views. Adding RPC People In this exercise. c_Pool_House_in_progress. you add ArchVision® realpeople (RPC content) to the interior of the pool house. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 714 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . RPC people are represented by a 2D symbol in plan view and resemble real people only when rendered in a 3D view. and finally.rvt.Draft nighttime rendering of the interior High quality daytime rendering of the interior To create the rendered view.

■ (Rotate). Adding RPC People | 715 . the person’s line of sight. 4 In the Type Selector. but place the figure close to the front of the vanity so that her reflection displays in the mirror after the scene is rendered. 5 On the Design Bar. Exact placement is not important.Add an RPC figure to the view 1 In the Project Browser. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. 2 Zoom in to the pool house. Click to set the rotate start point at the line of sight. double-click Level 1. and place the component inside the pool house. and on the Edit toolbar. click Modify. 6 Select the figure. click 7 Rotate the figure: The pointed portion of the symbol represents the front of the figure. click Component. select RPC Female : YinYin.

9 In the Element Properties dialog. By default. the reflective properties must be turned on for the family type. and click so that the figure is angled toward the vanity. under Parameters. 13 On the Design Bar. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. for Render Appearance Properties. under Identity Data. on the Options Bar. In order to see the figure’s reflection. 716 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . click Edit/New. If reflections of RPC content are important to the rendering. click Edit. 14 Save the file. 12 Click OK 3 times. click Modify. Enable reflective properties for RPC content 8 With the RPC figure selected. select Cast Reflections. you can enable this option. the reflection of RPC content is turned off in order to enhance rendering performance.■ Rotate clockwise about 20 degrees. click (Element Properties). 11 In the Render Appearance Properties dialog.

15 Proceed to the next exercise. Add a camera 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Camera. and using a section box to limit the geometry included in the rendering process. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and target point: ■ ■ Click inside the lower right corner of the pool house to place the camera. Creating the Interior Perspective View on page 717. You place a camera into the view to create an interior perspective. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Exact placement is not important because you will adjust the crop boundary of the view in later steps. you create the interior perspective view that you will render in the final exercise in this lesson. c_Pool_House_in_progress.rvt. Creating the Interior Perspective View In this exercise. Click outside of the pool house to the left to place the target point. Creating the Interior Perspective View | 717 . You define the interior perspective by placing a camera.

right-click 3D View 1. 718 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .The perspective view displays. 4 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. 6 Zoom out so that you can see the selection box. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. Add a section box to limit the extents of the rendered view 3 Zoom to fit the view in the window. You can use a section box to limit the geometry included in a rendering. and click OK. and click Properties. select Section Box. under Extents.

7 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. double-click Level 1. 10 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. select the section box. 9 In the Project Browser. 8 In the Project Browser. you display an elevation/section view and a plan view. in addition to the 3D view. Creating the Interior Perspective View | 719 . double-click South. In order to accurately adjust the section box. 11 In the 3D view. under Elevations (Building Elevations). under Floor Plans.

select the section box. 14 In the 3D view. size the box as shown. and click Hide in view ➤ Category. 720 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . size the box as shown. 13 In the South Elevation view. right-click.12 In the floor plan view.

16 Zoom to fit the view in the window. and curtain walls. 17 Save the file. and adjust the crop boundary to match the illustration. you define artificial lighting and render a nighttime view of the interior. and render the interior view.15 Maximize the 3D view. you define daylight portals for the glazed panels of the curtain wall. Creating the Interior Rendering on page 721. doors that contain windows or glass. To create a daytime view. Creating the Interior Rendering In this exercise. Training File Creating the Interior Rendering | 721 . 18 Proceed to the next exercise. Daylight portals improve the quality of light that shines through windows.

you turn them off for this scene. and click Rename. These settings can be adjusted after the rendering is complete using the Adjust Exposure option. Because the exterior pool lights will not have an effect on this rendering. under 3D Views. 3 On the View Control Bar. and render the view to check lighting levels and material selections. 2 In the Rename View dialog. right-click 3D View 1. under Lighting. Define lighting for a nighttime view 1 In the Project Browser. You can specify a lower quality. 722 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Using light controls and lighting groups can help to define multiple lighting conditions for views. 8 In the Rendering dialog. and click OK.rvt. 7 Under Quality. clear Pool Lights. After these settings are established. c_Pool_House_in_progress.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Render. The Interior: Artificial only option defines a baseline for the exposure and other settings for an interior rendering without daylight. enter Interior . 4 In the Rendering dialog. select Interior: Artificial only. 5 Click Artificial Lights. 6 In the Artificial Lights dialog. for Setting. and click OK. the view can be rendered at a higher quality level.Night. click (Show Rendering Dialog). for Scheme. select Draft.

you must create a custom setting. and click Render. the daylight portals can be turned on. In this case. but the space will receive standard daylighting.Night. see the Revit Structure Online Help. For sunlit interiors. The daylight portals help to further refine this daylight into a more realistic rendered effect. select Curtain Walls. You create a view for the interior during the day. and click OK. select Edit. You have to copy a preset scheme to your custom settings in order to make changes. 3pm. select Interior: Sun only. For more information on daylight portals. for Daylight Portal Options. select Spring Equinox . for Scheme. NOTE The custom setting is only applied to this view.Santa Monica. click 14 For Setting. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 13 In the Rendering dialog. click Copy To Custom. 15 In the Render Quality Settings dialog. in order to turn on daylight portals. for Sun. The preset schemes are read-only. You can duplicate the view for each lighting condition/time of day you want to render.9 Close the Rendering dialog. 16 Scroll to the bottom of the dialog. Specify rendering settings 12 On the View Control Bar. Creating the Interior Rendering | 723 . 17 In the Rendering dialog. This process must be repeated if you want to use custom settings in other views. (Show Rendering Dialog).Day. IMPORTANT Enabling daylight portals can drastically increase rendering times. select Region. right-click Interior . Create an interior day view 10 In the Project Browser. 11 Rename the copied view to Interior . By default they are turned off.

Click OK. For Saturation. enter 1. and close the Rendering dialog. click Properties). select the column on the right. Notice that the speckling on the wooden column in the foreground is reflecting too much light. View the properties of the column and note that the assigned material is Wood. click Adjust Exposure. In the next steps. click Show the model. you adjust the material of the column to improve the effect.18 In the Rendering dialog. enter 10. Modify the column material 21 In the drawing area. 19 In the Exposure Control dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Exposure Value. and on the Options Bar. 20 In the Rendering dialog. under Image. (Element 724 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .

enter 5''. Click OK. select the crop boundary. and click OK. move the slider to the right until the value is approximately 5. select Scale (locked proportions). under Output Settings. Create a print quality rendering 27 On the View Control Bar. Creating the Interior Rendering | 725 . and on the Options Bar. 32 In the Rendering dialog. For Width. click Settings menu ➤ Materials. For Amount. and rotate the material so that the grain of the wood runs vertically along the column.22 In the Element Properties dialog. select Based on wood grain. 29 In the Rendering dialog. You change the varnish setting. click (Show Rendering Dialog). For Bump. 30 In the drawing area. As size and DPI are increased. click the dimensions for Size. 25 Specify options on the Render Appearance tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Finish. The rendered output can be set to a printed ratio and the printed size of the output as well as the DPI for the image can be controlled. 23 With the column still selected. for Setting. 31 In the Crop Region Size dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Change. For Rotate. add a bump map to create texture. 26 Click Update Preview. for Resolution. select High. enter 90. select Unfinished. you can define the output and quality settings for final output.6. the render time increases significantly. clear Region. After you use the test renderings to verify that you made the correct lighting and material selection. 24 In the Materials dialog. click OK. and click Render. select Printer. select Wood. 28 In the Rendering dialog.

Creating and Recording Walkthroughs In this lesson. Recording a Walkthrough After you create a walkthrough. By completing the two rendering lessons included in this tutorial. You learned to create perspective views suitable for rendering and to modify rendering options in order to optimize the final output. Creating and Editing a Walkthrough The first step in creating a walkthrough is to define the walkthrough path. but you can also define it in a 3D. In a plan view. you learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of your building models in Revit Structure 2009. you rendered an exterior and an interior view. elevation. independent of the Revit Structure software. Additional frames that comprise the walkthrough are created between the key frames. The file can now be exported or saved to the Revit project. When you export your walkthrough to an AVI. you can also specify the height of the camera along the walkthrough path.The rendered image displays. Each point becomes a key frame in the walkthrough. you can record it by exporting it to an AVI file that you can play with any available video player. A walkthrough is created in a 3D perspective view by default. you define the walkthrough path in a plan view. 33 Close the exercise file with or without saving. you can select one of the following display options for the building model in your walkthrough: ■ ■ ■ Wireframe Hidden Line (wireframe view with hidden lines) Shading 726 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . which is the path that a camera will follow through the building model. You can edit the walkthrough path by selecting and moving the key frames. The walkthrough path is a spline. and you create it by specifying points that create the spline. but you can also create it in a 3D orthographic view. or section view. Usually.

■ ■ Shading with Edges Rendering Creating a Walkthrough In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating a Walkthrough | 727 . verify that Perspective is selected. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 5 Specify 4 additional points to define key frame positions on the walkthrough path as shown. Create a walkthrough of the first floor of the building model 1 In the Project Browser. NOTE Some imperial values are used by default in this exercise.rvt. and click to specify the start point (the first key frame) of the walkthrough. 4 Move the cursor under the text label in the Breakfast room. You create a walkthrough that begins in the breakfast room of the townhouse. right-click in the Design Bar. click Walkthrough. click Settings ➤ Project Units. If you prefer to use metric values. and double-click 1st Floor. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. you learn how to create and edit a walkthrough of the first floor of a townhouse. and click the tab in the context menu. TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar. click Training Files. expand Views (all). and open Common\c_Townhouse. and change unit formats as desired. proceeds through the dining room. expand Floor Plans. 3 To create the walkthrough in a 3D perspective view. and ends in the far corner of the living room. on the Options Bar.

Your frame may look a bit different from the frame in the illustration because the walkthrough path is not precisely the same.6 After you specify the final point of the walkthrough path in the Living room. surrounded by a crop boundary with grips as shown. Edit and play the walkthrough 7 In the Project Browser. on the Options Bar. click Finish. The last frame of the walkthrough is displayed. 728 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . expand Views (all) ➤ Walkthroughs. and double-click Walkthrough 1.

enter 9''. If it is not. on the Options Bar. The frame that is displayed is frame 300 of a total of 300 frames. The walkthrough controls are displayed on the Options Bar. click Edit Walkthrough. for Frame. 15 In the Walkthrough Frames dialog. enter 60 to reduce the total number of frames in the walkthrough from 300 to 60. enter 16''. and press ENTER to set the walkthrough to play from the beginning (the key frame). 12 On the View menu. 17 Click . Creating a Walkthrough | 729 . 9 To change the size of the walkthrough frame crop region. select the crop boundary. enter 1. and for Height. and click OK. and click OK. click the dimensions for Size. 11 Under Change. for Width. 13 On the Options Bar. 16 On the Options Bar. and select the crop boundary. verify that Field of view is selected. click Zoom ➤ Zoom Out (2x). 14 Click .8 Verify that the crop boundary of the walkthrough frame is selected and is displayed as red with blue grips. Two options are displayed on the Options Bar: Edit Walkthrough and Size. 10 In the Crop Region Size dialog.

proceed to the next exercise. c_Townhouse. click (Element Properties). clear Far Clip Active. Edit the walkthrough path 4 On the Options Bar. and click OK. Clearing this option disables the far clipping plane of the camera. you learn how to edit the walkthrough path and change the camera position in the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position on page 730. 18 When the walkthrough stops playing. under Extents.rvt. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. press ESC. The current display is wireframe with hidden lines. The camera is displayed at the first key frame position on the walkthrough path in the breakfast room. Change the properties of the camera 1 In the Project Browser. NOTE To stop playing the walkthrough at any time. under Floor Plans. 2 On the Options Bar. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. double-click 1st Floor. 730 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .The walkthrough plays. The walkthrough path is displayed in the floor plan of the first floor. click Edit Walkthrough. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position In this exercise.

5 Select the target point of the camera (the magenta grip). and adjust it to view the kitchen as shown. so do not be concerned if the camera displays at a slightly different location. select Path. Your walkthrough path may vary from the one in the illustration. You can move any camera target or key frame position. 7 Click the third key frame position. 6 On the Options Bar. for Controls. and drag it to the location shown. Blue grips are displayed at each key frame. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position | 731 .

click File menu ➤ Save As. 9 To play the walkthrough. but that do not suffer loss due to compression quality. enter 15. click Edit Walkthrough. shading. the Full Frames (Uncompressed) option is available to all users. 7 Try creating other walkthroughs. 2 In the Length/Format dialog. . and click OK. 9 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. or rendering. 3 Under Format. shading with edges. Recording the Walkthrough In this exercise. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. for Compressor. under Walkthroughs. specifying the number of frames. for Frames/sec. hidden line. Reducing the size of the output images and managing the frame rate lets you create realistic and smooth movement. and then click 10 Proceed to the next exercise. Recording the Walkthrough on page 732.rvt. double-click Walkthrough 1. and with a frame rate of from 15-30 frames per second. 5 In the Video Compression dialog. 6 Double-click the AVI file to play the walkthrough from the location that you specified previously. reducing the size of the image. It produces files that are larger than compressed files. select <Shading>. perhaps to 6'' wide x 4'' height. and click OK. you can select to display the walkthrough in wireframe. under Output Length. for Model Graphics Style. 4 In the Export Walkthrough dialog. 732 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . without opening Revit Structure 2009. If you are unsure of what option to use. c_Townhouse. specify a path and a file name for the AVI. 8 If you want to save this exercise. 1 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Walkthrough. The walkthrough is recorded. on the Options Bar. you record the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise by exporting it to an AVI file. and click Save. select any codec (compression/decompression) that is available on your system. and save the exercise file with a unique name.Play the walkthrough to view the changes that you made 8 In the Project Browser. When you export the walkthrough. NOTE The available Compressor options are specific to your current computer system. then you are moving from the breakfast area to the living room window in 10 seconds. If you had 150 frames and a frame rate of 15 seconds.

In addition. you learn to create several different types of roofs. In this tutorial. you learn how to add fascia. Before you can sketch the roof profile. a work plane named Breezeway exists for the purpose of this exercise. shed. you learn how to create different types of roofs in Revit Structure 2009. and low sloped roofs. you need to select a work plane to use as a sketching guide. In this exercise. 733 . you create an extruded roof over a breezeway between a house and a garage. mansard. including hip. and soffits to the roofs that you create.Roofs 23 In this lesson. Creating Roofs Creating an Extruded Roof You create the roof by sketching the top roof profile and extruding it over the length of the breezeway. Training File ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In this lesson. gutters. you create roofs from footprints and by extrusion. gable. You do not need to create the work plane.

1 In the Project Browser. click Ref Plane. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 4 Click OK.rvt. 3 In the Work Plane dialog. click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion. verify Level 3 is selected for Level. and open Imperial\i_Roofs. 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Views (all). and click OK. The section view is automatically cropped around the area where you want to sketch the roof. 8 Sketch the first reference plane 1'6'' to the left of the left exterior breezeway wall face. verify that Section: Section1 is selected. and double-click Level 1. click Training Files. Before you can sketch the profile of the roof. select Name. 734 | Chapter 23 Roofs . 5 In the Go To View dialog. and then click Open View to select a section view parallel to the work plane in which to sketch the roof. expand Floor Plans. 6 In the Roof Reference Level and Offset dialog. and then select Reference Plane : Breezeway. you need to define four reference planes to help determine key points on the profile sketch.

11 Sketch a horizontal reference plane 1'6" below Level 2. you can place it in the general location and then zoom in and use temporary dimensions. 10 Sketch a vertical reference plane centered between the two vertical walls. Creating an Extruded Roof | 735 . This helps ensure that the plane is measured from the face of the wall rather than from the wall centerline. click the blue square on the witness line. and so on).TIP Instead of trying to place the reference plane in its exact location initially. 9 Sketch a similar reference plane 1'6" to the right of the right exterior breezeway wall face. To change where the temporary dimension is measured from (face. centerline.

15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.Next. The roof is automatically extruded from the Breezeway work plane in one direction. sketch the roof profile. Begin the sketch at the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the horizontal plane. 14 Sketch two sloped lines to create the roof profile. select Chain. click Lines. 13 On the Options Bar. 16 On the View toolbar. 736 | Chapter 23 Roofs . click (Default 3D View) to display the model. Use automatic snaps to link the chain to the reference plane intersections. click Finish Sketch to complete the roof.

The roof should resemble the following illustration. Next. click (Join/Unjoin Roof). 21 In the Project Browser.Notice that the breezeway roof penetrates the house walls inappropriately. 19 On the Tools toolbar. Use the Join Roof command again to join the opposite end of the breezeway roof to the exterior wall of the house that joins the breezeway. 20 Select the breezeway roof edge. expand Sections (Type 1). click (Join/Unjoin Roof). Creating an Extruded Roof | 737 . and select the second wall. and then select the exterior wall face of the garage to join the roof to the garage wall. 23 Select one of the breezeway walls. 17 On the Tools toolbar. so you next attach the breezeway walls to the breezeway roof. The breezeway walls still penetrate the roof. and then select the exterior face of the wall. press CTRL. use the Join Roofs command to adjust the length of the roof and join the roof edges to the exterior walls. and double-click Section 1. expand Views (all). click Modify. 22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. press TAB. 18 Select the edge of the roof.

you create a gable roof over a garage from a footprint. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. 25 Select the roof to join the wall tops to the roof. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. 26 On the View toolbar. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint on page 738. click Attach for Top/Base. (Default 3D View) to view the completed breezeway roof in the 27 Proceed to the next exercise.24 On the Options Bar. click model. 738 | Chapter 23 Roofs .

Because you are in a three-dimensional view. click Pick Walls. Verify that a dashed blue line displays to the left of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. verify that Defines slope is selected. and double-click Garage Roof. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint | 739 . You use roof slope lines to define the roof gable ends. and enter 2' 0'' for Overhang.rvt. 5 On the Options Bar. 2 Select Garage Roof to move the roof to the correct level. you set the roof slope as a property of the footprint slope lines. the roof is automatically created on the lowest level of the house and a notification dialog is displayed. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. To complete the gable roof with the correct pitch. expand Views (all). Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 3 In the Project Browser. and click Yes. Next.You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. sketch the roof footprint. expand Floor Plans. 6 Select the left vertical wall of the garage to define the first roof slope line. 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. i_Roofs.

11 Press CTRL. click (Properties). 15 On the View toolbar. Next. 9 Select the two horizontal walls to create a closed loop and complete the roof footprint. the roof slope has a 9'' rise over a 12'' run. 14 When you see the informational dialog. under Dimensions. The Element Properties dialog is displayed. By default. click the model. click Finish Roof. click Modify.7 Select the parallel wall on the right to define the second roof slope line. (Default 3D View) to view the gable roof and attached walls in 16 Proceed to the next exercise. enter 6'' for Rise/12" to change the roof slope. 13 On the Design Bar. select both slope definition lines. 740 | Chapter 23 Roofs . Verify that a dashed blue line displays to the right of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. edit the properties of the two vertical slope definition lines to change the roof pitch. and click OK. and on the Options Bar. 8 On the Options Bar. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. clear Defines slope. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint on page 741. 10 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Yes to attach the highlighted exterior garage walls to the roof.

i_Roofs. When you complete the roof. expand Floor Plans. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.rvt. sketch the chimney opening. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. After you define the roof slope lines and complete the footprint. 5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls. click Pick Walls.Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint In this exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. NOTE You add the slope defining lines in a later step. expand Views (all). Next. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. the opening that you sketched becomes a void in the roof. and enter 1' 0'' for Overhang. press TAB. clear Defines slope. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. and double-click Level 3. You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. 3 On the Options Bar. you sketch a closed rectangular opening around the chimney. 6 Click to select all the walls. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint | 741 . The roof requires an opening to accommodate a chimney. you add a main gable roof to a house from a footprint. and then verify that a dashed blue line displays to the exterior side of the walls.

click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit to view the entire floor plan. click (Rectangle). click (Default 3D View) to view the new roof in the model. click Finish Roof. 9 Using automatic snaps.7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. add new slope lines to the roof. 12 Select the uppermost horizontal line. sketch a rectangle from the upper left corner of the exterior chimney face to the lower right corner of the exterior chimney face. Next. 15 On the Options bar. 14 Select one of the shorter line segments shown in the following illustration. 10 On the View menu. 742 | Chapter 23 Roofs . select Defines Slope. click Modify. 11 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Lines. 8 On the Options Bar. 17 When you see the informational dialog. 18 On the View toolbar. select Defines Slope. click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 13 On the Options Bar.

select Defines slope.rvt. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint on page 743. expand Floor Plans. i_Roofs. and click (Pick Lines). expand Views (all). 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 7 On the Options Bar. click Lines. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint | 743 . you create a hip roof over the rear of a house from a footprint. and double-click Level 2. Verify that a dashed blue line displays on the exterior side of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the walls. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. close the roof sketch. 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and enter 2' 0'' for Overhang. Next. clear Defines Slope. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 3 On the Options Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. click Pick Walls. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.19 Proceed to the next exercise. Roof sketches must create a closed loop before you can create the roof. The sketched lines cannot overlap or intersect each other. 5 Select the exterior edges of the three walls that create the rear addition to the house. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.

11 To trim the first line segment. click Finish Roof. 9 On the Tools toolbar. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. raise the roof 2' above the current level.8 Select the exterior edge of the uppermost horizontal wall of the main building. Next. You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. 12 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. enter 2' 0'' for Base Offset From Level. Next. 744 | Chapter 23 Roofs . click (Trim/Extend). select the left vertical slope definition line. click Roof Properties. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. using the following illustration for guidance. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. 14 Under Constraints. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. The Element Properties dialog is displayed. 10 On the Options Bar. and then specify a point near the midpoint of the line that you sketched along the wall of the main building.

22 Using the same method that you used previously. 20 Select the roof to join the wall top to the roof. 19 Select one of the walls under the hip roof. Press and hold CTRL to select and join the two remaining walls at the same time. Use the Attach Top/Base command to join the walls to the roof. and use the Orbit tool to view the remaining walls that support the hip roof. 18 On the Design Bar.16 On the View toolbar.) Notice that the walls do not join to the roof. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. click Modify. and use the Orbit tool to view the back of the house. join the two remaining walls to the roof. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. click (SteeringWheels). (Press ESC to close the SteeringWheels. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint | 745 . 21 Click (SteeringWheels). 17 On the View toolbar. click Attach for Top/Base on the Options Bar.

i_Roofs. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint on page 746. click (Join/Unjoin Roof). 24 Select the edge of the hip roof. Next. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.Notice that the new hip roof does not properly join to the back of the house. The properly joined roof should resemble the following illustration. 23 On the Tools toolbar. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. you create a shed roof over the entrance to a house from a footprint. use the Join Roof command to fix the roof. 746 | Chapter 23 Roofs .rvt. and then select the edge of the main roof to join the roofs.

trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. 7 Select the exterior face of the main wall to close the sketch. click Pick Walls.1 In the Project Browser. 4 On the Options Bar. and then select a point near the midpoint of the upper horizontal line you sketched earlier. press TAB. enter 0' 0'' for Overhang. 3 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. clear Defines Slope. and double-click Level 2. expand Floor Plans. 5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls that defines the entry way. 8 On the Tools toolbar. 6 On the Options Bar. you add a slope-defining line. Verify that a blue dashed line displays around the exterior side of the walls before clicking to select the walls. and enter 1' 0'' for Overhang. Next. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. Next. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint | 747 . 11 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. click (Trim/Extend). select the left vertical roof line. expand Views (all). and then click to select all three of the entry way walls. 10 To trim the first line segment. You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 9 On the Options Bar.

click Edit to activate the roof footprint sketch. (SteeringWheels). click Modify. 2 Select the shed roof over the entrance of the house. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof on page 748. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof In this exercise. click Finish Roof to complete the roof. 18 Click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. expand Views (all). 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Notice the rise value is displayed next to the slope marker. and select the lower horizontal line at the front of the roof. 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. expand Floor Plans. 4 In the Project Browser. and double-click 3D.12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and press ENTER. you add slope arrows to the shed roof. and double-click Level 2. click 20 On the View toolbar. enter -2' 0'' for Base Offset From Level. click Roof Properties. 3 On the Options Bar.rvt. 16 Under Constraints. i_Roofs. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 14 Enter 6" for the rise value to change the roof slope. and use the Orbit tool to rotate the model. expand Views (all). 748 | Chapter 23 Roofs . 13 On the Options Bar. expand 3D Views. select Defines slope. 19 On the View toolbar.

and zoom in around the shed roof footprint. click Ref Plane. 7 On the Options Bar. and enter 2' 0'' for Offset. 11 On the Design Bar. 12 On the Options Bar.5 On the View menu. 10 Split the slope defining line where the reference planes intersect as shown in the following illustration. click (Pick Lines). Next. Next. verify ■ (Draw) is selected. click Split Walls and Lines. ■ 16 Repeat steps 13 . and select the middle segment of the slope defining line. 9 On the Tools menu. add two new slope arrows. 15 Sketch a slope arrow from the reference plane to the midpoint of the lower horizontal roof line: Select the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the roof line to specify the location of the slope arrow tail. click Slope Arrow. To help locate the position of each split. clear Defines Slope. 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. change the longest slope line segment (the middle segment) so that it no longer defines slope. Verify that the reference planes are located inside the shed roof sketch. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof | 749 . you need to add two reference planes. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. click Modify. and then select it to specify the location of the slope arrow head.15 to add the second slope arrow. Move the cursor along the roof line until the midpoint displays. you need to split the slope defining line into three segments. 14 On the Options Bar. Before you can add slope arrows. 8 Select the two vertical sketch lines.

on the Options Bar. click Modify. Aligning Roof Eaves In this exercise.rvt. 3 On the Options Bar. i_Roofs. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Finish Roof to complete the roof. you can use the Align Eaves tool to align them. and double-click Garage Roof. 21 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Edit. you convert the gable roof over the garage to a hip roof and use the Align Eaves tool to adjust the eave heights. The head should snap to the midpoint of the line as in the previous steps. NOTE If the front wall is separated from the roof. (Properties). select both slope arrows. (Properties). 7 In the Element Properties dialog. click 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and move the cursor to place the arrow. and then click OK. and click OK. enter 12'' for Rise/12". 23 Proceed to the next exercise. When eave heights differ. This dimension is the height of the eave measured from the sketch plane. 22 Click (Default 3D View) on the View toolbar to display the model. click Align Eaves. Aligning Roof Eaves on page 750. The eave lines display with a dimension. 9 Select the left vertical eave to use to align the eaves. 1 In the Project Browser. 20 Under Dimensions. expand Floor Plans. 750 | Chapter 23 Roofs .Begin the tail at the right reference plane. enter 6'' for Rise/12". Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 4 Select the two gable end lines (the lines without slope definition). When aligning eaves. select Slope for Specify. you must select one eave to use to align both eaves. expand Views (all). 18 Press CTRL. under Dimensions. 6 With the two gable end lines selected. and click 19 Under Constraints. the adjacent eave heights must align. select Defines Slope. use the Attach Top/Base command to join the wall to the roof. 5 On the Options Bar. When you sketch a hip roof. 2 Select the gable roof over the garage.

and open Imperial\i_Mansard_Roof. select Adjust Overhang to align the eaves by adjusting the overhang to match the eave height of the first eave.Next. you create a mansard roof by cutting off a hip roof at a specific level and adding another roof on top of it. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 12 On the Design Bar. Creating a Mansard Roof In this exercise. Creating a Mansard Roof on page 751. 14 If you want to save your changes. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. 10 On the Options Bar. click Finish Roof. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. on the File menu. click Training Files.rvt. click Save As. 11 Select both the horizontal eave lines. select a method to align the eaves. Notice how the overhang adjusts to match the eave height of the first eave. 13 On the View toolbar. Creating a Mansard Roof | 751 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 15 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.

Next. expand Views (all). Notice the model has four defined levels: In the next steps. expand Floor Plans. expand Views (all). and double-click Level 3.1 In the Project Browser. click Lines. (Properties). expand Elevations. 6 On the View toolbar. create a new roof that starts at level 3 and completes the mansard roof. select Level 3 for Cutoff Level. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. on the Options Bar. under Constraints. 7 In the Project Browser. click 5 Click OK to cut the top of the roof off at level 3. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 752 | Chapter 23 Roofs . 9 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. you constrain the current roof so it does not rise above Level 3. and double-click North. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 3 Select the roof and. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

click . and save the exercise file with a unique name. and click OK. and then select Defines slope. 13 Select one of the roof cutoff lines. Creating a Mansard Roof | 753 . click mansard roof. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. enter 3'' for Rise/12". Creating a Low Slope Roof on page 754. 11 Select the four edges of the roof cutoff. click (Pick Lines). click Finish Roof. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. click Save As. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. under Dimensions. 14 On the Options Bar.10 On the Options Bar. 19 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. click Modify. press TAB. and select the remaining three lines. (Default 3D View) to display the model with the complete 18 If you want to save your changes. on the File menu. 17 On the View toolbar. 20 Proceed to the next exercise.

Creating a Low Slope Roof In this exercise. click Pick Walls.rvt. You also modify the structure of the roof slab to more accurately represent the tapered insulation condition used to create the roof drainage system. After you add the roof. NOTE This exercise uses a common training file and Imperial units. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Common\c_Low_Slope_Roof. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 3 On the Design Bar. you add a roof to a building shell. under Floor Plans. 754 | Chapter 23 Roofs . 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Create a flat roof by footprint 1 In the Project Browser. you modify the slab to represent roof drains in the low slope roof. double-click Roof. click Training Files. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint.

Because the walls are not continuous. select the interior face of the curved wall on the right. and that Overhang is 0' 0''. 7 On the Tools toolbar.4 On the Options Bar. you cannot use TAB to select the chain of walls. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 755 . Instead you select walls on each side of the building and then use the Trim tool to create a closed loop sketch. 5 In the drawing area. click (Trim/Extend). verify that Defines slope is not selected. 6 Select the interior face of a wall segment on each side of the building and 1 on either side of the arc wall at the entry.

10 In the Element Properties dialog. select Steel Truss .EPDM. click Finish Roof. for Type. Open a section view 12 In the drawing area. as shown: 9 On the Design Bar. 756 | Chapter 23 Roofs . 13 Zoom in to the upper left area of the roof.Insulation on Metal Deck . click Roof Properties.8 Select the walls to create a closed loop. 11 On the Design Bar. double-click the section head to open the section view. and click OK.

and click to select it. In the next steps.The roof has been created. 16 On the Options Bar. you alter the shape of the slab to represent a roof drainage layout. under Floor Plans. but it is a flat object with no slope or indication of roof drainage. double-click Roof. click (Draw Split Lines). 15 Use the TAB key to highlight the roof. Add split lines to segment the roof 14 In the Project Browser. 18 Move the cursor down. and select the midpoint of the bottom horizontal roof line Creating a Low Slope Roof | 757 . 17 Select the midpoint of the top horizontal roof line. You use this tool to split the roof slab into 6 regions so that you can modify the slope independently.

move the cursor horizontally to the left. on the Options Bar. Next. (Add points). Add elevation points 21 With the roof still selected. and select a point on the opposite roof line.You create a split line vertically down the center. The roof is now divided into 6 sections. 758 | Chapter 23 Roofs . 19 Select the lower endpoint of the arc line. 20 Using the same method. you begin to shape the slab by adding points for the roof drains and modifying the elevations of the points and edges. add a second horizontal split line beginning at the top endpoint of the arc. click 22 Click to add a point close to the center of each section.

and press ENTER. You modify the points individually. specify a -2'' dimension for the remaining 5 points. click (Modify Sub-Elements). exact placement of the points is not important. Layout tools in Revit Structure such as reference planes and dimensions can be used to more accurately place editing points on a roof slab. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 759 .In this exercise. The dimensional value is relative to the roof plane. You could also select multiple points and change them all at once from the Options Bar. 24 Select the point in the upper left region of the roof. for the dimension. 25 Using the same method. enter -2''. 23 On the Options Bar.

760 | Chapter 23 Roofs .The lines on the roof now represent the ridges of the deformed slab shape. for Elevation. as shown: 28 On the Options Bar. 29 On the Design Bar. 27 Press and hold CTRL. and press ENTER. enter 4''. click (Modify Sub-Elements). click Modify. Edit the roof edges 26 On the Options Bar. and select all of the roof edges. including the interior edges of the roof regions.

click Edit. for Structure. click Edit/New. Modify the construction of the slab type 30 In the drawing area. In some cases this type of slope is desired. click (Properties). leaving the other layers to maintain the original plane of placement for the roof. You edit the construction of the slab type to achieve this result. The entire slab is sloped. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. 36 View the results in the section view. and on the Options Bar.Clicking Modify or pressing ESC exits the editing mode and the shape edits are applied to the slab. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 761 . for the Thermal/Air Layer. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. 31 Select the roof slab. 35 Click OK 3 times. The slab has not responded exactly as intended. 34 In the Edit Assembly dialog. the slope will be accommodated in the insulation layer. under Construction. double-click the section head to view the additional affects of the shape editing. select Variable. By making the insulation layer variable. but in this case you want the insulation layer to create the slope.

3 Press CTRL. you can easily create its fascia. gutters.rvt. and open Common\c_Condominium. 37 If you want to save your changes. Gutters. 38 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. you learn to use the Host Sweep command to create fascia on the roof of a condominium. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. 762 | Chapter 23 Roofs .rfa and Gutter Profile-Cove. click Save As. and soffits. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Creating Roof Fascia In this exercise. Creating Fascia. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Fascia. After you create a roof.The insulation now tapers from the edges to the drain in the center. Creating Fascia. and soffits in Revit Structure. select Fascia-Built-Up. 1 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family. and click Open. click (Properties). and Soffits In this lesson. 5 On the Options Bar. click Edit/New to access the type properties of the fascia. and Soffits on page 762. and save the exercise file with a unique name. click Training Files. Gutters. on the File menu. and open Imperial\Families\Profiles\Roofs. gutters. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rfa. you learn how to create roof fascia. 39 Proceed to the next lesson.

7 In the Type Properties dialog. click Duplicate. click Modify to exit the Fascia command. 11 Select the top edge of the roof to place the fascia. Creating Gutters on page 764. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. 8 In the Name dialog. 14 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating Roof Fascia | 763 . and click OK. select Fascia-Built-Up: 1 x 12 w 1 x 8 for Profile. 12 Select all of the roof top edges to place the fascia around the building. 13 On the Design Bar. under Construction. enter Built-up Fascia. and click OK twice. 10 Move the cursor to the top edge of the roof.

select Gutter-Bevel: 5'' x 5'' for Profile. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. under Construction. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Gutter. 7 Under Materials and Finishes. 10 Click to place the gutter.Creating Gutters In this exercise. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. 2 On the Options Bar. 3 In the Properties dialog. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. 5 Enter Cove Shape Gutter for Name. 764 | Chapter 23 Roofs . c_Condominium. click Duplicate. click in the Value field for Material. click Edit/New. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. . and then click 8 In the Materials dialog. 9 Move the cursor to the bottom edge of the roof.rvt. you use the Host Sweep command to place a gutter at the bottom edge of the roof on a condominium building model. and click OK three times. select Metal-Aluminum for Name. click (Properties).

You add the soffit underneath the roof of the condominium building model that you used in the previous exercise. expand Views.rvt. Creating Soffits on page 765. click Roof ➤ Roof Soffit. 1 In the Project Browser. Creating Soffits | 765 . c_Condominium.11 Continue to add gutters to the other roof edges of the building model. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Pick Roofs. 3 On the Design Bar. and double-click Roof. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. expand Floor Plans. Creating Soffits In this exercise. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you learn how to place a roof soffit.

766 | Chapter 23 Roofs . click Join Geometry. click Finish Sketch. expand Views (all). Notice that the geometry of the roof and the soffit overlap.4 Select the roof. expand 3D Views. 5 On the Design Bar. 8 Select the roof. and double-click 3D. 6 In the Project Browser. and then select the soffit to join them. 7 On the Tools menu.

9 If you want to save your changes. on the File menu. Creating Soffits | 767 . and save the exercise file with a unique name. 10 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. click Save As.

768 .

It also gives all those with access to the library the ability to load any group from the library into their project drawing. you also simplify the modification process. you create a model group for a typical kitchen for a condominium unit. or with those working on a different project. and typical office layouts. when you make changes to a single instance of a model group. This functionality ensures consistency within and across projects. Creating and Placing a Group In this exercise. By grouping objects. all instances in the building model are updated. After you create a model group. In another exercise. and is contained in every instance of the host group that you place in the building model. you add the new model group to a previously created group. you can place instances of the group in the building model using various methods. You mirror one instance of the group. Saving a group to a library gives you the ability to share the group with other team members working on the same project. Modifications to the nested group are automatically included in the host group. In this exercise. you can create reusable entities that represent layouts common to many building projects. You can also nest groups within other groups. Modifying. and then you nest the kitchen in a 2 bedroom condominium unit group. and Nesting Groups In this lesson. In this tutorial. For example.Grouping 24 Using the grouping functionality in Revit Structure. Because existing groups can be duplicated and then customized for another purpose. You create the group by selecting drawing objects and grouping them as a single entity. place. Examples of the types of units for which groups are intended include condominium units. and all new instances that you place contain the modifications. you not only simplify their placement. and modify repetitive units. you learn how to use model groups to collect related elements to simplify placement of repetitive units. The new group is considered nested within the host group. and rotate the other instance to modify the layout position. 769 . the host group is also updated automatically. When you make changes to a nested group. you create a model group for a typical kitchen. hotel rooms. you place 2 new instances of the kitchen group in the floor plan. You can also update all instances of a group in the building model by editing a single instance of the group and saving the changes. creating a library of groups for your office can reduce the amount of work needed to create. Creating.

Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. and zoom to the kitchen in the upper-left area of the floor plan. enter ZR. expand Floor Plans. and double-click First Floor. NOTE You may need to scroll the left pane to see the Training Files folder. expand Views (all). 770 | Chapter 24 Grouping . and open Imperial\i_Groups-Condominium. 2 Click in the drawing area. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Create a group for the typical kitchen layout 1 In the Project Browser.

4 On the Edit toolbar. The objects are now grouped and can be placed in the drawing as a single entity.3 Draw a selection box (lower-right corner to upper-left corner) around the kitchen. Creating and Placing a Group | 771 . 5 In the Create Model Group dialog. and click OK. click (Group). enter Typical Kitchen.

7 On the Design Bar. 8 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. select the center control for the group origin. and drag it to the upper-right corner of the kitchen. 772 | Chapter 24 Grouping . click Modify.Change the origin point for the group 6 In the drawing area.

and click Create Instance. 12 On the Design Bar. 10 Zoom to the center of the floor plan. expand Model. Creating and Placing a Group | 773 . 13 Select the first instance of the Typical Kitchen group that you just placed. under Groups. and click the upper-left corner of the lower unit to place the kitchen group. click Modify.Place instances of the group 9 In the Project Browser. right-click Typical Kitchen. 11 Click in the upper-right corner of the stairwell to place a second instance.

select the group and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to make any minor adjustments. 774 | Chapter 24 Grouping . 16 Select the adjacent wall near the sink as the axis of reflection. NOTE If the kitchen is not placed exactly as shown in the following image. 15 On the Options Bar. The kitchen is now positioned correctly in the floor plan. clear Copy. click (Mirror).14 On the Edit toolbar.

Creating and Placing a Group | 775 .17 Select the kitchen in the stairwell. 18 Click in the drawing area to the left of the kitchen. 19 Click above the right area of the kitchen to rotate the placement. and on the Edit toolbar. click (Rotate).

NOTE If the kitchen is not placed exactly as shown in the following images. click Modify. 20 On the Design Bar. and one rotated. as shown. select the group and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to make any minor adjustments. one mirrored. 776 | Chapter 24 Grouping . You should now have three instances of the Typical Kitchen group in your model: one with the original orientation. 21 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit.

23 Navigate to your preferred directory. When you finish editing. name the file i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. Modifying a Group In this exercise.rvt. and click Save. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. all instances of the same group in the drawing are updated. Modifying a Group | 777 . Modify visibility of elements in a group 1 Zoom in to the kitchen on the right above the stair. click Save As. you make changes to an instance of a group.Save the training file 22 On the File menu. 2 Move the cursor over the wall to the left of the kitchen. and click to select it.rvt. press TAB to highlight the wall. i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress.

4 Move the cursor over the door. and click to select the wall. and click member to group instance. Click icon to exclude in this group instance. press TAB. Click icon to exclude in this group instance. 8 On the Design Bar. 6 Move the cursor over the horizontal wall. and click to select the door. Click icon to exclude in this group instance. (Restore excluded group 5 Click (Group Member.). press TAB.). 7 Click (Group Member.). select the element. NOTE To display an excluded element.3 Click (Group Member. 778 | Chapter 24 Grouping . This element remains in the group but is not visible in the project view for this group instance.). click Modify.

click Wall. 11 On the Design Bar. 12 On the Design Bar.Add elements for a unique condition 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click to draw a horizontal wall that extends to the left vertical wall. 13 In the Type Selector. click Modify. 10 Click at the endpoint of the short vertical wall in the kitchen entrance. select Bifold-4 Panel : 48'' x 84''. 14 On the Options Bar. clear Tag on Placement. Modifying a Group | 779 . 15 Click in the new wall on the left and on the right to place 2 sets of folding doors for a closet. move the cursor to the left. click Door.

16 On the Design Bar. Modify geometry of a group and have changes display in all group instances 18 Zoom in to the kitchen in the left area of the floor plan. select the vertical wall to the left of the long counter top. 17 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. 20 On the Options Bar. select Opening ➤ Wall Opening. the background color of the drawing area is pale yellow. click Modify. 19 Select the Typical Kitchen group. 23 Click near the bottom corner of the wall. click Edit Group. The elements in this instance of the group remain displayed in their object style. and click near the top corner of the wall to create an opening. 22 In the drawing area. move the cursor up. 21 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and the group editor toolbar initially displays in the upper left corner. In edit group mode. All other elements in the model are grayed out. 780 | Chapter 24 Grouping .

and the wall and folding doors for the closet. 26 In the Element Properties dialog. for Unconnected Height. and on the Options Bar. which acts as the host. and click OK. When you nest the kitchen in the 2 bedroom unit. enter 7'. All instances of the Typical Kitchen are updated to reflect the change. click Modify.24 On the Design Bar. click Finish. to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. under Constraints. you add the Typical Kitchen group. (Element Properties). 29 Click File menu ➤ Save. enter 3' 4''. 28 On the group editor toolbar. all instances of the host group are updated to contain the nested group. click 27 For Base Offset. created in an earlier lesson. Nesting Groups In this exercise. 25 Select the opening. Nesting Groups | 781 . The kitchen group is then nested within the 2 bedroom unit group.

3 On the Options Bar. in the Project Browser. 4 On the group editor toolbar.Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. 2 Select the 2 Bedroom Unit group in the top area of the floor plan. i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. 5 In the drawing area. click (Add to Group). Add elements to an existing group 1 If necessary. click Edit Group.rvt. under Floor Plans. select the Typical Kitchen group. double-click First Floor. 782 | Chapter 24 Grouping .

select the wall between the folding doors. double-click Second Floor. Nesting Groups | 783 . 9 Select the 2 bedroom group.6 Press TAB. 7 On the group editor toolbar. click Finish. Notice that the Typical Kitchen and pantry are nested within the 2 bedroom group. under Floor Plans. 8 In the Project Browser. and each of the bifold doors.

Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. You can add the detail group to other views of the building model. such as text. You work with the attached detail group in a different way than you had previously worked with host and nested groups because attached detail groups require more manual manipulation. 2 Zoom in to the stair area in the center of the floor plan. Detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements. Creating a Detail Group In this exercise. Draw a filled region 1 In the Project Browser. such as door and window tags.rvt. you add door tags to a group. double-click First Floor. 784 | Chapter 24 Grouping . and filled regions. You create a detail group in the First Floor plan and add the group to the Second Floor plan of the building model. you sketch and annotate a rectangular filled region that represents an area of tiled flooring in front of the elevators in the building model. Working with Detail Groups In this lesson.10 Click File menu ➤ Save. and create an attached detail group containing the tags. You then save the region and the text note as a detail group. i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. you work with groups in order to use them in the most efficient manner within and across projects. Attached detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements that are associated with a specific model group. In the next exercise. under Floor Plans.

A rectangular region with a diagonal cross hatch pattern is added in front of the elevator doors. 7 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. 4 On the Options Bar. click Filled Region. 6 Move the cursor down and to the left. click to draw a rectangular region. Creating a Detail Group | 785 . and select a point below the left elevator. 5 Click the upper-right endpoint below the elevators as the start point of the rectangle.3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

12 Enter Tile. select the instance of the Elevator lobby tile group. and click OK. 17 Move the origin of the group to the corner of the elevator shaft. and select the text note and the filled region. 14 On the Edit toolbar. Create a detail group 13 Press and hold CTRL. 10 Click in the filled region to specify the leader start point. 11 Click below the filled region to end the leader and specify the text start point. click Modify. 786 | Chapter 24 Grouping . as shown. and on the Design Bar. The text note with arc leader is added to the building model. 9 On the Options Bar.Add a text note 8 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 16 In the drawing area. 15 In the Create Detail Group dialog. click Text. click (Group). enter Elevator Lobby Tile. click to add an arc leader.

20 In the Project Browser. click Modify 23 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. right-click Elevator Lobby Tile. and then use the door tags to create an attached detail group. you add door tags to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. expand Detail. 22 On the Design Bar. click to place the detail group in front of the elevators. under Groups. Add a group instance to a different view 19 In the Project Browser. and click Create Instance. Because the detail group contains variables. 21 In the drawing area.18 On the Design Bar. 24 Click File menu ➤ Save. under Floor Plans. Using Attached Detail Groups In this exercise. it cannot be added to a group in the same Using Attached Detail Groups | 787 . double-click Second Floor. click Modify.

788 | Chapter 24 Grouping . click Modify. clear Leader. 5 On the Design Bar. 3 On the Options Bar. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. NOTE Your door tag numbers may be different. Create an attached detail group 6 In the drawing area. draw a selection box (lower-right corner to upper-left corner) around the right area of the floor plan including the door tags. as shown. under Floor Plans. i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. click Tag ➤ By Category. Place door tags 1 In the Project Browser. double-click First Floor.rvt. 4 Place door tags (10 total) in the original instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit.manner that a drawing component can be added. you must manually attach it to each instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group.

enter 2 Bedroom Door Tags. 10 In the Create Model Group and Attached Detail Group dialog.7 On the Options Bar. double-click Second Floor. and click OK. click Check None. 11 In the Project Browser. for Attached Detail Group Name. click (Filter Selection). Place a detail group in another group instance 12 In the Project Browser. 9 On the Edit toolbar. 8 In the Filter dialog. and view that Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags is attached. and click OK. select Door Tags. click (Group). under Floor Plans. expand Groups\Model\2 Bedroom Unit. Using Attached Detail Groups | 789 .

click Place Detail. Using groups from a library ensures consistency and increases productivity for projects that reuse similar typical layouts for repetitive units. select Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags. You also convert the group instance to a linked file to replace the group with an alternative unit layout. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save. 15 In the Attached Detail Group Placement dialog. Saving and Loading Groups In this exercise. NOTE Component instance numbering is sequential. Saving and Loading Groups In this lesson. click Modify. you can then work with it in the context of the new project. 16 On the Design Bar. therefore. the doors are numbered based upon the order in which you placed each group. and click OK. Training File 790 | Chapter 24 Grouping . 14 On the Options Bar. you save a typical condominium layout to a library where it can be accessed by other team members for use in other projects. This enables you to create a library of groups that can be shared with other team members and used on multiple projects. Door Tags are placed on the Second Floor instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. you save a group to a library so that you can use the group in a new project. When you load the group from the library into a new project.13 Select the model group 2 Bedroom Unit.

In this case. for Create new. explaining that duplicate types were found and the types from the new project will be used. 7 In the Load File as Group dialog. 12 On the Design Bar. i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. and click Open. A warning dialog displays. 8 In the Duplicate Types dialog. accept the default template file. Place an instance of the loaded group 9 In the Project Browser. 11 Click in the drawing area to place the group instance. You can save a group as a Revit project file (RVT) if you are working in a project. 6 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. and click Create Instance. and expand Model. verify that Project is selected. Save a group to a library 1 In the Project Browser. Load the group in a new project 4 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. 2 In the left pane of the Save Group dialog. Saving and Loading Groups | 791 .Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. click OK. and click Save. expand Groups. and click OK. and click Save Group. 5 In the New Project dialog. verify that Same as group name is selected. or a Revit family file (RFA) if you are working in the Family Editor. browse to the Desktop. 13 Zoom in to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. 10 Right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. click Desktop.rvt. under Groups\Model. the file is saved as a Revit project file (RVT).rvt. select 2 Bedroom Unit. click Modify. 3 For File name.

and click OK.rvt file is added as a link to the project. and open Common\c_2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. click Use Existing.Convert group instance to a linked file 14 Select the group. click Training Files. but the linked model file will still be loaded in the project. 25 The linked file is converted to a new model group stored in the project. select the linked Revit model. 15 In the Convert Group to Link dialog. click Yes to replace the existing Typical Kitchen group with the alternate Typical Kitchen group. 17 On the Design Bar. either the selected group can be used to make a new linked file. When a group is converted to a link. 21 In the Bind Link Options dialog. verify that Attached Details is selected only. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. 22 In the Duplicate Types dialog. 23 In the confirmation dialog. and on the Options Bar. click Bind. The 2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. click Remove Link. expand Revit Links. This message indicates that all instances of the linked model will be deleted from the project. Convert the linked model to a group 19 In the drawing area. 20 On the Options Bar. click Modify. 24 In the message dialog. 792 | Chapter 24 Grouping . and the link is removed. 18 In the Project Browser. You can remove the linked file from the project by clicking Remove Link. click Link.rvt. click OK. or you can remove it at a later time from the Manage Links dialog. or the group instance can be replaced with an existing linked file.

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful